:var
:results
:file
:file-desc
:file-ext
:output-dir
:dir
and remote execution:exports
:tangle
:mkdirp
:comments
:padline
:no-expand
:session
:noweb
:noweb-ref
:noweb-sep
:cache
:sep
:hlines
:colnames
:rownames
:shebang
:tangle-mode
:eval
:wrap
:post
:prologue
:epilogue
Next: Introduction, Previous: (dir), Up: (dir) [Contents][Index]
This manual is for Org version 9.1.14 (release_9.1.14).
Copyright © 2004–2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover Texts being “A GNU Manual,” and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”
(a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and modify this GNU manual.”
• Introduction: | Getting started | |
• Document structure: | A tree works like your brain | |
• Tables: | Pure magic for quick formatting | |
• Hyperlinks: | Notes in context | |
• TODO items: | Every tree branch can be a TODO item | |
• Tags: | Tagging headlines and matching sets of tags | |
• Properties and columns: | Storing information about an entry | |
• Dates and times: | Making items useful for planning | |
• Capture - Refile - Archive: | The ins and outs for projects | |
• Agenda views: | Collecting information into views | |
• Markup: | Prepare text for rich export | |
• Exporting: | Sharing and publishing notes | |
• Publishing: | Create a web site of linked Org files | |
• Working with source code: | Export, evaluate, and tangle code blocks | |
• Miscellaneous: | All the rest which did not fit elsewhere | |
• Hacking: | How to hack your way around | |
• MobileOrg: | Viewing and capture on a mobile device | |
• History and acknowledgments: | How Org came into being | |
• GNU Free Documentation License: | The license for this documentation. | |
• Main Index: | An index of Org’s concepts and features | |
• Key Index: | Key bindings and where they are described | |
• Command and Function Index: | Command names and some internal functions | |
• Variable Index: | Variables mentioned in the manual | |
— The Detailed Node Listing — Introduction | ||
---|---|---|
• Summary: | Brief summary of what Org does | |
• Installation: | Installing Org | |
• Activation: | How to activate Org for certain buffers | |
• Feedback: | Bug reports, ideas, patches etc. | |
• Conventions: | Typesetting conventions in the manual | |
Document structure | ||
• Outlines: | Org is based on Outline mode | |
• Headlines: | How to typeset Org tree headlines | |
• Visibility cycling: | Show and hide, much simplified | |
• Motion: | Jumping to other headlines | |
• Structure editing: | Changing sequence and level of headlines | |
• Sparse trees: | Matches embedded in context | |
• Plain lists: | Additional structure within an entry | |
• Drawers: | Tucking stuff away | |
• Blocks: | Folding blocks | |
• Footnotes: | How footnotes are defined in Org’s syntax | |
• Orgstruct mode: | Structure editing outside Org | |
• Org syntax: | Formal description of Org’s syntax | |
Visibility cycling | ||
• Global and local cycling: | Cycling through various visibility states | |
• Initial visibility: | Setting the initial visibility state | |
• Catching invisible edits: | Preventing mistakes when editing invisible parts | |
Tables | ||
• Built-in table editor: | Simple tables | |
• Column width and alignment: | Overrule the automatic settings | |
• Column groups: | Grouping to trigger vertical lines | |
• Orgtbl mode: | The table editor as minor mode | |
• The spreadsheet: | The table editor has spreadsheet capabilities | |
• Org-Plot: | Plotting from org tables | |
The spreadsheet | ||
• References: | How to refer to another field or range | |
• Formula syntax for Calc: | Using Calc to compute stuff | |
• Formula syntax for Lisp: | Writing formulas in Emacs Lisp | |
• Durations and time values: | How to compute durations and time values | |
• Field and range formulas: | Formula for specific (ranges of) fields | |
• Column formulas: | Formulas valid for an entire column | |
• Lookup functions: | Lookup functions for searching tables | |
• Editing and debugging formulas: | Fixing formulas | |
• Updating the table: | Recomputing all dependent fields | |
• Advanced features: | Field and column names, parameters and automatic recalc | |
Hyperlinks | ||
• Link format: | How links in Org are formatted | |
• Internal links: | Links to other places in the current file | |
• External links: | URL-like links to the world | |
• Handling links: | Creating, inserting and following | |
• Using links outside Org: | Linking from my C source code? | |
• Link abbreviations: | Shortcuts for writing complex links | |
• Search options: | Linking to a specific location | |
• Custom searches: | When the default search is not enough | |
Internal links | ||
• Radio targets: | Make targets trigger links in plain text | |
TODO items | ||
• TODO basics: | Marking and displaying TODO entries | |
• TODO extensions: | Workflow and assignments | |
• Progress logging: | Dates and notes for progress | |
• Priorities: | Some things are more important than others | |
• Breaking down tasks: | Splitting a task into manageable pieces | |
• Checkboxes: | Tick-off lists | |
Extended use of TODO keywords | ||
• Workflow states: | From TODO to DONE in steps | |
• TODO types: | I do this, Fred does the rest | |
• Multiple sets in one file: | Mixing it all, and still finding your way | |
• Fast access to TODO states: | Single letter selection of a state | |
• Per-file keywords: | Different files, different requirements | |
• Faces for TODO keywords: | Highlighting states | |
• TODO dependencies: | When one task needs to wait for others | |
Progress logging | ||
• Closing items: | When was this entry marked DONE? | |
• Tracking TODO state changes: | When did the status change? | |
• Tracking your habits: | How consistent have you been? | |
Tags | ||
• Tag inheritance: | Tags use the tree structure of the outline | |
• Setting tags: | How to assign tags to a headline | |
• Tag hierarchy: | Create a hierarchy of tags | |
• Tag searches: | Searching for combinations of tags | |
Properties and columns | ||
• Property syntax: | How properties are spelled out | |
• Special properties: | Access to other Org mode features | |
• Property searches: | Matching property values | |
• Property inheritance: | Passing values down the tree | |
• Column view: | Tabular viewing and editing | |
• Property API: | Properties for Lisp programmers | |
Column view | ||
• Defining columns: | The COLUMNS format property | |
• Using column view: | How to create and use column view | |
• Capturing column view: | A dynamic block for column view | |
Defining columns | ||
• Scope of column definitions: | Where defined, where valid? | |
• Column attributes: | Appearance and content of a column | |
Dates and times | ||
• Timestamps: | Assigning a time to a tree entry | |
• Creating timestamps: | Commands which insert timestamps | |
• Deadlines and scheduling: | Planning your work | |
• Clocking work time: | Tracking how long you spend on a task | |
• Effort estimates: | Planning work effort in advance | |
• Timers: | Notes with a running timer | |
Creating timestamps | ||
• The date/time prompt: | How Org mode helps you entering date and time | |
• Custom time format: | Making dates look different | |
Deadlines and scheduling | ||
• Inserting deadline/schedule: | Planning items | |
• Repeated tasks: | Items that show up again and again | |
Clocking work time | ||
• Clocking commands: | Starting and stopping a clock | |
• The clock table: | Detailed reports | |
• Resolving idle time: | Resolving time when you’ve been idle | |
Capture - Refile - Archive | ||
• Capture: | Capturing new stuff | |
• Attachments: | Add files to tasks | |
• RSS feeds: | Getting input from RSS feeds | |
• Protocols: | External (e.g., Browser) access to Emacs and Org | |
• Refile and copy: | Moving/copying a tree from one place to another | |
• Archiving: | What to do with finished projects | |
Capture | ||
• Setting up capture: | Where notes will be stored | |
• Using capture: | Commands to invoke and terminate capture | |
• Capture templates: | Define the outline of different note types | |
Capture templates | ||
• Template elements: | What is needed for a complete template entry | |
• Template expansion: | Filling in information about time and context | |
• Templates in contexts: | Only show a template in a specific context | |
Protocols for external access | ||
• store-link protocol: | Store a link, push URL to kill-ring. | |
• capture protocol: | Fill a buffer with external information. | |
• open-source protocol: | Edit published contents. | |
Archiving | ||
• Moving subtrees: | Moving a tree to an archive file | |
• Internal archiving: | Switch off a tree but keep it in the file | |
Agenda views | ||
• Agenda files: | Files being searched for agenda information | |
• Agenda dispatcher: | Keyboard access to agenda views | |
• Built-in agenda views: | What is available out of the box? | |
• Presentation and sorting: | How agenda items are prepared for display | |
• Agenda commands: | Remote editing of Org trees | |
• Custom agenda views: | Defining special searches and views | |
• Exporting agenda views: | Writing a view to a file | |
• Agenda column view: | Using column view for collected entries | |
The built-in agenda views | ||
• Weekly/daily agenda: | The calendar page with current tasks | |
• Global TODO list: | All unfinished action items | |
• Matching tags and properties: | Structured information with fine-tuned search | |
• Search view: | Find entries by searching for text | |
• Stuck projects: | Find projects you need to review | |
Presentation and sorting | ||
• Categories: | Not all tasks are equal | |
• Time-of-day specifications: | How the agenda knows the time | |
• Sorting agenda items: | The order of things | |
• Filtering/limiting agenda items: | Dynamically narrow the agenda | |
Custom agenda views | ||
• Storing searches: | Type once, use often | |
• Block agenda: | All the stuff you need in a single buffer | |
• Setting options: | Changing the rules | |
Markup for rich export | ||
• Paragraphs: | The basic unit of text | |
• Emphasis and monospace: | Bold, italic, etc. | |
• Horizontal rules: | Make a line | |
• Images and tables: | Images, tables and caption mechanism | |
• Literal examples: | Source code examples with special formatting | |
• Special symbols: | Greek letters and other symbols | |
• Subscripts and superscripts: | Simple syntax for raising/lowering text | |
• Embedded LaTeX: | LaTeX can be freely used inside Org documents | |
Embedded LaTeX | ||
• LaTeX fragments: | Complex formulas made easy | |
• Previewing LaTeX fragments: | What will this snippet look like? | |
• CDLaTeX mode: | Speed up entering of formulas | |
Exporting | ||
• The export dispatcher: | The main interface | |
• Export settings: | Common export settings | |
• Table of contents: | The if and where of the table of contents | |
• Include files: | Include additional files into a document | |
• Macro replacement: | Use macros to create templates | |
• Comment lines: | What will not be exported | |
• ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export: | Exporting to flat files with encoding | |
• Beamer export: | Exporting as a Beamer presentation | |
• HTML export: | Exporting to HTML | |
• LaTeX export: | Exporting to LaTeX, and processing to PDF | |
• Markdown export: | Exporting to Markdown | |
• OpenDocument Text export: | Exporting to OpenDocument Text | |
• Org export: | Exporting to Org | |
• Texinfo export: | Exporting to Texinfo | |
• iCalendar export: | Exporting to iCalendar | |
• Other built-in back-ends: | Exporting to a man page | |
• Advanced configuration: | Fine-tuning the export output | |
• Export in foreign buffers: | Author tables and lists in Org syntax | |
Beamer export | ||
• Beamer export commands: | For creating Beamer documents. | |
• Beamer specific export settings: | For customizing Beamer export. | |
• Sectioning Frames and Blocks in Beamer: | For composing Beamer slides. | |
• Beamer specific syntax: | For using in Org documents. | |
• Editing support: | For using helper functions. | |
• A Beamer example: | A complete presentation. | |
HTML export | ||
• HTML Export commands: | Invoking HTML export | |
• HTML Specific export settings: | Settings for HTML export | |
• HTML doctypes: | Exporting various (X)HTML flavors | |
• HTML preamble and postamble: | Inserting preamble and postamble | |
• Quoting HTML tags: | Using direct HTML in Org files | |
• Links in HTML export: | Interpreting and formatting links | |
• Tables in HTML export: | Formatting and modifying tables | |
• Images in HTML export: | Inserting figures with HTML output | |
• Math formatting in HTML export: | Handling math equations | |
• Text areas in HTML export: | Showing an alternate approach, an example | |
• CSS support: | Styling HTML output | |
• JavaScript support: | Folding scripting in the web browser | |
LaTeX export | ||
• LaTeX export commands: | For producing LaTeX and PDF documents. | |
• LaTeX specific export settings: | Unique to this LaTeX back-end. | |
• LaTeX header and sectioning: | For file structure. | |
• Quoting LaTeX code: | Directly in the Org document. | |
• Tables in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to tables. | |
• Images in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to images. | |
• Plain lists in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to lists. | |
• Source blocks in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to source code blocks. | |
• Example blocks in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to example blocks. | |
• Special blocks in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to special blocks. | |
• Horizontal rules in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to horizontal rules. | |
OpenDocument Text export | ||
• Pre-requisites for ODT export: | Required packages. | |
• ODT export commands: | Invoking export. | |
• ODT specific export settings: | Configuration options. | |
• Extending ODT export: | Producing .doc, .pdf files. | |
• Applying custom styles: | Styling the output. | |
• Links in ODT export: | Handling and formatting links. | |
• Tables in ODT export: | Org table conversions. | |
• Images in ODT export: | Inserting images. | |
• Math formatting in ODT export: | Formatting LaTeX fragments. | |
• Labels and captions in ODT export: | Rendering objects. | |
• Literal examples in ODT export: | For source code and example blocks. | |
• Advanced topics in ODT export: | For power users. | |
Math formatting in ODT export | ||
• Working with LaTeX math snippets: | Embedding in LaTeX format. | |
• Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files: | Embedding in native format. | |
Advanced topics in ODT export | ||
• Configuring a document converter: | Registering a document converter. | |
• Working with OpenDocument style files: | Exploring internals. | |
• Creating one-off styles: | Customizing styles, highlighting. | |
• Customizing tables in ODT export: | Defining table templates. | |
• Validating OpenDocument XML: | Debugging corrupted OpenDocument files. | |
Texinfo export | ||
• Texinfo export commands: | Invoking commands. | |
• Texinfo specific export settings: | Setting the environment. | |
• Texinfo file header: | Generating the header. | |
• Texinfo title and copyright page: | Creating preamble pages. | |
• Info directory file: | Installing a manual in Info file hierarchy. | |
• Headings and sectioning structure: | Building document structure. | |
• Indices: | Creating indices. | |
• Quoting Texinfo code: | Incorporating literal Texinfo code. | |
• Plain lists in Texinfo export: | List attributes. | |
• Tables in Texinfo export: | Table attributes. | |
• Images in Texinfo export: | Image attributes. | |
• Special blocks in Texinfo export: | Special block attributes. | |
• A Texinfo example: | Processing Org to Texinfo. | |
Publishing | ||
• Configuration: | Defining projects | |
• Uploading files: | How to get files up on the server | |
• Sample configuration: | Example projects | |
• Triggering publication: | Publication commands | |
Configuration | ||
• Project alist: | The central configuration variable | |
• Sources and destinations: | From here to there | |
• Selecting files: | What files are part of the project? | |
• Publishing action: | Setting the function doing the publishing | |
• Publishing options: | Tweaking HTML/LaTeX export | |
• Publishing links: | Which links keep working after publishing? | |
• Sitemap: | Generating a list of all pages | |
• Generating an index: | An index that reaches across pages | |
Sample configuration | ||
• Simple example: | One-component publishing | |
• Complex example: | A multi-component publishing example | |
Working with source code | ||
• Structure of code blocks: | Code block syntax described | |
• Editing source code: | Language major-mode editing | |
• Exporting code blocks: | Export contents and/or results | |
• Extracting source code: | Create pure source code files | |
• Evaluating code blocks: | Place results of evaluation in the Org mode buffer | |
• Library of Babel: | Use and contribute to a library of useful code blocks | |
• Languages: | List of supported code block languages | |
• Header arguments: | Configure code block functionality | |
• Results of evaluation: | How evaluation results are handled | |
• Noweb reference syntax: | Literate programming in Org mode | |
• Key bindings and useful functions: | Work quickly with code blocks | |
• Batch execution: | Call functions from the command line | |
Header arguments | ||
• Using header arguments: | Different ways to set header arguments | |
• Specific header arguments: | List of header arguments | |
Using header arguments | ||
• System-wide header arguments: | Set globally, language-specific | |
• Language-specific header arguments: | Set in the Org file’s headers | |
• Header arguments in Org mode properties: | Set in the Org file | |
• Language-specific mode properties: | ||
• Code block specific header arguments: | The most commonly used method | |
• Arguments in function calls: | The most specific level, takes highest priority | |
Specific header arguments | ||
• var: | Pass arguments to ‘src’ code blocks | |
• results: | Specify results type; how to collect | |
• file: | Specify a path for output file | |
• file-desc: | Specify a description for file results | |
• file-ext: | Specify an extension for file output | |
• output-dir: | Specify a directory for output file | |
• dir: | Specify the default directory for code block execution | |
• exports: | Specify exporting code, results, both, none | |
• tangle: | Toggle tangling; or specify file name | |
• mkdirp: | Toggle for parent directory creation for target files during tangling | |
• comments: | Toggle insertion of comments in tangled code files | |
• padline: | Control insertion of padding lines in tangled code files | |
• no-expand: | Turn off variable assignment and noweb expansion during tangling | |
• session: | Preserve the state of code evaluation | |
• noweb: | Toggle expansion of noweb references | |
• noweb-ref: | Specify block’s noweb reference resolution target | |
• noweb-sep: | String to separate noweb references | |
• cache: | Avoid re-evaluating unchanged code blocks | |
• sep: | Delimiter for writing tabular results outside Org | |
• hlines: | Handle horizontal lines in tables | |
• colnames: | Handle column names in tables | |
• rownames: | Handle row names in tables | |
• shebang: | Make tangled files executable | |
• tangle-mode: | Set permission of tangled files | |
• eval: | Limit evaluation of specific code blocks | |
• wrap: | Mark source block evaluation results | |
• post: | Post processing of results of code block evaluation | |
• prologue: | Text to prepend to body of code block | |
• epilogue: | Text to append to body of code block | |
Miscellaneous | ||
• Completion: | M-TAB guesses completions | |
• Easy templates: | Quick insertion of structural elements | |
• Speed keys: | Electric commands at the beginning of a headline | |
• Code evaluation security: | Org mode files evaluate inline code | |
• Customization: | Adapting Org to changing tastes | |
• In-buffer settings: | Overview of the #+KEYWORDS | |
• The very busy C-c C-c key: | When in doubt, press C-c C-c | |
• Clean view: | Getting rid of leading stars in the outline | |
• TTY keys: | Using Org on a tty | |
• Interaction: | With other Emacs packages | |
• org-crypt: | Encrypting Org files | |
Interaction with other packages | ||
• Cooperation: | Packages Org cooperates with | |
• Conflicts: | Packages that lead to conflicts | |
Hacking | ||
• Hooks: | How to reach into Org’s internals | |
• Add-on packages: | Available extensions | |
• Adding hyperlink types: | New custom link types | |
• Adding export back-ends: | How to write new export back-ends | |
• Context-sensitive commands: | How to add functionality to such commands | |
• Tables in arbitrary syntax: | Orgtbl for LaTeX and other programs | |
• Dynamic blocks: | Automatically filled blocks | |
• Special agenda views: | Customized views | |
• Speeding up your agendas: | Tips on how to speed up your agendas | |
• Extracting agenda information: | Post-processing of agenda information | |
• Using the property API: | Writing programs that use entry properties | |
• Using the mapping API: | Mapping over all or selected entries | |
Tables and lists in arbitrary syntax | ||
• Radio tables: | Sending and receiving radio tables | |
• A LaTeX example: | Step by step, almost a tutorial | |
• Translator functions: | Copy and modify | |
• Radio lists: | Sending and receiving lists | |
MobileOrg | ||
• Setting up the staging area: | For the mobile device | |
• Pushing to MobileOrg: | Uploading Org files and agendas | |
• Pulling from MobileOrg: | Integrating captured and flagged items | |
Next: Document structure, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
• Summary: | Brief summary of what Org does | |
• Installation: | Installing Org | |
• Activation: | How to activate Org for certain buffers | |
• Feedback: | Bug reports, ideas, patches etc. | |
• Conventions: | Typesetting conventions in the manual |
Next: Installation, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
Org is a mode for keeping notes, maintaining TODO lists, and project planning with a fast and effective plain-text system. It also is an authoring system with unique support for literate programming and reproducible research.
Org is implemented on top of Outline mode, which makes it possible to keep the content of large files well structured. Visibility cycling and structure editing help to work with the tree. Tables are easily created with a built-in table editor. Plain text URL-like links connect to websites, emails, Usenet messages, BBDB entries, and any files related to the projects.
Org develops organizational tasks around notes files that contain lists or information about projects as plain text. Project planning and task management makes use of metadata which is part of an outline node. Based on this data, specific entries can be extracted in queries and create dynamic agenda views that also integrate the Emacs calendar and diary. Org can be used to implement many different project planning schemes, such as David Allen’s GTD system.
Org files can serve as a single source authoring system with export to many different formats such as HTML, LaTeX, Open Document, and Markdown. New export backends can be derived from existing ones, or defined from scratch.
Org files can include source code blocks, which makes Org uniquely suited for authoring technical documents with code examples. Org source code blocks are fully functional; they can be evaluated in place and their results can be captured in the file. This makes it possible to create a single file reproducible research compendium.
Org keeps simple things simple. When first fired up, it should feel like a straightforward, easy to use outliner. Complexity is not imposed, but a large amount of functionality is available when needed. Org is a toolbox. Many users actually run only a (very personal) fraction of Org’s capabilities, and know that there is more whenever they need it.
All of this is achieved with strictly plain text files, the most portable and future-proof file format. Org runs in Emacs. Emacs is one of the most widely ported programs, so that Org mode is available on every major platform.
There is a website for Org which provides links to the newest version of Org, as well as additional information, frequently asked questions (FAQ), links to tutorials, etc. This page is located at https://orgmode.org.
An earlier version (7.3) of this manual is available as a paperback book from Network Theory Ltd.
Next: Activation, Previous: Summary, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
Org is part of recent distributions of GNU Emacs, so you normally don’t need to install it. If, for one reason or another, you want to install Org on top of this pre-packaged version, there are three ways to do it:
We strongly recommend to stick to a single installation method.
Recent Emacs distributions include a packaging system which lets you install Elisp libraries. You can install Org with M-x package-install RET org.
Important: you need to do this in a session where no .org
file has
been visited, i.e., where no Org built-in function have been loaded.
Otherwise autoload Org functions will mess up the installation.
Then, to make sure your Org configuration is taken into account, initialize
the package system with (package-initialize)
in your Emacs init file
before setting any Org option. If you want to use Org’s package repository,
check out the Org ELPA page.
You can download Org latest release from Org’s website. In this case, make sure you set the load-path correctly in your Emacs init file:
(add-to-list 'load-path "~/path/to/orgdir/lisp")
The downloaded archive contains contributed libraries that are not included in Emacs. If you want to use them, add the contrib directory to your load-path:
(add-to-list 'load-path "~/path/to/orgdir/contrib/lisp" t)
Optionally, you can compile the files and/or install them in your system.
Run make help
to list compilation and installation options.
You can clone Org’s repository and install Org like this:
$ cd ~/src/ $ git clone https://code.orgmode.org/bzg/org-mode.git $ cd org-mode/ $ make autoloads
Note that in this case, make autoloads
is mandatory: it defines Org’s
version in org-version.el and Org’s autoloads in
org-loaddefs.el.
Remember to add the correct load-path as described in the method above.
You can also compile with make
, generate the documentation with
make doc
, create a local configuration with make config
and
install Org with make install
. Please run make help
to get
the list of compilation/installation options.
For more detailed explanations on Org’s build system, please check the Org Build System page on Worg.
Next: Feedback, Previous: Installation, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
Org mode buffers need font-lock to be turned on: this is the default in Emacs1.
There are compatibility issues between Org mode and some other Elisp packages, please take the time to check the list (see Conflicts).
The four Org commands org-store-link
, org-capture
,
org-agenda
, and org-switchb
should be accessible through
global keys (i.e., anywhere in Emacs, not just in Org buffers). Here are
suggested bindings for these keys, please modify the keys to your own
liking.
(global-set-key "\C-cl" 'org-store-link) (global-set-key "\C-ca" 'org-agenda) (global-set-key "\C-cc" 'org-capture) (global-set-key "\C-cb" 'org-switchb)
Files with the .org extension use Org mode by default. To turn on Org mode in a file that does not have the extension .org, make the first line of a file look like this:
MY PROJECTS -*- mode: org; -*-
which will select Org mode for this buffer no matter what
the file’s name is. See also the variable
org-insert-mode-line-in-empty-file
.
Many commands in Org work on the region if the region is active. To make
use of this, you need to have transient-mark-mode
turned on, which is
the default. If you do not like transient-mark-mode
, you can create
an active region by using the mouse to select a region, or pressing
C-SPC twice before moving the cursor.
Next: Conventions, Previous: Activation, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
If you find problems with Org, or if you have questions, remarks, or ideas about it, please mail to the Org mailing list emacs-orgmode@gnu.org. You can subscribe to the list on this web page. If you are not a member of the mailing list, your mail will be passed to the list after a moderator has approved it2.
For bug reports, please first try to reproduce the bug with the latest version of Org available—if you are running an outdated version, it is quite possible that the bug has been fixed already. If the bug persists, prepare a report and provide as much information as possible, including the version information of Emacs (M-x emacs-version RET) and Org (M-x org-version RET), as well as the Org related setup in the Emacs init file. The easiest way to do this is to use the command
M-x org-submit-bug-report RET
which will put all this information into an Emacs mail buffer so that you only need to add your description. If you are not sending the Email from within Emacs, please copy and paste the content into your Email program.
Sometimes you might face a problem due to an error in your Emacs or Org mode setup. Before reporting a bug, it is very helpful to start Emacs with minimal customizations and reproduce the problem. Doing so often helps you determine if the problem is with your customization or with Org mode itself. You can start a typical minimal session with a command like the example below.
$ emacs -Q -l /path/to/minimal-org.el
However if you are using Org mode as distributed with Emacs, a minimal setup
is not necessary. In that case it is sufficient to start Emacs as
emacs -Q
. The minimal-org.el
setup file can have contents as
shown below.
;;; Minimal setup to load latest 'org-mode' ;; activate debugging (setq debug-on-error t debug-on-signal nil debug-on-quit nil) ;; add latest org-mode to load path (add-to-list 'load-path "/path/to/org-mode/lisp") (add-to-list 'load-path "/path/to/org-mode/contrib/lisp" t)
If an error occurs, a backtrace can be very useful (see below on how to create one). Often a small example file helps, along with clear information about:
Thank you for helping to improve this program.
If working with Org produces an error with a message you don’t understand, you may have hit a bug. The best way to report this is by providing, in addition to what was mentioned above, a backtrace. This is information from the built-in debugger about where and how the error occurred. Here is how to produce a useful backtrace:
C-u M-x org-reload RET
or select Org -> Refresh/Reload -> Reload Org uncompiled
from the
menu.
Options
menu and select Enter Debugger on Error
.
Previous: Feedback, Up: Introduction [Contents][Index]
Org mainly uses three types of keywords: TODO keywords, tags and property names. In this manual we use the following conventions:
TODO
WAITING
TODO keywords are written with all capitals, even if they are user-defined.
boss
ARCHIVE
User-defined tags are written in lowercase; built-in tags with special meaning are written with all capitals.
Release
PRIORITY
User-defined properties are capitalized; built-in properties with special meaning are written with all capitals.
Moreover, Org uses option keywords (like #+TITLE
to set the title)
and environment keywords (like #+BEGIN_EXPORT html
to start
a HTML
environment). They are written in uppercase in the manual to
enhance its readability, but you can use lowercase in your Org file.
The manual suggests a few global key bindings, in particular C-c a for
org-agenda
and C-c c for org-capture
. These are only
suggestions, but the rest of the manual assumes that these key bindings are in
place in order to list commands by key access.
Also, the manual lists both the keys and the corresponding commands for
accessing a functionality. Org mode often uses the same key for different
functions, depending on context. The command that is bound to such keys has
a generic name, like org-metaright
. In the manual we will, wherever
possible, give the function that is internally called by the generic command.
For example, in the chapter on document structure, M-RIGHT will
be listed to call org-do-demote
, while in the chapter on tables, it
will be listed to call org-table-move-column-right
. If you prefer,
you can compile the manual without the command names by unsetting the flag
cmdnames
in org.texi.
Next: Tables, Previous: Introduction, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Org is based on Outline mode and provides flexible commands to edit the structure of the document.
• Outlines: | Org is based on Outline mode | |
• Headlines: | How to typeset Org tree headlines | |
• Visibility cycling: | Show and hide, much simplified | |
• Motion: | Jumping to other headlines | |
• Structure editing: | Changing sequence and level of headlines | |
• Sparse trees: | Matches embedded in context | |
• Plain lists: | Additional structure within an entry | |
• Drawers: | Tucking stuff away | |
• Blocks: | Folding blocks | |
• Footnotes: | How footnotes are defined in Org’s syntax | |
• Orgstruct mode: | Structure editing outside Org | |
• Org syntax: | Formal description of Org’s syntax |
Next: Headlines, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
Org is implemented on top of Outline mode. Outlines allow a
document to be organized in a hierarchical structure, which (at least
for me) is the best representation of notes and thoughts. An overview
of this structure is achieved by folding (hiding) large parts of the
document to show only the general document structure and the parts
currently being worked on. Org greatly simplifies the use of
outlines by compressing the entire show/hide functionality into a single
command, org-cycle
, which is bound to the TAB key.
Next: Visibility cycling, Previous: Outlines, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
Headlines define the structure of an outline tree. The headlines in Org start with one or more stars, on the left margin3 4. For example:
* Top level headline ** Second level *** 3rd level some text *** 3rd level more text * Another top level headline
Note that a headline named after org-footnote-section
,
which defaults to ‘Footnotes’, is considered as special. A subtree with
this headline will be silently ignored by exporting functions.
Some people find the many stars too noisy and would prefer an outline that has whitespace followed by a single star as headline starters. Clean view, describes a setup to realize this.
An empty line after the end of a subtree is considered part of it and
will be hidden when the subtree is folded. However, if you leave at
least two empty lines, one empty line will remain visible after folding
the subtree, in order to structure the collapsed view. See the
variable org-cycle-separator-lines
to modify this behavior.
Next: Motion, Previous: Headlines, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
• Global and local cycling: | Cycling through various visibility states | |
• Initial visibility: | Setting the initial visibility state | |
• Catching invisible edits: | Preventing mistakes when editing invisible parts |
Next: Initial visibility, Up: Visibility cycling [Contents][Index]
Outlines make it possible to hide parts of the text in the buffer. Org uses just two commands, bound to TAB and S-TAB to change the visibility in the buffer.
org-cycle
)Subtree cycling: Rotate current subtree among the states
,-> FOLDED -> CHILDREN -> SUBTREE --. '-----------------------------------'
The cursor must be on a headline for this to work5.
org-global-cycle
)Global cycling: Rotate the entire buffer among the states
,-> OVERVIEW -> CONTENTS -> SHOW ALL --. '--------------------------------------'
When S-TAB is called with a numeric prefix argument N, the CONTENTS view up to headlines of level N will be shown. Note that inside tables, S-TAB jumps to the previous field.
You can run global cycling using TAB only if point is at the very
beginning of the buffer, but not on a headline, and
org-cycle-global-at-bob
is set to a non-nil
value.
org-set-startup-visibility
)Switch back to the startup visibility of the buffer (see Initial visibility).
outline-show-all
)org-reveal
)Reveal context around point, showing the current entry, the following heading and the hierarchy above. Useful for working near a location that has been exposed by a sparse tree command (see Sparse trees) or an agenda command (see Agenda commands). With a prefix argument show, on each level, all sibling headings. With a double prefix argument, also show the entire subtree of the parent.
outline-show-branches
)Expose all the headings of the subtree, CONTENTS view for just one subtree.
outline-show-children
)Expose all direct children of the subtree. With a numeric prefix argument N, expose all children down to level N.
org-tree-to-indirect-buffer
)Show the current subtree in an indirect buffer6. With a numeric prefix argument N, go up to level N and then take that tree. If N is negative then go up that many levels. With a C-u prefix, do not remove the previously used indirect buffer.
org-copy-visible
)Copy the visible text in the region into the kill ring.
Next: Catching invisible edits, Previous: Global and local cycling, Up: Visibility cycling [Contents][Index]
When Emacs first visits an Org file, the global state is set to OVERVIEW,
i.e., only the top level headlines are visible7. This can be configured through the variable
org-startup-folded
, or on a per-file basis by adding one of the
following lines anywhere in the buffer:
#+STARTUP: overview #+STARTUP: content #+STARTUP: showall #+STARTUP: showeverything
Furthermore, any entries with a VISIBILITY
property (see Properties and columns) will get their visibility adapted accordingly. Allowed values
for this property are folded
, children
, content
, and
all
.
org-set-startup-visibility
)Switch back to the startup visibility of the buffer, i.e., whatever is
requested by startup options and VISIBILITY
properties in individual
entries.
Previous: Initial visibility, Up: Visibility cycling [Contents][Index]
Sometimes you may inadvertently edit an invisible part of the buffer and be
confused on what has been edited and how to undo the mistake. Setting
org-catch-invisible-edits
to non-nil
will help prevent this. See the
docstring of this option on how Org should catch invisible edits and process
them.
Next: Structure editing, Previous: Visibility cycling, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
The following commands jump to other headlines in the buffer.
org-next-visible-heading
)org-previous-visible-heading
)org-forward-same-level
)org-backward-same-level
)outline-up-heading
)org-goto
)Jump to a different place without changing the current outline visibility. Shows the document structure in a temporary buffer, where you can use the following keys to find your destination:
TAB Cycle visibility.
DOWN / UP Next/previous visible headline.
RET Select this location.
/ Do a Sparse-tree search
The following keys work if you turn off org-goto-auto-isearch
n / p Next/previous visible headline.
f / b Next/previous headline same level.
u One level up.
0-9 Digit argument.
q Quit
See also the option org-goto-interface
.
Next: Sparse trees, Previous: Motion, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
org-meta-return
)Insert a new heading, item or row.
If the command is used at the beginning of a line, and if there is a heading or a plain list item (see Plain lists) at point, the new heading/item is created before the current line. When used at the beginning of a regular line of text, turn that line into a heading.
When this command is used in the middle of a line, the line is split and the
rest of the line becomes the new item or headline. If you do not want the
line to be split, customize org-M-RET-may-split-line
.
Calling the command with a C-u prefix unconditionally inserts a new heading at the end of the current subtree, thus preserving its contents. With a double C-u C-u prefix, the new heading is created at the end of the parent subtree instead.
org-insert-heading-respect-content
)org-insert-todo-heading
)Insert new TODO entry with same level as current heading. See also the
variable org-treat-insert-todo-heading-as-state-change
.
org-insert-todo-heading-respect-content
)Insert new TODO entry with same level as current heading. Like C-RET, the new headline will be inserted after the current subtree.
org-cycle
)In a new entry with no text yet, the first TAB demotes the entry to become a child of the previous one. The next TAB makes it a parent, and so on, all the way to top level. Yet another TAB, and you are back to the initial level.
org-do-promote
)org-do-demote
)org-promote-subtree
)org-demote-subtree
)org-move-subtree-up
)org-move-subtree-down
)org-mark-element
)Mark the element at point. Hitting repeatedly will mark subsequent elements of the one just marked. E.g., hitting M-h on a paragraph will mark it, hitting M-h immediately again will mark the next one.
org-mark-subtree
)Mark the subtree at point. Hitting repeatedly will mark subsequent subtrees of the same level than the marked subtree.
org-cut-subtree
)Kill subtree, i.e., remove it from buffer but save in kill ring. With a numeric prefix argument N, kill N sequential subtrees.
org-copy-subtree
)Copy subtree to kill ring. With a numeric prefix argument N, copy the N sequential subtrees.
org-paste-subtree
)Yank subtree from kill ring. This does modify the level of the subtree to make sure the tree fits in nicely at the yank position. The yank level can also be specified with a numeric prefix argument, or by yanking after a headline marker like ‘****’.
org-yank
)Depending on the options org-yank-adjusted-subtrees
and
org-yank-folded-subtrees
, Org’s internal yank
command will
paste subtrees folded and in a clever way, using the same command as C-c
C-x C-y. With the default settings, no level adjustment will take place,
but the yanked tree will be folded unless doing so would swallow text
previously visible. Any prefix argument to this command will force a normal
yank
to be executed, with the prefix passed along. A good way to
force a normal yank is C-u C-y. If you use yank-pop
after a
yank, it will yank previous kill items plainly, without adjustment and
folding.
org-clone-subtree-with-time-shift
)Clone a subtree by making a number of sibling copies of it. You will be
prompted for the number of copies to make, and you can also specify if any
timestamps in the entry should be shifted. This can be useful, for example,
to create a number of tasks related to a series of lectures to prepare. For
more details, see the docstring of the command
org-clone-subtree-with-time-shift
.
org-refile
)Refile entry or region to a different location. See Refile and copy.
org-sort
)Sort same-level entries. When there is an active region, all entries in the region will be sorted. Otherwise the children of the current headline are sorted. The command prompts for the sorting method, which can be alphabetically, numerically, by time (first timestamp with active preferred, creation time, scheduled time, deadline time), by priority, by TODO keyword (in the sequence the keywords have been defined in the setup) or by the value of a property. Reverse sorting is possible as well. You can also supply your own function to extract the sorting key. With a C-u prefix, sorting will be case-sensitive.
org-narrow-to-subtree
)org-narrow-to-block
)widen
)org-toggle-heading
)Turn a normal line or plain list item into a headline (so that it becomes a subheading at its location). Also turn a headline into a normal line by removing the stars. If there is an active region, turn all lines in the region into headlines. If the first line in the region was an item, turn only the item lines into headlines. Finally, if the first line is a headline, remove the stars from all headlines in the region.
When there is an active region (Transient Mark mode), promotion and demotion work on all headlines in the region. To select a region of headlines, it is best to place both point and mark at the beginning of a line, mark at the beginning of the first headline, and point at the line just after the last headline to change. Note that when the cursor is inside a table (see Tables), the Meta-Cursor keys have different functionality.
Next: Plain lists, Previous: Structure editing, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
An important feature of Org mode is the ability to construct sparse trees for selected information in an outline tree, so that the entire document is folded as much as possible, but the selected information is made visible along with the headline structure above it8. Just try it out and you will see immediately how it works.
Org mode contains several commands for creating such trees, all these commands can be accessed through a dispatcher:
org-sparse-tree
)This prompts for an extra key to select a sparse-tree creating command.
org-occur
)Prompts for a regexp and shows a sparse tree with all matches. If the match is in a headline, the headline is made visible. If the match is in the body of an entry, headline and body are made visible. In order to provide minimal context, also the full hierarchy of headlines above the match is shown, as well as the headline following the match. Each match is also highlighted; the highlights disappear when the buffer is changed by an editing command9, or by pressing C-c C-c. When called with a C-u prefix argument, previous highlights are kept, so several calls to this command can be stacked.
next-error
)previous-error
)Jump to the previous sparse tree match in this buffer.
For frequently used sparse trees of specific search strings, you can
use the option org-agenda-custom-commands
to define fast
keyboard access to specific sparse trees. These commands will then be
accessible through the agenda dispatcher (see Agenda dispatcher).
For example:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("f" occur-tree "FIXME")))
will define the key C-c a f as a shortcut for creating a sparse tree matching the string ‘FIXME’.
The other sparse tree commands select headings based on TODO keywords, tags, or properties and will be discussed later in this manual.
To print a sparse tree, you can use the Emacs command
ps-print-buffer-with-faces
which does not print invisible parts of the
document. Or you can use C-c C-e C-v to export only the visible part
of the document and print the resulting file.
Next: Drawers, Previous: Sparse trees, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
Within an entry of the outline tree, hand-formatted lists can provide additional structure. They also provide a way to create lists of checkboxes (see Checkboxes). Org supports editing such lists, and every exporter (see Exporting) can parse and format them.
Org knows ordered lists, unordered lists, and description lists.
[@20]
13. Those constructs can
be used in any item of the list in order to enforce a particular numbering.
Items belonging to the same list must have the same indentation on the first line. In particular, if an ordered list reaches number ‘10.’, then the 2–digit numbers must be written left-aligned with the other numbers in the list. An item ends before the next line that is less or equally indented than its bullet/number.
A list ends whenever every item has ended, which means before any line less or equally indented than items at top level. It also ends before two blank lines. In that case, all items are closed. Here is an example:
** Lord of the Rings My favorite scenes are (in this order) 1. The attack of the Rohirrim 2. Eowyn's fight with the witch king + this was already my favorite scene in the book + I really like Miranda Otto. 3. Peter Jackson being shot by Legolas - on DVD only He makes a really funny face when it happens. But in the end, no individual scenes matter but the film as a whole. Important actors in this film are: - Elijah Wood :: He plays Frodo - Sean Astin :: He plays Sam, Frodo's friend. I still remember him very well from his role as Mikey Walsh in The Goonies.
Org supports these lists by tuning filling and wrapping commands to deal with
them correctly, and by exporting them properly (see Exporting). Since
indentation is what governs the structure of these lists, many structural
constructs like #+BEGIN_...
blocks can be indented to signal that they
belong to a particular item.
If you find that using a different bullet for a sub-list (than that used for
the current list-level) improves readability, customize the variable
org-list-demote-modify-bullet
. To get a greater difference of
indentation between items and their sub-items, customize
org-list-indent-offset
.
The following commands act on items when the cursor is in the first line of
an item (the line with the bullet or number). Some of them imply the
application of automatic rules to keep list structure intact. If some of
these actions get in your way, configure org-list-automatic-rules
to disable them individually.
org-cycle
)Items can be folded just like headline levels. Normally this works only if
the cursor is on a plain list item. For more details, see the variable
org-cycle-include-plain-lists
. If this variable is set to
integrate
, plain list items will be treated like low-level
headlines. The level of an item is then given by the indentation of the
bullet/number. Items are always subordinate to real headlines, however; the
hierarchies remain completely separated. In a new item with no text yet, the
first TAB demotes the item to become a child of the previous
one. Subsequent TABs move the item to meaningful levels in the list
and eventually get it back to its initial position.
org-insert-heading
)Insert new item at current level. With a prefix argument, force a new heading (see Structure editing). If this command is used in the middle of an item, that item is split in two, and the second part becomes the new item14. If this command is executed before item’s body, the new item is created before the current one.
Insert a new item with a checkbox (see Checkboxes).
Jump to the previous/next item in the current list15, but only if
org-support-shift-select
is off. If not, you can still use paragraph
jumping commands like C-UP and C-DOWN to quite
similar effect.
Move the item including subitems up/down16 (swap with previous/next item of same indentation). If the list is ordered, renumbering is automatic.
Decrease/increase the indentation of an item, leaving children alone.
Decrease/increase the indentation of the item, including subitems. Initially, the item tree is selected based on current indentation. When these commands are executed several times in direct succession, the initially selected region is used, even if the new indentation would imply a different hierarchy. To use the new hierarchy, break the command chain with a cursor motion or so.
As a special case, using this command on the very first item of a list will
move the whole list. This behavior can be disabled by configuring
org-list-automatic-rules
. The global indentation of a list has no
influence on the text after the list.
If there is a checkbox (see Checkboxes) in the item line, toggle the state of the checkbox. In any case, verify bullets and indentation consistency in the whole list.
Cycle the entire list level through the different itemize/enumerate bullets
(‘-’, ‘+’, ‘*’, ‘1.’, ‘1)’) or a subset of them,
depending on org-plain-list-ordered-item-terminator
, the type of list,
and its indentation. With a numeric prefix argument N, select the Nth bullet
from this list. If there is an active region when calling this, all selected
lines are converted to list items. With a prefix argument, selected text is
changed into a single item. If the first line already was a list item, any
item marker will be removed from the list. Finally, even without an active
region, a normal line will be converted into a list item.
Turn a plain list item into a headline (so that it becomes a subheading at its location). See Structure editing, for a detailed explanation.
Turn the whole plain list into a subtree of the current heading. Checkboxes (see Checkboxes) will become TODO (resp. DONE) keywords when unchecked (resp. checked).
This command also cycles bullet styles when the cursor in on the bullet or
anywhere in an item line, details depending on
org-support-shift-select
.
Sort the plain list. You will be prompted for the sorting method: numerically, alphabetically, by time, by checked status for check lists, or by a custom function.
Next: Blocks, Previous: Plain lists, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
Sometimes you want to keep information associated with an entry, but you normally don’t want to see it. For this, Org mode has drawers. They can contain anything but a headline and another drawer. Drawers look like this:
** This is a headline Still outside the drawer :DRAWERNAME: This is inside the drawer. :END: After the drawer.
You can interactively insert drawers at point by calling
org-insert-drawer
, which is bound to C-c C-x d. With an active
region, this command will put the region inside the drawer. With a prefix
argument, this command calls org-insert-property-drawer
and add
a property drawer right below the current headline. Completion over drawer
keywords is also possible using M-TAB17.
Visibility cycling (see Visibility cycling) on the headline will hide and
show the entry, but keep the drawer collapsed to a single line. In order to
look inside the drawer, you need to move the cursor to the drawer line and
press TAB there. Org mode uses the PROPERTIES
drawer for
storing properties (see Properties and columns), and you can also arrange
for state change notes (see Tracking TODO state changes) and clock times
(see Clocking work time) to be stored in a drawer LOGBOOK
. If you
want to store a quick note in the LOGBOOK drawer, in a similar way to state
changes, use
Add a time-stamped note to the LOGBOOK drawer.
You can select the name of the drawers which should be exported with
org-export-with-drawers
. In that case, drawer contents will appear in
export output. Property drawers are not affected by this variable: configure
org-export-with-properties
instead.
Next: Footnotes, Previous: Drawers, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
Org mode uses begin...end blocks for various purposes from including source
code examples (see Literal examples) to capturing time logging
information (see Clocking work time). These blocks can be folded and
unfolded by pressing TAB in the begin line. You can also get all blocks
folded at startup by configuring the option org-hide-block-startup
or on a per-file basis by using
#+STARTUP: hideblocks #+STARTUP: nohideblocks
Next: Orgstruct mode, Previous: Blocks, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
Org mode supports the creation of footnotes.
A footnote is started by a footnote marker in square brackets in column 0, no
indentation allowed. It ends at the next footnote definition, headline, or
after two consecutive empty lines. The footnote reference is simply the
marker in square brackets, inside text. Markers always start with
fn:
. For example:
The Org homepage[fn:1] now looks a lot better than it used to. ... [fn:1] The link is: https://orgmode.org
Org mode extends the number-based syntax to named footnotes and optional inline definition. Here are the valid references:
[fn:name]
A named footnote reference, where name
is a unique label word, or, for
simplicity of automatic creation, a number.
[fn::This is the inline definition of this footnote]
A LaTeX-like anonymous footnote where the definition is given directly at the reference point.
[fn:name:a definition]
An inline definition of a footnote, which also specifies a name for the note.
Since Org allows multiple references to the same note, you can then use
[fn:name]
to create additional references.
Footnote labels can be created automatically, or you can create names yourself.
This is handled by the variable org-footnote-auto-label
and its
corresponding #+STARTUP
keywords. See the docstring of that variable
for details.
The following command handles footnotes:
The footnote action command.
When the cursor is on a footnote reference, jump to the definition. When it is at a definition, jump to the (first) reference.
Otherwise, create a new footnote. Depending on the option
org-footnote-define-inline
18, the
definition will be placed right into the text as part of the reference, or
separately into the location determined by the option
org-footnote-section
.
When this command is called with a prefix argument, a menu of additional options is offered:
s Sort the footnote definitions by reference sequence. During editing, Org makes no effort to sort footnote definitions into a particular sequence. If you want them sorted, use this command, which will also move entries according toorg-footnote-section
. Automatic sorting after each insertion/deletion can be configured using the optionorg-footnote-auto-adjust
. r Renumber the simplefn:N
footnotes. Automatic renumbering after each insertion/deletion can be configured using the optionorg-footnote-auto-adjust
. S Short for firstr
, thens
action. n Normalize the footnotes by collecting all definitions (including inline definitions) into a special section, and then numbering them in sequence. The references will then also be numbers. d Delete the footnote at point, and all definitions of and references to it.
Depending on the variable org-footnote-auto-adjust
19,
renumbering and sorting footnotes can be automatic after each insertion or
deletion.
If the cursor is on a footnote reference, jump to the definition. If it is a the definition, jump back to the reference. When called at a footnote location with a prefix argument, offer the same menu as C-c C-x f.
Footnote labels are also links to the corresponding definition/reference, and you can use the usual commands to follow these links.
Edit the footnote definition corresponding to the reference at point in a separate window. The window can be closed by pressing C-c '.
Next: Org syntax, Previous: Footnotes, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
If you like the intuitive way the Org mode structure editing and list
formatting works, you might want to use these commands in other modes like
Text mode or Mail mode as well. The minor mode orgstruct-mode
makes
this possible. Toggle the mode with M-x orgstruct-mode RET, or
turn it on by default, for example in Message mode, with one of:
(add-hook 'message-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgstruct) (add-hook 'message-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgstruct++)
When this mode is active and the cursor is on a line that looks to Org like a headline or the first line of a list item, most structure editing commands will work, even if the same keys normally have different functionality in the major mode you are using. If the cursor is not in one of those special lines, Orgstruct mode lurks silently in the shadows.
When you use orgstruct++-mode
, Org will also export indentation and
autofill settings into that mode, and detect item context after the first
line of an item.
You can also use Org structure editing to fold and unfold headlines in
any file, provided you defined orgstruct-heading-prefix-regexp
:
the regular expression must match the local prefix to use before Org’s
headlines. For example, if you set this variable to ";; "
in Emacs
Lisp files, you will be able to fold and unfold headlines in Emacs Lisp
commented lines. Some commands like org-demote
are disabled when the
prefix is set, but folding/unfolding will work correctly.
Previous: Orgstruct mode, Up: Document structure [Contents][Index]
A reference document providing a formal description of Org’s syntax is
available as a draft on
Worg, written and maintained by Nicolas Goaziou. It defines Org’s core
internal concepts such as headlines
, sections
, affiliated
keywords
, (greater) elements
and objects
. Each part of an Org
file falls into one of the categories above.
To explore the abstract structure of an Org buffer, run this in a buffer:
M-: (org-element-parse-buffer) RET
It will output a list containing the buffer’s content represented as an abstract structure. The export engine relies on the information stored in this list. Most interactive commands (e.g., for structure editing) also rely on the syntactic meaning of the surrounding context.
You can check syntax in your documents using org-lint
command.
Next: Hyperlinks, Previous: Document structure, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Org comes with a fast and intuitive table editor. Spreadsheet-like calculations are supported using the Emacs calc package (see Calc in GNU Emacs Calculator Manual).
• Built-in table editor: | Simple tables | |
• Column width and alignment: | Overrule the automatic settings | |
• Column groups: | Grouping to trigger vertical lines | |
• Orgtbl mode: | The table editor as minor mode | |
• The spreadsheet: | The table editor has spreadsheet capabilities | |
• Org-Plot: | Plotting from org tables |
Next: Column width and alignment, Up: Tables [Contents][Index]
Org makes it easy to format tables in plain ASCII. Any line with ‘|’ as the first non-whitespace character is considered part of a table. ‘|’ is also the column separator20. A table might look like this:
| Name | Phone | Age | |-------+-------+-----| | Peter | 1234 | 17 | | Anna | 4321 | 25 |
A table is re-aligned automatically each time you press TAB or RET or C-c C-c inside the table. TAB also moves to the next field (RET to the next row) and creates new table rows at the end of the table or before horizontal lines. The indentation of the table is set by the first line. Any line starting with ‘|-’ is considered as a horizontal separator line and will be expanded on the next re-align to span the whole table width. So, to create the above table, you would only type
|Name|Phone|Age| |-
and then press TAB to align the table and start filling in
fields. Even faster would be to type |Name|Phone|Age
followed by
C-c RET.
When typing text into a field, Org treats DEL, Backspace, and all
character keys in a special way, so that inserting and deleting avoids
shifting other fields. Also, when typing immediately after the cursor
was moved into a new field with TAB, S-TAB or
RET, the field is automatically made blank. If this behavior is
too unpredictable for you, configure the option
org-table-auto-blank-field
.
org-table-create-or-convert-from-region
)Convert the active region to a table. If every line contains at least one
TAB character, the function assumes that the material is tab separated.
If every line contains a comma, comma-separated values (CSV) are assumed.
If not, lines are split at whitespace into fields. You can use a prefix
argument to force a specific separator: C-u forces CSV, C-u
C-u forces TAB, C-u C-u C-u will prompt for a regular expression to
match the separator, and a numeric argument N indicates that at least N
consecutive spaces, or alternatively a TAB will be the separator.
If there is no active region, this command creates an empty Org
table. But it is easier just to start typing, like
|Name|Phone|Age RET |- TAB.
org-table-align
)org-table-blank-field
)org-table-next-field
)Re-align the table, move to the next field. Creates a new row if necessary.
org-table-previous-field
)org-table-next-row
)Re-align the table and move down to next row. Creates a new row if necessary. At the beginning or end of a line, RET still does NEWLINE, so it can be used to split a table.
org-table-beginning-of-field
)Move to beginning of the current table field, or on to the previous field.
org-table-end-of-field
)Move to end of the current table field, or on to the next field.
org-table-move-column-left
)org-table-move-column-right
)org-table-delete-column
)org-table-insert-column
)org-table-move-row-up
)org-table-move-row-down
)org-table-kill-row
)org-table-insert-row
)Insert a new row above the current row. With a prefix argument, the line is created below the current one.
org-table-insert-hline
)Insert a horizontal line below current row. With a prefix argument, the line is created above the current line.
org-table-hline-and-move
)Insert a horizontal line below current row, and move the cursor into the row below that line.
org-table-sort-lines
)Sort the table lines in the region. The position of point indicates the column to be used for sorting, and the range of lines is the range between the nearest horizontal separator lines, or the entire table. If point is before the first column, you will be prompted for the sorting column. If there is an active region, the mark specifies the first line and the sorting column, while point should be in the last line to be included into the sorting. The command prompts for the sorting type (alphabetically, numerically, or by time). You can sort in normal or reverse order. You can also supply your own key extraction and comparison functions. When called with a prefix argument, alphabetic sorting will be case-sensitive.
org-table-copy-region
)Copy a rectangular region from a table to a special clipboard. Point and mark determine edge fields of the rectangle. If there is no active region, copy just the current field. The process ignores horizontal separator lines.
org-table-cut-region
)Copy a rectangular region from a table to a special clipboard, and blank all fields in the rectangle. So this is the “cut” operation.
org-table-paste-rectangle
)Paste a rectangular region into a table. The upper left corner ends up in the current field. All involved fields will be overwritten. If the rectangle does not fit into the present table, the table is enlarged as needed. The process ignores horizontal separator lines.
org-table-wrap-region
)Split the current field at the cursor position and move the rest to the line below. If there is an active region, and both point and mark are in the same column, the text in the column is wrapped to minimum width for the given number of lines. A numeric prefix argument may be used to change the number of desired lines. If there is no region, but you specify a prefix argument, the current field is made blank, and the content is appended to the field above.
org-table-sum
)Sum the numbers in the current column, or in the rectangle defined by the active region. The result is shown in the echo area and can be inserted with C-y.
org-table-copy-down
)When current field is empty, copy from first non-empty field above. When not
empty, copy current field down to next row and move cursor along with it.
Depending on the option org-table-copy-increment
, integer field
values will be incremented during copy. Integers that are too large will not
be incremented. Also, a 0
prefix argument temporarily disables the
increment. This key is also used by shift-selection and related modes
(see Conflicts).
org-table-edit-field
)Edit the current field in a separate window. This is useful for fields that are not fully visible (see Column width and alignment). When called with a C-u prefix, just make the full field visible, so that it can be edited in place. When called with two C-u prefixes, make the editor window follow the cursor through the table and always show the current field. The follow mode exits automatically when the cursor leaves the table, or when you repeat this command with C-u C-u C-c `.
Import a file as a table. The table should be TAB or whitespace separated. Use, for example, to import a spreadsheet table or data from a database, because these programs generally can write TAB-separated text files. This command works by inserting the file into the buffer and then converting the region to a table. Any prefix argument is passed on to the converter, which uses it to determine the separator.
org-table-create-or-convert-from-region
)Tables can also be imported by pasting tabular text into the Org buffer, selecting the pasted text with C-x C-x and then using the C-c | command (see above under Creation and conversion).
Export the table, by default as a TAB-separated file. Use for data
exchange with, for example, spreadsheet or database programs. The format
used to export the file can be configured in the option
org-table-export-default-format
. You may also use properties
TABLE_EXPORT_FILE
and TABLE_EXPORT_FORMAT
to specify the file
name and the format for table export in a subtree. Org supports quite
general formats for exported tables. The exporter format is the same as the
format used by Orgtbl radio tables, see Translator functions, for a
detailed description.
Next: Column groups, Previous: Built-in table editor, Up: Tables [Contents][Index]
The width of columns is automatically determined by the table editor. And also the alignment of a column is determined automatically from the fraction of number-like versus non-number fields in the column.
Sometimes a single field or a few fields need to carry more text, leading to inconveniently wide columns. Or maybe you want to make a table with several columns having a fixed width, regardless of content. To set the width of a column, one field anywhere in the column may contain just the string ‘<N>’ where ‘N’ is an integer specifying the width of the column in characters. The next re-align will then set the width of this column to this value.
|---+------------------------------| |---+--------| | | | | | <6> | | 1 | one | | 1 | one | | 2 | two | ----\ | 2 | two | | 3 | This is a long chunk of text | ----/ | 3 | This=> | | 4 | four | | 4 | four | |---+------------------------------| |---+--------|
Fields that are wider become clipped and end in the string ‘=>’. Note that the full text is still in the buffer but is hidden. To see the full text, hold the mouse over the field—a tool-tip window will show the full content. To edit such a field, use the command C-c ` (that is C-c followed by the grave accent). This will open a new window with the full field. Edit it and finish with C-c C-c.
When visiting a file containing a table with narrowed columns, the
necessary character hiding has not yet happened, and the table needs to
be aligned before it looks nice. Setting the option
org-startup-align-all-tables
will realign all tables in a file
upon visiting, but also slow down startup. You can also set this option
on a per-file basis with:
#+STARTUP: align #+STARTUP: noalign
If you would like to overrule the automatic alignment of number-rich columns to the right and of string-rich columns to the left, you can use ‘<r>’, ‘<c>’21 or ‘<l>’ in a similar fashion. You may also combine alignment and field width like this: ‘<r10>’.
Lines which only contain these formatting cookies will be removed automatically when exporting the document.
Next: Orgtbl mode, Previous: Column width and alignment, Up: Tables [Contents][Index]
When Org exports tables, it does so by default without vertical lines because that is visually more satisfying in general. Occasionally however, vertical lines can be useful to structure a table into groups of columns, much like horizontal lines can do for groups of rows. In order to specify column groups, you can use a special row where the first field contains only ‘/’. The further fields can either contain ‘<’ to indicate that this column should start a group, ‘>’ to indicate the end of a group, or ‘<>’ (no space between ‘<’ and ‘>’) to make a column a group of its own. Boundaries between column groups will upon export be marked with vertical lines. Here is an example:
| N | N^2 | N^3 | N^4 | ~sqrt(n)~ | ~sqrt[4](N)~ | |---+-----+-----+-----+-----------+--------------| | / | < | | > | < | > | | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16 | 1.4142 | 1.1892 | | 3 | 9 | 27 | 81 | 1.7321 | 1.3161 | |---+-----+-----+-----+-----------+--------------| #+TBLFM: $2=$1^2::$3=$1^3::$4=$1^4::$5=sqrt($1)::$6=sqrt(sqrt(($1)))
It is also sufficient to just insert the column group starters after every vertical line you would like to have:
| N | N^2 | N^3 | N^4 | sqrt(n) | sqrt[4](N) | |----+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------| | / | < | | | < | |
Next: The spreadsheet, Previous: Column groups, Up: Tables [Contents][Index]
If you like the intuitive way the Org table editor works, you might also want to use it in other modes like Text mode or Mail mode. The minor mode Orgtbl mode makes this possible. You can always toggle the mode with M-x orgtbl-mode RET. To turn it on by default, for example in Message mode, use
(add-hook 'message-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgtbl)
Furthermore, with some special setup, it is possible to maintain tables in arbitrary syntax with Orgtbl mode. For example, it is possible to construct LaTeX tables with the underlying ease and power of Orgtbl mode, including spreadsheet capabilities. For details, see Tables in arbitrary syntax.
Next: Org-Plot, Previous: Orgtbl mode, Up: Tables [Contents][Index]
The table editor makes use of the Emacs calc package to implement spreadsheet-like capabilities. It can also evaluate Emacs Lisp forms to derive fields from other fields. While fully featured, Org’s implementation is not identical to other spreadsheets. For example, Org knows the concept of a column formula that will be applied to all non-header fields in a column without having to copy the formula to each relevant field. There is also a formula debugger, and a formula editor with features for highlighting fields in the table corresponding to the references at the point in the formula, moving these references by arrow keys
• References: | How to refer to another field or range | |
• Formula syntax for Calc: | Using Calc to compute stuff | |
• Formula syntax for Lisp: | Writing formulas in Emacs Lisp | |
• Durations and time values: | How to compute durations and time values | |
• Field and range formulas: | Formula for specific (ranges of) fields | |
• Column formulas: | Formulas valid for an entire column | |
• Lookup functions: | Lookup functions for searching tables | |
• Editing and debugging formulas: | Fixing formulas | |
• Updating the table: | Recomputing all dependent fields | |
• Advanced features: | Field and column names, parameters and automatic recalc |
Next: Formula syntax for Calc, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
To compute fields in the table from other fields, formulas must reference other fields or ranges. In Org, fields can be referenced by name, by absolute coordinates, and by relative coordinates. To find out what the coordinates of a field are, press C-c ? in that field, or press C-c } to toggle the display of a grid.
Formulas can reference the value of another field in two ways. Like in
any other spreadsheet, you may reference fields with a letter/number
combination like B3
, meaning the 2nd field in the 3rd row.
However, Org prefers22 to use another, more general
representation that looks like this:
@row$column
Column specifications can be absolute like $1
,
$2
,...$N
, or relative to the current column (i.e., the
column of the field which is being computed) like $+1
or $-2
.
$<
and $>
are immutable references to the first and last
column, respectively, and you can use $>>>
to indicate the third
column from the right.
The row specification only counts data lines and ignores horizontal separator
lines (hlines). Like with columns, you can use absolute row numbers
@1
, @2
,...@N
, and row numbers relative to the
current row like @+3
or @-1
. @<
and @>
are
immutable references the first and last23 row in the table, respectively. You may also
specify the row relative to one of the hlines: @I
refers to the first
hline, @II
to the second, etc. @-I
refers to the first such
line above the current line, @+I
to the first such line below the
current line. You can also write @III+2
which is the second data line
after the third hline in the table.
@0
and $0
refer to the current row and column, respectively,
i.e., to the row/column for the field being computed. Also, if you omit
either the column or the row part of the reference, the current row/column is
implied.
Org’s references with unsigned numbers are fixed references in the sense that if you use the same reference in the formula for two different fields, the same field will be referenced each time. Org’s references with signed numbers are floating references because the same reference operator can reference different fields depending on the field being calculated by the formula.
Here are a few examples:
@2$3 2nd row, 3rd column (same asC2
) $5 column 5 in the current row (same asE&
) @2 current column, row 2 @-1$-3 the field one row up, three columns to the left @-I$2 field just under hline above current row, column 2 @>$5 field in the last row, in column 5
You may reference a rectangular range of fields by specifying two field
references connected by two dots ‘..’. If both fields are in the
current row, you may simply use ‘$2..$7’, but if at least one field
is in a different row, you need to use the general @row$column
format at least for the first field (i.e the reference must start with
‘@’ in order to be interpreted correctly). Examples:
$1..$3 first three fields in the current row $P..$Q range, using column names (see under Advanced) $<<<..$>> start in third column, continue to the last but one @2$1..@4$3 6 fields between these two fields (same asA2..C4
) @-1$-2..@-1 3 fields in the row above, starting from 2 columns on the left @I..II between first and second hline, short for@I..@II
Range references return a vector of values that can be fed into Calc vector functions. Empty fields in ranges are normally suppressed, so that the vector contains only the non-empty fields. For other options with the mode switches ‘E’, ‘N’ and examples see Formula syntax for Calc.
One of the very first actions during evaluation of Calc formulas and Lisp
formulas is to substitute @#
and $#
in the formula with the
row or column number of the field where the current result will go to. The
traditional Lisp formula equivalents are org-table-current-dline
and
org-table-current-column
. Examples:
if(@# % 2, $#, string(""))
Insert column number on odd rows, set field to empty on even rows.
$2 = '(identity remote(FOO, @@#$1))
Copy text or values of each row of column 1 of the table named FOO
into column 2 of the current table.
@3 = 2 * remote(FOO, @1$$#)
Insert the doubled value of each column of row 1 of the table named
FOO
into row 3 of the current table.
For the second/third example, the table named FOO
must have
at least as many rows/columns as the current table. Note that this is
inefficient24 for large number of
rows/columns.
‘$name’ is interpreted as the name of a column, parameter or
constant. Constants are defined globally through the option
org-table-formula-constants
, and locally (for the file) through a
line like
#+CONSTANTS: c=299792458. pi=3.14 eps=2.4e-6
Also properties (see Properties and columns) can be used as constants in table formulas: for a property ‘:Xyz:’ use the name ‘$PROP_Xyz’, and the property will be searched in the current outline entry and in the hierarchy above it. If you have the constants.el package, it will also be used to resolve constants, including natural constants like ‘$h’ for Planck’s constant, and units like ‘$km’ for kilometers25. Column names and parameters can be specified in special table lines. These are described below, see Advanced features. All names must start with a letter, and further consist of letters and numbers.
You may also reference constants, fields and ranges from a different table, either in the current file or even in a different file. The syntax is
remote(NAME-OR-ID,REF)
where NAME can be the name of a table in the current file as set by a
#+NAME: Name
line before the table. It can also be the ID of an
entry, even in a different file, and the reference then refers to the first
table in that entry. REF is an absolute field or range reference as
described above for example @3$3
or $somename
, valid in the
referenced table.
Indirection of NAME-OR-ID: When NAME-OR-ID has the format @ROW$COLUMN
it will be substituted with the name or ID found in this field of the current
table. For example remote($1, @>$2)
=> remote(year_2013,
@>$1)
. The format B3
is not supported because it can not be
distinguished from a plain table name or ID.
Next: Formula syntax for Lisp, Previous: References, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
A formula can be any algebraic expression understood by the Emacs Calc
package. Note that calc has the non-standard convention that ‘/’
has lower precedence than ‘*’, so that ‘a/b*c’ is interpreted as
‘a/(b*c)’. Before evaluation by calc-eval
(see Calling Calc from Your Lisp Programs in GNU Emacs Calc Manual), variable substitution takes place according to the
rules described above.
The range vectors can be directly fed into the Calc vector functions
like ‘vmean’ and ‘vsum’.
A formula can contain an optional mode string after a semicolon. This
string consists of flags to influence Calc and other modes during
execution. By default, Org uses the standard Calc modes (precision
12, angular units degrees, fraction and symbolic modes off). The display
format, however, has been changed to (float 8)
to keep tables
compact. The default settings can be configured using the option
org-calc-default-modes
.
List of modes:
p20
Set the internal Calc calculation precision to 20 digits.
n3
, s3
, e2
, f4
Normal, scientific, engineering or fixed format of the result of Calc passed back to Org. Calc formatting is unlimited in precision as long as the Calc calculation precision is greater.
D
, R
Degree and radian angle modes of Calc.
F
, S
Fraction and symbolic modes of Calc.
T
, t
, U
Duration computations in Calc or Lisp, see Durations and time values.
E
If and how to consider empty fields. Without ‘E’ empty fields in range references are suppressed so that the Calc vector or Lisp list contains only the non-empty fields. With ‘E’ the empty fields are kept. For empty fields in ranges or empty field references the value ‘nan’ (not a number) is used in Calc formulas and the empty string is used for Lisp formulas. Add ‘N’ to use 0 instead for both formula types. For the value of a field the mode ‘N’ has higher precedence than ‘E’.
N
Interpret all fields as numbers, use 0 for non-numbers. See the next section to see how this is essential for computations with Lisp formulas. In Calc formulas it is used only occasionally because there number strings are already interpreted as numbers without ‘N’.
L
Literal, for Lisp formulas only. See the next section.
Unless you use large integer numbers or high-precision-calculation and -display for floating point numbers you may alternatively provide a ‘printf’ format specifier to reformat the Calc result after it has been passed back to Org instead of letting Calc already do the formatting26. A few examples:
$1+$2 Sum of first and second field $1+$2;%.2f Same, format result to two decimals exp($2)+exp($1) Math functions can be used $0;%.1f Reformat current cell to 1 decimal ($3-32)*5/9 Degrees F -> C conversion $c/$1/$cm Hz -> cm conversion, using constants.el tan($1);Dp3s1 Compute in degrees, precision 3, display SCI 1 sin($1);Dp3%.1e Same, but use printf specifier for display taylor($3,x=7,2) Taylor series of $3, at x=7, second degree
Calc also contains a complete set of logical operations, (see Logical Operations in GNU Emacs Calc Manual). For example
if($1 < 20, teen, string(""))
"teen" if age $1 is less than 20, else the Org table result field is set to empty with the empty string.
if("$1" == "nan" || "$2" == "nan", string(""), $1 + $2); E f-1
Sum of the first two columns. When at least one of the input fields is empty the Org table result field is set to empty. ‘E’ is required to not convert empty fields to 0. ‘f-1’ is an optional Calc format string similar to ‘%.1f’ but leaves empty results empty.
if(typeof(vmean($1..$7)) == 12, string(""), vmean($1..$7); E
Mean value of a range unless there is any empty field. Every field in the range that is empty is replaced by ‘nan’ which lets ‘vmean’ result in ‘nan’. Then ‘typeof == 12’ detects the ‘nan’ from ‘vmean’ and the Org table result field is set to empty. Use this when the sample set is expected to never have missing values.
if("$1..$7" == "[]", string(""), vmean($1..$7))
Mean value of a range with empty fields skipped. Every field in the range that is empty is skipped. When all fields in the range are empty the mean value is not defined and the Org table result field is set to empty. Use this when the sample set can have a variable size.
vmean($1..$7); EN
To complete the example before: Mean value of a range with empty fields counting as samples with value 0. Use this only when incomplete sample sets should be padded with 0 to the full size.
You can add your own Calc functions defined in Emacs Lisp with defmath
and use them in formula syntax for Calc.
Next: Durations and time values, Previous: Formula syntax for Calc, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
It is also possible to write a formula in Emacs Lisp. This can be useful for string manipulation and control structures, if Calc’s functionality is not enough.
If a formula starts with an apostrophe followed by an opening parenthesis, then it is evaluated as a Lisp form. The evaluation should return either a string or a number. Just as with calc formulas, you can specify modes and a printf format after a semicolon.
With Emacs Lisp forms, you need to be conscious about the way field
references are interpolated into the form. By default, a reference will be
interpolated as a Lisp string (in double-quotes) containing the field. If
you provide the ‘N’ mode switch, all referenced elements will be numbers
(non-number fields will be zero) and interpolated as Lisp numbers, without
quotes. If you provide the ‘L’ flag, all fields will be interpolated
literally, without quotes. I.e., if you want a reference to be interpreted
as a string by the Lisp form, enclose the reference operator itself in
double-quotes, like "$3"
. Ranges are inserted as space-separated
fields, so you can embed them in list or vector syntax.
Here are a few examples—note how the ‘N’ mode is used when we do computations in Lisp:
'(concat (substring $1 1 2) (substring $1 0 1) (substring $1 2))
Swap the first two characters of the content of column 1.
'(+ $1 $2);N
Add columns 1 and 2, equivalent to Calc’s $1+$2
.
'(apply '+ '($1..$4));N
Compute the sum of columns 1 to 4, like Calc’s vsum($1..$4)
.
Next: Field and range formulas, Previous: Formula syntax for Lisp, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
If you want to compute time values use the T
, t
, or U
flag, either in Calc formulas or Elisp formulas:
| Task 1 | Task 2 | Total | |---------+----------+----------| | 2:12 | 1:47 | 03:59:00 | | 2:12 | 1:47 | 03:59 | | 3:02:20 | -2:07:00 | 0.92 | #+TBLFM: @2$3=$1+$2;T::@3$3=$1+$2;U::@4$3=$1+$2;t
Input duration values must be of the form HH:MM[:SS]
, where seconds
are optional. With the T
flag, computed durations will be displayed
as HH:MM:SS
(see the first formula above). With the U
flag,
seconds will be omitted so that the result will be only HH:MM
(see
second formula above). Zero-padding of the hours field will depend upon the
value of the variable org-table-duration-hour-zero-padding
.
With the t
flag, computed durations will be displayed according to the
value of the option org-table-duration-custom-format
, which defaults
to 'hours
and will display the result as a fraction of hours (see the
third formula in the example above).
Negative duration values can be manipulated as well, and integers will be considered as seconds in addition and subtraction.
Next: Column formulas, Previous: Durations and time values, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
To assign a formula to a particular field, type it directly into the field, preceded by ‘:=’, for example ‘:=vsum(@II..III)’. When you press TAB or RET or C-c C-c with the cursor still in the field, the formula will be stored as the formula for this field, evaluated, and the current field will be replaced with the result.
Formulas are stored in a special line starting with #+TBLFM:
directly
below the table. If you type the equation in the 4th field of the 3rd data
line in the table, the formula will look like ‘@3$4=$1+$2’. When
inserting/deleting/swapping columns and rows with the appropriate commands,
absolute references (but not relative ones) in stored formulas are
modified in order to still reference the same field. To avoid this, in
particular in range references, anchor ranges at the table borders (using
@<
, @>
, $<
, $>
), or at hlines using the
@I
notation. Automatic adaptation of field references does of course
not happen if you edit the table structure with normal editing
commands—then you must fix the equations yourself.
Instead of typing an equation into the field, you may also use the following command
org-table-eval-formula
)Install a new formula for the current field. The command prompts for a
formula with default taken from the #+TBLFM:
line, applies
it to the current field, and stores it.
The left-hand side of a formula can also be a special expression in order to
assign the formula to a number of different fields. There is no keyboard
shortcut to enter such range formulas. To add them, use the formula editor
(see Editing and debugging formulas) or edit the #+TBLFM:
line
directly.
$2=
Column formula, valid for the entire column. This is so common that Org treats these formulas in a special way, see Column formulas.
@3=
Row formula, applies to all fields in the specified row. @>=
means
the last row.
@1$2..@4$3=
Range formula, applies to all fields in the given rectangular range. This can also be used to assign a formula to some but not all fields in a row.
$name=
Named field, see Advanced features.
Next: Lookup functions, Previous: Field and range formulas, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
When you assign a formula to a simple column reference like $3=
, the
same formula will be used in all fields of that column, with the following
very convenient exceptions: (i) If the table contains horizontal separator
hlines with rows above and below, everything before the first such hline is
considered part of the table header and will not be modified by column
formulas. Therefore a header is mandatory when you use column formulas and
want to add hlines to group rows, like for example to separate a total row at
the bottom from the summand rows above. (ii) Fields that already get a value
from a field/range formula will be left alone by column formulas. These
conditions make column formulas very easy to use.
To assign a formula to a column, type it directly into any field in the
column, preceded by an equal sign, like ‘=$1+$2’. When you press
TAB or RET or C-c C-c with the cursor still in the field,
the formula will be stored as the formula for the current column, evaluated
and the current field replaced with the result. If the field contains only
‘=’, the previously stored formula for this column is used. For each
column, Org will only remember the most recently used formula. In the
#+TBLFM:
line, column formulas will look like ‘$4=$1+$2’. The
left-hand side of a column formula cannot be the name of column, it must be
the numeric column reference or $>
.
Instead of typing an equation into the field, you may also use the following command:
org-table-eval-formula
)Install a new formula for the current column and replace current field with
the result of the formula. The command prompts for a formula, with default
taken from the #+TBLFM
line, applies it to the current field and
stores it. With a numeric prefix argument(e.g., C-5 C-c =) the command
will apply it to that many consecutive fields in the current column.
Next: Editing and debugging formulas, Previous: Column formulas, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
Org has three predefined Emacs Lisp functions for lookups in tables.
(org-lookup-first VAL S-LIST R-LIST &optional PREDICATE)
Searches for the first element S
in list S-LIST
for which
(PREDICATE VAL S)
is t
; returns the value from the corresponding position in list
R-LIST
. The default PREDICATE
is equal
. Note that the
parameters VAL
and S
are passed to PREDICATE
in the same
order as the corresponding parameters are in the call to
org-lookup-first
, where VAL
precedes S-LIST
. If
R-LIST
is nil
, the matching element S
of S-LIST
is returned.
(org-lookup-last VAL S-LIST R-LIST &optional PREDICATE)
Similar to org-lookup-first
above, but searches for the last
element for which PREDICATE
is t
.
(org-lookup-all VAL S-LIST R-LIST &optional PREDICATE)
Similar to org-lookup-first
, but searches for all elements for
which PREDICATE
is t
, and returns all corresponding
values. This function can not be used by itself in a formula, because it
returns a list of values. However, powerful lookups can be built when this
function is combined with other Emacs Lisp functions.
If the ranges used in these functions contain empty fields, the E
mode
for the formula should usually be specified: otherwise empty fields will not be
included in S-LIST
and/or R-LIST
which can, for example, result
in an incorrect mapping from an element of S-LIST
to the corresponding
element of R-LIST
.
These three functions can be used to implement associative arrays, count matching cells, rank results, group data etc. For practical examples see this tutorial on Worg.
Next: Updating the table, Previous: Lookup functions, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
You can edit individual formulas in the minibuffer or directly in the field.
Org can also prepare a special buffer with all active formulas of a table.
When offering a formula for editing, Org converts references to the standard
format (like B3
or D&
) if possible. If you prefer to only work
with the internal format (like @3$2
or $4
), configure the
option org-table-use-standard-references
.
org-table-eval-formula
)Edit the formula associated with the current column/field in the minibuffer. See Column formulas, and Field and range formulas.
org-table-eval-formula
)Re-insert the active formula (either a field formula, or a column formula) into the current field, so that you can edit it directly in the field. The advantage over editing in the minibuffer is that you can use the command C-c ?.
org-table-field-info
)While editing a formula in a table field, highlight the field(s) referenced by the reference at the cursor position in the formula.
Toggle the display of row and column numbers for a table, using overlays
(org-table-toggle-coordinate-overlays
). These are updated each
time the table is aligned; you can force it with C-c C-c.
Toggle the formula debugger on and off
(org-table-toggle-formula-debugger
). See below.
org-table-edit-formulas
)Edit all formulas for the current table in a special buffer, where the formulas will be displayed one per line. If the current field has an active formula, the cursor in the formula editor will mark it. While inside the special buffer, Org will automatically highlight any field or range reference at the cursor position. You may edit, remove and add formulas, and use the following commands:
org-table-fedit-finish
)Exit the formula editor and store the modified formulas. With C-u prefix, also apply the new formulas to the entire table.
org-table-fedit-abort
)org-table-fedit-toggle-ref-type
)Toggle all references in the formula editor between standard (like
B3
) and internal (like @3$2
).
org-table-fedit-lisp-indent
)Pretty-print or indent Lisp formula at point. When in a line containing a Lisp formula, format the formula according to Emacs Lisp rules. Another TAB collapses the formula back again. In the open formula, TAB re-indents just like in Emacs Lisp mode.
lisp-complete-symbol
)Complete Lisp symbols, just like in Emacs Lisp mode.27
Shift the reference at point. For example, if the reference is
B3
and you press S-RIGHT, it will become C3
.
This also works for relative references and for hline references.
org-table-fedit-line-up
)org-table-fedit-line-down
)Move the test line for column formulas in the Org buffer up and down.
org-table-fedit-scroll-down
)org-table-fedit-scroll-up
)Turn the coordinate grid in the table on and off.
Making a table field blank does not remove the formula associated with
the field, because that is stored in a different line (the #+TBLFM
line)—during the next recalculation the field will be filled again.
To remove a formula from a field, you have to give an empty reply when
prompted for the formula, or to edit the #+TBLFM
line.
You may edit the #+TBLFM
directly and re-apply the changed
equations with C-c C-c in that line or with the normal
recalculation commands in the table.
#+TBLFM
linesYou may apply the formula temporarily. This is useful when you
switch the formula. Place multiple #+TBLFM
lines right
after the table, and then press C-c C-c on the formula to
apply. Here is an example:
| x | y | |---+---| | 1 | | | 2 | | #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1 #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2
Pressing C-c C-c in the line of ‘#+TBLFM: $2=$1*2’ yields:
| x | y | |---+---| | 1 | 2 | | 2 | 4 | #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1 #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2
Note: If you recalculate this table (with C-u C-c *, for example), you
will get the following result of applying only the first #+TBLFM
line.
| x | y | |---+---| | 1 | 1 | | 2 | 2 | #+TBLFM: $2=$1*1 #+TBLFM: $2=$1*2
When the evaluation of a formula leads to an error, the field content
becomes the string ‘#ERROR’. If you would like see what is going
on during variable substitution and calculation in order to find a bug,
turn on formula debugging in the Tbl
menu and repeat the
calculation, for example by pressing C-u C-u C-c = RET in a
field. Detailed information will be displayed.
Next: Advanced features, Previous: Editing and debugging formulas, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
Recalculation of a table is normally not automatic, but needs to be triggered by a command. See Advanced features, for a way to make recalculation at least semi-automatic.
In order to recalculate a line of a table or the entire table, use the following commands:
org-table-recalculate
)Recalculate the current row by first applying the stored column formulas from left to right, and all field/range formulas in the current row.
Recompute the entire table, line by line. Any lines before the first hline are left alone, assuming that these are part of the table header.
org-table-iterate
)Iterate the table by recomputing it until no further changes occur. This may be necessary if some computed fields use the value of other fields that are computed later in the calculation sequence.
Recompute all tables in the current buffer.
Iterate all tables in the current buffer, in order to converge table-to-table dependencies.
Previous: Updating the table, Up: The spreadsheet [Contents][Index]
If you want the recalculation of fields to happen automatically, or if you want to be able to assign names28 to fields and columns, you need to reserve the first column of the table for special marking characters.
org-table-rotate-recalc-marks
)Rotate the calculation mark in first column through the states ‘ ’, ‘#’, ‘*’, ‘!’, ‘$’. When there is an active region, change all marks in the region.
Here is an example of a table that collects exam results of students and makes use of these features:
|---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| | | Student | Prob 1 | Prob 2 | Prob 3 | Total | Note | |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| | ! | | P1 | P2 | P3 | Tot | | | # | Maximum | 10 | 15 | 25 | 50 | 10.0 | | ^ | | m1 | m2 | m3 | mt | | |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| | # | Peter | 10 | 8 | 23 | 41 | 8.2 | | # | Sam | 2 | 4 | 3 | 9 | 1.8 | |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| | | Average | | | | 25.0 | | | ^ | | | | | at | | | $ | max=50 | | | | | | |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------| #+TBLFM: $6=vsum($P1..$P3)::$7=10*$Tot/$max;%.1f::$at=vmean(@-II..@-I);%.1f
Important: please note that for these special tables, recalculating the table with C-u C-c * will only affect rows that are marked ‘#’ or ‘*’, and fields that have a formula assigned to the field itself. The column formulas are not applied in rows with empty first field.
The marking characters have the following meaning:
The fields in this line define names for the columns, so that you may refer to a column as ‘$Tot’ instead of ‘$6’.
This row defines names for the fields above the row. With such a definition, any formula in the table may use ‘$m1’ to refer to the value ‘10’. Also, if you assign a formula to a names field, it will be stored as ‘$name=...’.
Similar to ‘^’, but defines names for the fields in the row below.
Fields in this row can define parameters for formulas. For example, if a field in a ‘$’ row contains ‘max=50’, then formulas in this table can refer to the value 50 using ‘$max’. Parameters work exactly like constants, only that they can be defined on a per-table basis.
Fields in this row are automatically recalculated when pressing TAB or RET or S-TAB in this row. Also, this row is selected for a global recalculation with C-u C-c *. Unmarked lines will be left alone by this command.
Selects this line for global recalculation with C-u C-c *, but not for automatic recalculation. Use this when automatic recalculation slows down editing too much.
Unmarked lines are exempt from recalculation with C-u C-c *. All lines that should be recalculated should be marked with ‘#’ or ‘*’.
Do not export this line. Useful for lines that contain the narrowing ‘<N>’ markers or column group markers.
Finally, just to whet your appetite for what can be done with the
fantastic calc.el package, here is a table that computes the Taylor
series of degree n
at location x
for a couple of
functions.
|---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------| | | Func | n | x | Result | |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------| | # | exp(x) | 1 | x | 1 + x | | # | exp(x) | 2 | x | 1 + x + x^2 / 2 | | # | exp(x) | 3 | x | 1 + x + x^2 / 2 + x^3 / 6 | | # | x^2+sqrt(x) | 2 | x=0 | x*(0.5 / 0) + x^2 (2 - 0.25 / 0) / 2 | | # | x^2+sqrt(x) | 2 | x=1 | 2 + 2.5 x - 2.5 + 0.875 (x - 1)^2 | | * | tan(x) | 3 | x | 0.0175 x + 1.77e-6 x^3 | |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------| #+TBLFM: $5=taylor($2,$4,$3);n3
Previous: The spreadsheet, Up: Tables [Contents][Index]
Org-Plot can produce graphs of information stored in org tables, either graphically or in ASCII-art.
Org-Plot produces 2D and 3D graphs using Gnuplot http://www.gnuplot.info/ and gnuplot-mode http://xafs.org/BruceRavel/GnuplotMode. To see this in action, ensure that you have both Gnuplot and Gnuplot mode installed on your system, then call C-c " g or M-x org-plot/gnuplot RET on the following table.
#+PLOT: title:"Citas" ind:1 deps:(3) type:2d with:histograms set:"yrange [0:]" | Sede | Max cites | H-index | |-----------+-----------+---------| | Chile | 257.72 | 21.39 | | Leeds | 165.77 | 19.68 | | Sao Paolo | 71.00 | 11.50 | | Stockholm | 134.19 | 14.33 | | Morelia | 257.56 | 17.67 |
Notice that Org Plot is smart enough to apply the table’s headers as labels.
Further control over the labels, type, content, and appearance of plots can
be exercised through the #+PLOT:
lines preceding a table. See below
for a complete list of Org-plot options. The #+PLOT:
lines are
optional. For more information and examples see the Org-plot tutorial at
https://orgmode.org/worg/org-tutorials/org-plot.html.
set
Specify any gnuplot
option to be set when graphing.
title
Specify the title of the plot.
ind
Specify which column of the table to use as the x
axis.
deps
Specify the columns to graph as a Lisp style list, surrounded by parentheses
and separated by spaces for example dep:(3 4)
to graph the third and
fourth columns (defaults to graphing all other columns aside from the ind
column).
type
Specify whether the plot will be 2d
, 3d
, or grid
.
with
Specify a with
option to be inserted for every col being plotted
(e.g., lines
, points
, boxes
, impulses
, etc...).
Defaults to lines
.
file
If you want to plot to a file, specify "path/to/desired/output-file"
.
labels
List of labels to be used for the deps
(defaults to the column headers
if they exist).
line
Specify an entire line to be inserted in the Gnuplot script.
map
When plotting 3d
or grid
types, set this to t
to graph a
flat mapping rather than a 3d
slope.
timefmt
Specify format of Org mode timestamps as they will be parsed by Gnuplot. Defaults to ‘%Y-%m-%d-%H:%M:%S’.
script
If you want total control, you can specify a script file (place the file name
between double-quotes) which will be used to plot. Before plotting, every
instance of $datafile
in the specified script will be replaced with
the path to the generated data file. Note: even if you set this option, you
may still want to specify the plot type, as that can impact the content of
the data file.
While the cursor is on a column, typing C-c " a or M-x orgtbl-ascii-plot RET create a new column containing an ASCII-art bars plot. The plot is implemented through a regular column formula. When the source column changes, the bar plot may be updated by refreshing the table, for example typing C-u C-c *.
| Sede | Max cites | | |---------------+-----------+--------------| | Chile | 257.72 | WWWWWWWWWWWW | | Leeds | 165.77 | WWWWWWWh | | Sao Paolo | 71.00 | WWW; | | Stockholm | 134.19 | WWWWWW: | | Morelia | 257.56 | WWWWWWWWWWWH | | Rochefourchat | 0.00 | | #+TBLFM: $3='(orgtbl-ascii-draw $2 0.0 257.72 12)
The formula is an elisp call:
(orgtbl-ascii-draw COLUMN MIN MAX WIDTH)
COLUMN
is a reference to the source column.
MIN MAX
are the minimal and maximal values displayed. Sources values outside this range are displayed as ‘too small’ or ‘too large’.
WIDTH
is the width in characters of the bar-plot. It defaults to ‘12’.
Next: TODO items, Previous: Tables, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Like HTML, Org provides links inside a file, external links to other files, Usenet articles, emails, and much more.
• Link format: | How links in Org are formatted | |
• Internal links: | Links to other places in the current file | |
• External links: | URL-like links to the world | |
• Handling links: | Creating, inserting and following | |
• Using links outside Org: | Linking from my C source code? | |
• Link abbreviations: | Shortcuts for writing complex links | |
• Search options: | Linking to a specific location | |
• Custom searches: | When the default search is not enough |
Next: Internal links, Up: Hyperlinks [Contents][Index]
Org will recognize plain URL-like links and activate them as clickable links. The general link format, however, looks like this:
[[link][description]] or alternatively [[link]]
Once a link in the buffer is complete (all brackets present), Org
will change the display so that ‘description’ is displayed instead
of ‘[[link][description]]’ and ‘link’ is displayed instead of
‘[[link]]’. Links will be highlighted in the face org-link
,
which by default is an underlined face. You can directly edit the
visible part of a link. Note that this can be either the ‘link’
part (if there is no description) or the ‘description’ part. To
edit also the invisible ‘link’ part, use C-c C-l with the
cursor on the link.
If you place the cursor at the beginning or just behind the end of the
displayed text and press BACKSPACE, you will remove the
(invisible) bracket at that location. This makes the link incomplete
and the internals are again displayed as plain text. Inserting the
missing bracket hides the link internals again. To show the
internal structure of all links, use the menu entry
Org->Hyperlinks->Literal links
.
Next: External links, Previous: Link format, Up: Hyperlinks [Contents][Index]
If the link does not look like a URL, it is considered to be internal in the
current file. The most important case is a link like
‘[[#my-custom-id]]’ which will link to the entry with the
CUSTOM_ID
property ‘my-custom-id’. You are responsible yourself
to make sure these custom IDs are unique in a file.
Links such as ‘[[My Target]]’ or ‘[[My Target][Find my target]]’ lead to a text search in the current file.
The link can be followed with C-c C-o when the cursor is on the link, or with a mouse click (see Handling links). Links to custom IDs will point to the corresponding headline. The preferred match for a text link is a dedicated target: the same string in double angular brackets, like ‘<<My Target>>’.
If no dedicated target exists, the link will then try to match the exact name
of an element within the buffer. Naming is done with the #+NAME
keyword, which has to be put in the line before the element it refers to, as
in the following example
#+NAME: My Target | a | table | |----+------------| | of | four cells |
If none of the above succeeds, Org will search for a headline that is exactly the link text but may also include a TODO keyword and tags29.
During export, internal links will be used to mark objects and assign them a number. Marked objects will then be referenced by links pointing to them. In particular, links without a description will appear as the number assigned to the marked object30. In the following excerpt from an Org buffer
- one item - <<target>>another item Here we refer to item [[target]].
The last sentence will appear as ‘Here we refer to item 2’ when exported.
In non-Org files, the search will look for the words in the link text. In the above example the search would be for ‘my target’.
Following a link pushes a mark onto Org’s own mark ring. You can return to the previous position with C-c &. Using this command several times in direct succession goes back to positions recorded earlier.
• Radio targets: | Make targets trigger links in plain text |
Up: Internal links [Contents][Index]
Org can automatically turn any occurrences of certain target names in normal text into a link. So without explicitly creating a link, the text connects to the target radioing its position. Radio targets are enclosed by triple angular brackets. For example, a target ‘<<<My Target>>>’ causes each occurrence of ‘my target’ in normal text to become activated as a link. The Org file is scanned automatically for radio targets only when the file is first loaded into Emacs. To update the target list during editing, press C-c C-c with the cursor on or at a target.
Next: Handling links, Previous: Internal links, Up: Hyperlinks [Contents][Index]
Org supports links to files, websites, Usenet and email messages, BBDB database entries and links to both IRC conversations and their logs. External links are URL-like locators. They start with a short identifying string followed by a colon. There can be no space after the colon. The following list shows examples for each link type.
http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik on the web doi:10.1000/182 DOI for an electronic resource file:/home/dominik/images/jupiter.jpg file, absolute path /home/dominik/images/jupiter.jpg same as above file:papers/last.pdf file, relative path ./papers/last.pdf same as above file:/ssh:myself@some.where:papers/last.pdf file, path on remote machine /ssh:myself@some.where:papers/last.pdf same as above file:sometextfile::NNN file, jump to line number file:projects.org another Org file file:projects.org::some words text search in Org file(31) file:projects.org::*task title heading search in Org file(32) docview:papers/last.pdf::NNN open in doc-view mode at page id:B7423F4D-2E8A-471B-8810-C40F074717E9 Link to heading by ID news:comp.emacs Usenet link mailto:adent@galaxy.net Mail link mhe:folder MH-E folder link mhe:folder#id MH-E message link rmail:folder RMAIL folder link rmail:folder#id RMAIL message link gnus:group Gnus group link gnus:group#id Gnus article link bbdb:R.*Stallman BBDB link (with regexp) irc:/irc.com/#emacs/bob IRC link info:org#External links Info node or index link shell:ls *.org A shell command elisp:org-agenda Interactive Elisp command elisp:(find-file-other-frame "Elisp.org") Elisp form to evaluate
On top of these built-in link types, some are available through the
contrib/
directory (see Installation). For example, these links
to VM or Wanderlust messages are available when you load the corresponding
libraries from the contrib/
directory:
vm:folder VM folder link vm:folder#id VM message link vm://myself@some.where.org/folder#id VM on remote machine vm-imap:account:folder VM IMAP folder link vm-imap:account:folder#id VM IMAP message link wl:folder WANDERLUST folder link wl:folder#id WANDERLUST message link
For customizing Org to add new link types Adding hyperlink types.
A link should be enclosed in double brackets and may contain a descriptive text to be displayed instead of the URL (see Link format), for example:
[[https://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/][GNU Emacs]]
If the description is a file name or URL that points to an image, HTML export (see HTML export) will inline the image as a clickable button. If there is no description at all and the link points to an image, that image will be inlined into the exported HTML file.
Org also finds external links in the normal text and activates them as links. If spaces must be part of the link (for example in ‘bbdb:Richard Stallman’), or if you need to remove ambiguities about the end of the link, enclose them in square brackets.
Next: Using links outside Org, Previous: External links, Up: Hyperlinks [Contents][Index]
Org provides methods to create a link in the correct syntax, to insert it into an Org file, and to follow the link.
org-store-link
)Store a link to the current location. This is a global command (you must create the key binding yourself) which can be used in any buffer to create a link. The link will be stored for later insertion into an Org buffer (see below). What kind of link will be created depends on the current buffer:
Org mode buffers
For Org files, if there is a ‘<<target>>’ at the cursor, the link points
to the target. Otherwise it points to the current headline, which will also
be the description33.
If the headline has a CUSTOM_ID
property, a link to this custom ID
will be stored. In addition or alternatively (depending on the value of
org-id-link-to-org-use-id
), a globally unique ID
property will
be created and/or used to construct a link34. So using this command in Org buffers
will potentially create two links: a human-readable from the custom ID, and
one that is globally unique and works even if the entry is moved from file to
file. Later, when inserting the link, you need to decide which one to use.
Email/News clients: VM, Rmail, Wanderlust, MH-E, Gnus
Pretty much all Emacs mail clients are supported. The link will point to the
current article, or, in some GNUS buffers, to the group. The description is
constructed from the author and the subject.
Web browsers: Eww, W3 and W3M
Here the link will be the current URL, with the page title as description.
Contacts: BBDB
Links created in a BBDB buffer will point to the current entry.
Chat: IRC
For IRC links, if you set the option org-irc-link-to-logs
to t
,
a ‘file:/’ style link to the relevant point in the logs for the current
conversation is created. Otherwise an ‘irc:/’ style link to the
user/channel/server under the point will be stored.
Other files
For any other files, the link will point to the file, with a search string
(see Search options) pointing to the contents of the current line. If
there is an active region, the selected words will form the basis of the
search string. If the automatically created link is not working correctly or
accurately enough, you can write custom functions to select the search string
and to do the search for particular file types—see Custom searches.
The key binding C-c l is only a suggestion—see Installation.
Agenda view
When the cursor is in an agenda view, the created link points to the
entry referenced by the current line.
org-insert-link
)Insert a link35. This prompts for a link to be inserted into the buffer. You can just type a link, using text for an internal link, or one of the link type prefixes mentioned in the examples above. The link will be inserted into the buffer36, along with a descriptive text. If some text was selected when this command is called, the selected text becomes the default description.
Inserting stored links
All links stored during the
current session are part of the history for this prompt, so you can access
them with UP and DOWN (or M-p/n).
Completion support
Completion with TAB will help you to insert
valid link prefixes like ‘https:’, including the prefixes
defined through link abbreviations (see Link abbreviations). If you
press RET after inserting only the prefix, Org will offer
specific completion support for some link types37 For example, if you type file
RET, file name completion (alternative access: C-u C-c C-l, see
below) will be offered, and after bbdb RET you can complete
contact names.
When C-c C-l is called with a C-u prefix argument, a link to a file will be inserted and you may use file name completion to select the name of the file. The path to the file is inserted relative to the directory of the current Org file, if the linked file is in the current directory or in a sub-directory of it, or if the path is written relative to the current directory using ‘../’. Otherwise an absolute path is used, if possible with ‘~/’ for your home directory. You can force an absolute path with two C-u prefixes.
When the cursor is on an existing link, C-c C-l allows you to edit the link and description parts of the link.
org-open-at-point
)Open link at point. This will launch a web browser for URLs (using
browse-url-at-point
), run VM/MH-E/Wanderlust/Rmail/Gnus/BBDB for
the corresponding links, and execute the command in a shell link. When the
cursor is on an internal link, this command runs the corresponding search.
When the cursor is on a TAG list in a headline, it creates the corresponding
TAGS view. If the cursor is on a timestamp, it compiles the agenda for that
date. Furthermore, it will visit text and remote files in ‘file:’ links
with Emacs and select a suitable application for local non-text files.
Classification of files is based on file extension only. See option
org-file-apps
. If you want to override the default application and
visit the file with Emacs, use a C-u prefix. If you want to avoid
opening in Emacs, use a C-u C-u prefix.
If the cursor is on a headline, but not on a link, offer all links in the
headline and entry text. If you want to setup the frame configuration for
following links, customize org-link-frame-setup
.
When org-return-follows-link
is set, RET will also follow
the link at point.
On links, mouse-1 and mouse-2 will open the link just as C-c C-o would.
Like mouse-2, but force file links to be opened with Emacs, and internal links to be displayed in another window38.
org-toggle-inline-images
)Toggle the inline display of linked images. Normally this will only inline
images that have no description part in the link, i.e., images that will also
be inlined during export. When called with a prefix argument, also display
images that do have a link description. You can ask for inline images to be
displayed at startup by configuring the variable
org-startup-with-inline-images
39.
org-mark-ring-push
)Push the current position onto the mark ring, to be able to return easily. Commands following an internal link do this automatically.
org-mark-ring-goto
)Jump back to a recorded position. A position is recorded by the commands following internal links, and by C-c %. Using this command several times in direct succession moves through a ring of previously recorded positions.
org-next-link
)org-previous-link
)Move forward/backward to the next link in the buffer. At the limit of the buffer, the search fails once, and then wraps around. The key bindings for this are really too long; you might want to bind this also to C-n and C-p
(add-hook 'org-load-hook (lambda () (define-key org-mode-map "\C-n" 'org-next-link) (define-key org-mode-map "\C-p" 'org-previous-link)))
Next: Link abbreviations, Previous: Handling links, Up: Hyperlinks [Contents][Index]
You can insert and follow links that have Org syntax not only in Org, but in any Emacs buffer. For this, you should create two global commands, like this (please select suitable global keys yourself):
(global-set-key "\C-c L" 'org-insert-link-global) (global-set-key "\C-c o" 'org-open-at-point-global)
Next: Search options, Previous: Using links outside Org, Up: Hyperlinks [Contents][Index]
Long URLs can be cumbersome to type, and often many similar links are needed in a document. For this you can use link abbreviations. An abbreviated link looks like this
[[linkword:tag][description]]
where the tag is optional.
The linkword must be a word, starting with a letter, followed by
letters, numbers, ‘-’, and ‘_’. Abbreviations are resolved
according to the information in the variable org-link-abbrev-alist
that relates the linkwords to replacement text. Here is an example:
(setq org-link-abbrev-alist '(("bugzilla" . "http://10.1.2.9/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=") ("url-to-ja" . "http://translate.google.fr/translate?sl=en&tl=ja&u=%h") ("google" . "http://www.google.com/search?q=") ("gmap" . "http://maps.google.com/maps?q=%s") ("omap" . "http://nominatim.openstreetmap.org/search?q=%s&polygon=1") ("ads" . "http://adsabs.harvard.edu/cgi-bin/nph-abs_connect?author=%s&db_key=AST")))
If the replacement text contains the string ‘%s’, it will be replaced with the tag. Using ‘%h’ instead of ‘%s’ will url-encode the tag (see the example above, where we need to encode the URL parameter.) Using ‘%(my-function)’ will pass the tag to a custom function, and replace it by the resulting string.
If the replacement text doesn’t contain any specifier, the tag will simply be appended in order to create the link.
Instead of a string, you may also specify a function that will be called with the tag as the only argument to create the link.
With the above setting, you could link to a specific bug with
[[bugzilla:129]]
, search the web for ‘OrgMode’ with
[[google:OrgMode]]
, show the map location of the Free Software
Foundation [[gmap:51 Franklin Street, Boston]]
or of Carsten office
[[omap:Science Park 904, Amsterdam, The Netherlands]]
and find out
what the Org author is doing besides Emacs hacking with
[[ads:Dominik,C]]
.
If you need special abbreviations just for a single Org buffer, you can define them in the file with
#+LINK: bugzilla http://10.1.2.9/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id= #+LINK: google http://www.google.com/search?q=%s
In-buffer completion (see Completion) can be used after ‘[’ to complete link abbreviations. You may also define a function that implements special (e.g., completion) support for inserting such a link with C-c C-l. Such a function should not accept any arguments, and return the full link with prefix. You can add a completion function to a link like this:
(org-link-set-parameters ``type'' :complete #'some-function)
Next: Custom searches, Previous: Link abbreviations, Up: Hyperlinks [Contents][Index]
File links can contain additional information to make Emacs jump to a particular location in the file when following a link. This can be a line number or a search option after a double40 colon. For example, when the command C-c l creates a link (see Handling links) to a file, it encodes the words in the current line as a search string that can be used to find this line back later when following the link with C-c C-o.
Here is the syntax of the different ways to attach a search to a file link, together with an explanation:
[[file:~/code/main.c::255]] [[file:~/xx.org::My Target]] [[file:~/xx.org::*My Target]] [[file:~/xx.org::#my-custom-id]] [[file:~/xx.org::/regexp/]]
255
Jump to line 255.
My Target
Search for a link target ‘<<My Target>>’, or do a text search for ‘my target’, similar to the search in internal links, see Internal links. In HTML export (see HTML export), such a file link will become an HTML reference to the corresponding named anchor in the linked file.
*My Target
In an Org file, restrict search to headlines.
#my-custom-id
Link to a heading with a CUSTOM_ID
property
/regexp/
Do a regular expression search for regexp
. This uses the Emacs
command occur
to list all matches in a separate window. If the
target file is in Org mode, org-occur
is used to create a
sparse tree with the matches.
As a degenerate case, a file link with an empty file name can be used
to search the current file. For example, [[file:::find me]]
does
a search for ‘find me’ in the current file, just as
‘[[find me]]’ would.
Previous: Search options, Up: Hyperlinks [Contents][Index]
The default mechanism for creating search strings and for doing the actual search related to a file link may not work correctly in all cases. For example, BibTeX database files have many entries like ‘year="1993"’ which would not result in good search strings, because the only unique identification for a BibTeX entry is the citation key.
If you come across such a problem, you can write custom functions to set
the right search string for a particular file type, and to do the search
for the string in the file. Using add-hook
, these functions need
to be added to the hook variables
org-create-file-search-functions
and
org-execute-file-search-functions
. See the docstring for these
variables for more information. Org actually uses this mechanism
for BibTeX database files, and you can use the corresponding code as
an implementation example. See the file org-bibtex.el.
Next: Tags, Previous: Hyperlinks, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Org mode does not maintain TODO lists as separate documents41. Instead, TODO items are an integral part of the notes file, because TODO items usually come up while taking notes! With Org mode, simply mark any entry in a tree as being a TODO item. In this way, information is not duplicated, and the entire context from which the TODO item emerged is always present.
Of course, this technique for managing TODO items scatters them throughout your notes file. Org mode compensates for this by providing methods to give you an overview of all the things that you have to do.
• TODO basics: | Marking and displaying TODO entries | |
• TODO extensions: | Workflow and assignments | |
• Progress logging: | Dates and notes for progress | |
• Priorities: | Some things are more important than others | |
• Breaking down tasks: | Splitting a task into manageable pieces | |
• Checkboxes: | Tick-off lists |
Next: TODO extensions, Up: TODO items [Contents][Index]
Any headline becomes a TODO item when it starts with the word ‘TODO’, for example:
*** TODO Write letter to Sam Fortune
The most important commands to work with TODO entries are:
org-todo
)Rotate the TODO state of the current item among
,-> (unmarked) -> TODO -> DONE --. '--------------------------------'
If TODO keywords have fast access keys (see Fast access to TODO states), you will be prompted for a TODO keyword through the fast selection
interface; this is the default behavior when
org-use-fast-todo-selection
is non-nil
.
The same rotation can also be done “remotely” from agenda buffers with the t command key (see Agenda commands).
When TODO keywords have no selection keys, select a specific keyword using
completion; otherwise force cycling through TODO states with no prompt. When
org-use-fast-todo-selection
is set to prefix
, use the fast
selection interface.
Select the following/preceding TODO state, similar to cycling. Useful
mostly if more than two TODO states are possible (see TODO extensions). See also Conflicts, for a discussion of the interaction
with shift-selection-mode
. See also the variable
org-treat-S-cursor-todo-selection-as-state-change
.
org-show-todo-tree
)View TODO items in a sparse tree (see Sparse trees). Folds the
entire buffer, but shows all TODO items (with not-DONE state) and the
headings hierarchy above them. With a prefix argument (or by using C-c
/ T), search for a specific TODO. You will be prompted for the keyword,
and you can also give a list of keywords like KWD1|KWD2|...
to list
entries that match any one of these keywords. With a numeric prefix argument
N, show the tree for the Nth keyword in the option org-todo-keywords
.
With two prefix arguments, find all TODO states, both un-done and done.
org-todo-list
)Show the global TODO list. Collects the TODO items (with not-DONE states)
from all agenda files (see Agenda views) into a single buffer. The new
buffer will be in agenda-mode
, which provides commands to examine and
manipulate the TODO entries from the new buffer (see Agenda commands).
See Global TODO list, for more information.
org-insert-todo-heading
)Insert a new TODO entry below the current one.
Changing a TODO state can also trigger tag changes. See the docstring of the
option org-todo-state-tags-triggers
for details.
Next: Progress logging, Previous: TODO basics, Up: TODO items [Contents][Index]
By default, marked TODO entries have one of only two states: TODO and
DONE. Org mode allows you to classify TODO items in more complex ways
with TODO keywords (stored in org-todo-keywords
). With
special setup, the TODO keyword system can work differently in different
files.
Note that tags are another way to classify headlines in general and TODO items in particular (see Tags).
• Workflow states: | From TODO to DONE in steps | |
• TODO types: | I do this, Fred does the rest | |
• Multiple sets in one file: | Mixing it all, and still finding your way | |
• Fast access to TODO states: | Single letter selection of a state | |
• Per-file keywords: | Different files, different requirements | |
• Faces for TODO keywords: | Highlighting states | |
• TODO dependencies: | When one task needs to wait for others |
Next: TODO types, Up: TODO extensions [Contents][Index]
You can use TODO keywords to indicate different sequential states in the process of working on an item, for example42:
(setq org-todo-keywords '((sequence "TODO" "FEEDBACK" "VERIFY" "|" "DONE" "DELEGATED")))
The vertical bar separates the TODO keywords (states that need action) from the DONE states (which need no further action). If you don’t provide the separator bar, the last state is used as the DONE state. With this setup, the command C-c C-t will cycle an entry from TODO to FEEDBACK, then to VERIFY, and finally to DONE and DELEGATED. You may also use a numeric prefix argument to quickly select a specific state. For example C-3 C-c C-t will change the state immediately to VERIFY. Or you can use S-LEFT to go backward through the sequence. If you define many keywords, you can use in-buffer completion (see Completion) or even a special one-key selection scheme (see Fast access to TODO states) to insert these words into the buffer. Changing a TODO state can be logged with a timestamp, see Tracking TODO state changes, for more information.
Next: Multiple sets in one file, Previous: Workflow states, Up: TODO extensions [Contents][Index]
The second possibility is to use TODO keywords to indicate different types of action items. For example, you might want to indicate that items are for “work” or “home”. Or, when you work with several people on a single project, you might want to assign action items directly to persons, by using their names as TODO keywords. This would be set up like this:
(setq org-todo-keywords '((type "Fred" "Sara" "Lucy" "|" "DONE")))
In this case, different keywords do not indicate a sequence, but rather different types. So the normal work flow would be to assign a task to a person, and later to mark it DONE. Org mode supports this style by adapting the workings of the command C-c C-t43. When used several times in succession, it will still cycle through all names, in order to first select the right type for a task. But when you return to the item after some time and execute C-c C-t again, it will switch from any name directly to DONE. Use prefix arguments or completion to quickly select a specific name. You can also review the items of a specific TODO type in a sparse tree by using a numeric prefix to C-c / t. For example, to see all things Lucy has to do, you would use C-3 C-c / t. To collect Lucy’s items from all agenda files into a single buffer, you would use the numeric prefix argument as well when creating the global TODO list: C-3 C-c a t.
Next: Fast access to TODO states, Previous: TODO types, Up: TODO extensions [Contents][Index]
Sometimes you may want to use different sets of TODO keywords in
parallel. For example, you may want to have the basic
TODO
/DONE
, but also a workflow for bug fixing, and a
separate state indicating that an item has been canceled (so it is not
DONE, but also does not require action). Your setup would then look
like this:
(setq org-todo-keywords '((sequence "TODO" "|" "DONE") (sequence "REPORT" "BUG" "KNOWNCAUSE" "|" "FIXED") (sequence "|" "CANCELED")))
The keywords should all be different, this helps Org mode to keep track
of which subsequence should be used for a given entry. In this setup,
C-c C-t only operates within a subsequence, so it switches from
DONE
to (nothing) to TODO
, and from FIXED
to
(nothing) to REPORT
. Therefore you need a mechanism to initially
select the correct sequence. Besides the obvious ways like typing a
keyword or using completion, you may also apply the following commands:
These keys jump from one TODO subset to the next. In the above example,
C-u C-u C-c C-t or C-S-RIGHT would jump from TODO
or
DONE
to REPORT
, and any of the words in the second row to
CANCELED
. Note that the C-S- key binding conflict with
shift-selection-mode
(see Conflicts).
S-LEFT and S-RIGHT and walk through all
keywords from all sets, so for example S-RIGHT would switch
from DONE
to REPORT
in the example above. See also
Conflicts, for a discussion of the interaction with
shift-selection-mode
.
Next: Per-file keywords, Previous: Multiple sets in one file, Up: TODO extensions [Contents][Index]
If you would like to quickly change an entry to an arbitrary TODO state instead of cycling through the states, you can set up keys for single-letter access to the states. This is done by adding the selection character after each keyword, in parentheses44. For example:
(setq org-todo-keywords '((sequence "TODO(t)" "|" "DONE(d)") (sequence "REPORT(r)" "BUG(b)" "KNOWNCAUSE(k)" "|" "FIXED(f)") (sequence "|" "CANCELED(c)")))
If you then press C-c C-t followed by the selection key, the entry will be switched to this state. SPC can be used to remove any TODO keyword from an entry.45
Next: Faces for TODO keywords, Previous: Fast access to TODO states, Up: TODO extensions [Contents][Index]
It can be very useful to use different aspects of the TODO mechanism in different files. For file-local settings, you need to add special lines to the file which set the keywords and interpretation for that file only. For example, to set one of the two examples discussed above, you need one of the following lines anywhere in the file:
#+TODO: TODO FEEDBACK VERIFY | DONE CANCELED
(you may also write #+SEQ_TODO
to be explicit about the
interpretation, but it means the same as #+TODO
), or
#+TYP_TODO: Fred Sara Lucy Mike | DONE
A setup for using several sets in parallel would be:
#+TODO: TODO | DONE #+TODO: REPORT BUG KNOWNCAUSE | FIXED #+TODO: | CANCELED
To make sure you are using the correct keyword, type ‘#+’ into the buffer and then use M-TAB completion.
Remember that the keywords after the vertical bar (or the last keyword if no bar is there) must always mean that the item is DONE (although you may use a different word). After changing one of these lines, use C-c C-c with the cursor still in the line to make the changes known to Org mode46.
Next: TODO dependencies, Previous: Per-file keywords, Up: TODO extensions [Contents][Index]
Org mode highlights TODO keywords with special faces: org-todo
for keywords indicating that an item still has to be acted upon, and
org-done
for keywords indicating that an item is finished. If
you are using more than 2 different states, you might want to use
special faces for some of them. This can be done using the option
org-todo-keyword-faces
. For example:
(setq org-todo-keyword-faces '(("TODO" . org-warning) ("STARTED" . "yellow") ("CANCELED" . (:foreground "blue" :weight bold))))
While using a list with face properties as shown for CANCELED should
work, this does not always seem to be the case. If necessary, define a
special face and use that. A string is interpreted as a color. The option
org-faces-easy-properties
determines if that color is interpreted as a
foreground or a background color.
Previous: Faces for TODO keywords, Up: TODO extensions [Contents][Index]
The structure of Org files (hierarchy and lists) makes it easy to define TODO
dependencies. Usually, a parent TODO task should not be marked DONE until
all subtasks (defined as children tasks) are marked as DONE. And sometimes
there is a logical sequence to a number of (sub)tasks, so that one task
cannot be acted upon before all siblings above it are done. If you customize
the option org-enforce-todo-dependencies
, Org will block entries
from changing state to DONE while they have children that are not DONE.
Furthermore, if an entry has a property ORDERED
, each of its children
will be blocked until all earlier siblings are marked DONE. Here is an
example:
* TODO Blocked until (two) is done ** DONE one ** TODO two * Parent :PROPERTIES: :ORDERED: t :END: ** TODO a ** TODO b, needs to wait for (a) ** TODO c, needs to wait for (a) and (b)
You can ensure an entry is never blocked by using the NOBLOCKING
property:
* This entry is never blocked :PROPERTIES: :NOBLOCKING: t :END:
org-toggle-ordered-property
)Toggle the ORDERED
property of the current entry. A property is used
for this behavior because this should be local to the current entry, not
inherited like a tag. However, if you would like to track the value of
this property with a tag for better visibility, customize the option
org-track-ordered-property-with-tag
.
Change TODO state, circumventing any state blocking.
If you set the option org-agenda-dim-blocked-tasks
, TODO entries
that cannot be closed because of such dependencies will be shown in a dimmed
font or even made invisible in agenda views (see Agenda views).
You can also block changes of TODO states by looking at checkboxes
(see Checkboxes). If you set the option
org-enforce-todo-checkbox-dependencies
, an entry that has unchecked
checkboxes will be blocked from switching to DONE.
If you need more complex dependency structures, for example dependencies between entries in different trees or files, check out the contributed module org-depend.el.
Next: Priorities, Previous: TODO extensions, Up: TODO items [Contents][Index]
Org mode can automatically record a timestamp and possibly a note when you mark a TODO item as DONE, or even each time you change the state of a TODO item. This system is highly configurable; settings can be on a per-keyword basis and can be localized to a file or even a subtree. For information on how to clock working time for a task, see Clocking work time.
• Closing items: | When was this entry marked DONE? | |
• Tracking TODO state changes: | When did the status change? | |
• Tracking your habits: | How consistent have you been? |
Next: Tracking TODO state changes, Up: Progress logging [Contents][Index]
The most basic logging is to keep track of when a certain TODO item was finished. This is achieved with47
(setq org-log-done 'time)
Then each time you turn an entry from a TODO (not-done) state into any of the
DONE states, a line ‘CLOSED: [timestamp]’ will be inserted just after
the headline. If you turn the entry back into a TODO item through further
state cycling, that line will be removed again. If you turn the entry back
to a non-TODO state (by pressing C-c C-t SPC for example), that line
will also be removed, unless you set org-closed-keep-when-no-todo
to
non-nil
. If you want to record a note along with the timestamp,
use48
(setq org-log-done 'note)
You will then be prompted for a note, and that note will be stored below the entry with a ‘Closing Note’ heading.
Next: Tracking your habits, Previous: Closing items, Up: Progress logging [Contents][Index]
When TODO keywords are used as workflow states (see Workflow states), you
might want to keep track of when a state change occurred and maybe take a
note about this change. You can either record just a timestamp, or a
time-stamped note for a change. These records will be inserted after the
headline as an itemized list, newest first49. When taking a lot of notes, you might
want to get the notes out of the way into a drawer (see Drawers).
Customize org-log-into-drawer
to get this behavior—the recommended
drawer for this is called LOGBOOK
50. You can also
overrule the setting of this variable for a subtree by setting a
LOG_INTO_DRAWER
property.
Since it is normally too much to record a note for every state, Org mode expects configuration on a per-keyword basis for this. This is achieved by adding special markers ‘!’ (for a timestamp) or ‘@’ (for a note with timestamp) in parentheses after each keyword. For example, with the setting
(setq org-todo-keywords '((sequence "TODO(t)" "WAIT(w@/!)" "|" "DONE(d!)" "CANCELED(c@)")))
To record a timestamp without a note for TODO keywords configured with ‘@’, just type C-c C-c to enter a blank note when prompted.
You not only define global TODO keywords and fast access keys, but also request that a time is recorded when the entry is set to DONE51, and that a note is recorded when switching to WAIT or CANCELED. The setting for WAIT is even more special: the ‘!’ after the slash means that in addition to the note taken when entering the state, a timestamp should be recorded when leaving the WAIT state, if and only if the target state does not configure logging for entering it. So it has no effect when switching from WAIT to DONE, because DONE is configured to record a timestamp only. But when switching from WAIT back to TODO, the ‘/!’ in the WAIT setting now triggers a timestamp even though TODO has no logging configured.
You can use the exact same syntax for setting logging preferences local to a buffer:
#+TODO: TODO(t) WAIT(w@/!) | DONE(d!) CANCELED(c@)
In order to define logging settings that are local to a subtree or a single
item, define a LOGGING
property in this entry. Any non-empty
LOGGING
property resets all logging settings to nil
. You may
then turn on logging for this specific tree using #+STARTUP
keywords
like lognotedone
or logrepeat
, as well as adding state specific
settings like TODO(!)
. For example
* TODO Log each state with only a time :PROPERTIES: :LOGGING: TODO(!) WAIT(!) DONE(!) CANCELED(!) :END: * TODO Only log when switching to WAIT, and when repeating :PROPERTIES: :LOGGING: WAIT(@) logrepeat :END: * TODO No logging at all :PROPERTIES: :LOGGING: nil :END:
Previous: Tracking TODO state changes, Up: Progress logging [Contents][Index]
Org has the ability to track the consistency of a special category of TODOs, called “habits”. A habit has the following properties:
habits
module by customizing org-modules
.
STYLE
is set to the value habit
.
.+
style repeat
interval. A ++
style may be appropriate for habits with time
constraints, e.g., must be done on weekends, or a +
style for an
unusual habit that can have a backlog, e.g., weekly reports.
DONE
state enabled
(see Tracking TODO state changes), in order for historical data to be
represented in the consistency graph. If it is not enabled it is not an
error, but the consistency graphs will be largely meaningless.
To give you an idea of what the above rules look like in action, here’s an actual habit with some history:
** TODO Shave SCHEDULED: <2009-10-17 Sat .+2d/4d> :PROPERTIES: :STYLE: habit :LAST_REPEAT: [2009-10-19 Mon 00:36] :END: - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-15 Thu] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-12 Mon] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-10 Sat] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-04 Sun] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-10-02 Fri] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-29 Tue] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-25 Fri] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-19 Sat] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-16 Wed] - State "DONE" from "TODO" [2009-09-12 Sat]
What this habit says is: I want to shave at most every 2 days (given by the
SCHEDULED
date and repeat interval) and at least every 4 days. If
today is the 15th, then the habit first appears in the agenda on Oct 17,
after the minimum of 2 days has elapsed, and will appear overdue on Oct 19,
after four days have elapsed.
What’s really useful about habits is that they are displayed along with a consistency graph, to show how consistent you’ve been at getting that task done in the past. This graph shows every day that the task was done over the past three weeks, with colors for each day. The colors used are:
Blue
If the task wasn’t to be done yet on that day.
Green
If the task could have been done on that day.
Yellow
If the task was going to be overdue the next day.
Red
If the task was overdue on that day.
In addition to coloring each day, the day is also marked with an asterisk if the task was actually done that day, and an exclamation mark to show where the current day falls in the graph.
There are several configuration variables that can be used to change the way habits are displayed in the agenda.
org-habit-graph-column
The buffer column at which the consistency graph should be drawn. This will overwrite any text in that column, so it is a good idea to keep your habits’ titles brief and to the point.
org-habit-preceding-days
The amount of history, in days before today, to appear in consistency graphs.
org-habit-following-days
The number of days after today that will appear in consistency graphs.
org-habit-show-habits-only-for-today
If non-nil
, only show habits in today’s agenda view. This is set to true by
default.
Lastly, pressing K in the agenda buffer will cause habits to temporarily be disabled and they won’t appear at all. Press K again to bring them back. They are also subject to tag filtering, if you have habits which should only be done in certain contexts, for example.
Next: Breaking down tasks, Previous: Progress logging, Up: TODO items [Contents][Index]
If you use Org mode extensively, you may end up with enough TODO items that it starts to make sense to prioritize them. Prioritizing can be done by placing a priority cookie into the headline of a TODO item, like this
*** TODO [#A] Write letter to Sam Fortune
By default, Org mode supports three priorities: ‘A’, ‘B’, and
‘C’. ‘A’ is the highest priority. An entry without a cookie is
treated just like priority ‘B’. Priorities make a difference only for
sorting in the agenda (see Weekly/daily agenda); outside the agenda, they
have no inherent meaning to Org mode. The cookies can be highlighted with
special faces by customizing org-priority-faces
.
Priorities can be attached to any outline node; they do not need to be TODO items.
Set the priority of the current headline (org-priority
). The
command prompts for a priority character ‘A’, ‘B’ or ‘C’.
When you press SPC instead, the priority cookie is removed from the
headline. The priorities can also be changed “remotely” from the agenda
buffer with the , command (see Agenda commands).
org-priority-up
)org-priority-down
)Increase/decrease priority of current headline52. Note that these keys are
also used to modify timestamps (see Creating timestamps). See also
Conflicts, for a discussion of the interaction with
shift-selection-mode
.
You can change the range of allowed priorities by setting the options
org-highest-priority
, org-lowest-priority
, and
org-default-priority
. For an individual buffer, you may set
these values (highest, lowest, default) like this (please make sure that
the highest priority is earlier in the alphabet than the lowest
priority):
#+PRIORITIES: A C B
Next: Checkboxes, Previous: Priorities, Up: TODO items [Contents][Index]
It is often advisable to break down large tasks into smaller, manageable subtasks. You can do this by creating an outline tree below a TODO item, with detailed subtasks on the tree53. To keep the overview over the fraction of subtasks that are already completed, insert either ‘[/]’ or ‘[%]’ anywhere in the headline. These cookies will be updated each time the TODO status of a child changes, or when pressing C-c C-c on the cookie. For example:
* Organize Party [33%] ** TODO Call people [1/2] *** TODO Peter *** DONE Sarah ** TODO Buy food ** DONE Talk to neighbor
If a heading has both checkboxes and TODO children below it, the meaning of
the statistics cookie become ambiguous. Set the property
COOKIE_DATA
to either ‘checkbox’ or ‘todo’ to resolve
this issue.
If you would like to have the statistics cookie count any TODO entries in the
subtree (not just direct children), configure
org-hierarchical-todo-statistics
. To do this for a single subtree,
include the word ‘recursive’ into the value of the COOKIE_DATA
property.
* Parent capturing statistics [2/20] :PROPERTIES: :COOKIE_DATA: todo recursive :END:
If you would like a TODO entry to automatically change to DONE when all children are done, you can use the following setup:
(defun org-summary-todo (n-done n-not-done) "Switch entry to DONE when all subentries are done, to TODO otherwise." (let (org-log-done org-log-states) ; turn off logging (org-todo (if (= n-not-done 0) "DONE" "TODO")))) (add-hook 'org-after-todo-statistics-hook 'org-summary-todo)
Another possibility is the use of checkboxes to identify (a hierarchy of) a large number of subtasks (see Checkboxes).
Previous: Breaking down tasks, Up: TODO items [Contents][Index]
Every item in a plain list54 (see Plain lists) can be made into a checkbox by starting it with the string ‘[ ]’. This feature is similar to TODO items (see TODO items), but is more lightweight. Checkboxes are not included in the global TODO list, so they are often great to split a task into a number of simple steps. Or you can use them in a shopping list. To toggle a checkbox, use C-c C-c, or use the mouse (thanks to Piotr Zielinski’s org-mouse.el).
Here is an example of a checkbox list.
* TODO Organize party [2/4] - [-] call people [1/3] - [ ] Peter - [X] Sarah - [ ] Sam - [X] order food - [ ] think about what music to play - [X] talk to the neighbors
Checkboxes work hierarchically, so if a checkbox item has children that are checkboxes, toggling one of the children checkboxes will make the parent checkbox reflect if none, some, or all of the children are checked.
The ‘[2/4]’ and ‘[1/3]’ in the first and second line are cookies
indicating how many checkboxes present in this entry have been checked off,
and the total number of checkboxes present. This can give you an idea on how
many checkboxes remain, even without opening a folded entry. The cookies can
be placed into a headline or into (the first line of) a plain list item.
Each cookie covers checkboxes of direct children structurally below the
headline/item on which the cookie appears55. You have to insert the cookie yourself by typing either
‘[/]’ or ‘[%]’. With ‘[/]’ you get an ‘n out of m’
result, as in the examples above. With ‘[%]’ you get information about
the percentage of checkboxes checked (in the above example, this would be
‘[50%]’ and ‘[33%]’, respectively). In a headline, a cookie can
count either checkboxes below the heading or TODO states of children, and it
will display whatever was changed last. Set the property COOKIE_DATA
to either ‘checkbox’ or ‘todo’ to resolve this issue.
If the current outline node has an ORDERED
property, checkboxes must
be checked off in sequence, and an error will be thrown if you try to check
off a box while there are unchecked boxes above it.
The following commands work with checkboxes:
org-toggle-checkbox
)Toggle checkbox status or (with prefix arg) checkbox presence at point. With a single prefix argument, add an empty checkbox or remove the current one56. With a double prefix argument, set it to ‘[-]’, which is considered to be an intermediate state.
org-toggle-checkbox
)Toggle checkbox status or (with prefix arg) checkbox presence at point. With double prefix argument, set it to ‘[-]’, which is considered to be an intermediate state.
org-insert-todo-heading
)Insert a new item with a checkbox. This works only if the cursor is already in a plain list item (see Plain lists).
org-toggle-ordered-property
)Toggle the ORDERED
property of the entry, to toggle if checkboxes must
be checked off in sequence. A property is used for this behavior because
this should be local to the current entry, not inherited like a tag.
However, if you would like to track the value of this property with a tag
for better visibility, customize org-track-ordered-property-with-tag
.
org-update-statistics-cookies
)Update the statistics cookie in the current outline entry. When called with a C-u prefix, update the entire file. Checkbox statistic cookies are updated automatically if you toggle checkboxes with C-c C-c and make new ones with M-S-RET. TODO statistics cookies update when changing TODO states. If you delete boxes/entries or add/change them by hand, use this command to get things back into sync.
Next: Properties and columns, Previous: TODO items, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
An excellent way to implement labels and contexts for cross-correlating information is to assign tags to headlines. Org mode has extensive support for tags.
Every headline can contain a list of tags; they occur at the end of the
headline. Tags are normal words containing letters, numbers, ‘_’, and
‘@’. Tags must be preceded and followed by a single colon, e.g.,
‘:work:’. Several tags can be specified, as in ‘:work:urgent:’.
Tags will by default be in bold face with the same color as the headline.
You may specify special faces for specific tags using the option
org-tag-faces
, in much the same way as you can for TODO keywords
(see Faces for TODO keywords).
• Tag inheritance: | Tags use the tree structure of the outline | |
• Setting tags: | How to assign tags to a headline | |
• Tag hierarchy: | Create a hierarchy of tags | |
• Tag searches: | Searching for combinations of tags |
Next: Setting tags, Up: Tags [Contents][Index]
Tags make use of the hierarchical structure of outline trees. If a heading has a certain tag, all subheadings will inherit the tag as well. For example, in the list
* Meeting with the French group :work: ** Summary by Frank :boss:notes: *** TODO Prepare slides for him :action:
the final heading will have the tags ‘:work:’, ‘:boss:’, ‘:notes:’, and ‘:action:’ even though the final heading is not explicitly marked with all those tags. You can also set tags that all entries in a file should inherit just as if these tags were defined in a hypothetical level zero that surrounds the entire file. Use a line like this57:
#+FILETAGS: :Peter:Boss:Secret:
To limit tag inheritance to specific tags, use org-tags-exclude-from-inheritance
.
To turn it off entirely, use org-use-tag-inheritance
.
When a headline matches during a tags search while tag inheritance is turned
on, all the sublevels in the same tree will (for a simple match form) match
as well58. The list
of matches may then become very long. If you only want to see the first tags
match in a subtree, configure org-tags-match-list-sublevels
(not
recommended).
Tag inheritance is relevant when the agenda search tries to match a tag,
either in the tags
or tags-todo
agenda types. In other agenda
types, org-use-tag-inheritance
has no effect. Still, you may want to
have your tags correctly set in the agenda, so that tag filtering works fine,
with inherited tags. Set org-agenda-use-tag-inheritance
to control
this: the default value includes all agenda types, but setting this to nil
can really speed up agenda generation.
Next: Tag hierarchy, Previous: Tag inheritance, Up: Tags [Contents][Index]
Tags can simply be typed into the buffer at the end of a headline. After a colon, M-TAB offers completion on tags. There is also a special command for inserting tags:
org-set-tags-command
)Enter new tags for the current headline. Org mode will either offer
completion or a special single-key interface for setting tags, see
below. After pressing RET, the tags will be inserted and aligned
to org-tags-column
. When called with a C-u prefix, all
tags in the current buffer will be aligned to that column, just to make
things look nice. TAGS are automatically realigned after promotion,
demotion, and TODO state changes (see TODO basics).
org-set-tags-command
)When the cursor is in a headline, this does the same as C-c C-q.
Org supports tag insertion based on a list of tags. By
default this list is constructed dynamically, containing all tags
currently used in the buffer. You may also globally specify a hard list
of tags with the variable org-tag-alist
. Finally you can set
the default tags for a given file with lines like
#+TAGS: @work @home @tennisclub #+TAGS: laptop car pc sailboat
If you have globally defined your preferred set of tags using the
variable org-tag-alist
, but would like to use a dynamic tag list
in a specific file, add an empty TAGS option line to that file:
#+TAGS:
If you have a preferred set of tags that you would like to use in every file,
in addition to those defined on a per-file basis by TAGS option lines, then
you may specify a list of tags with the variable
org-tag-persistent-alist
. You may turn this off on a per-file basis
by adding a #+STARTUP
option line to that file:
#+STARTUP: noptag
By default Org mode uses the standard minibuffer completion facilities for
entering tags. However, it also implements another, quicker, tag selection
method called fast tag selection. This allows you to select and
deselect tags with just a single key press. For this to work well you should
assign unique, case-sensitive, letters to most of your commonly used tags.
You can do this globally by configuring the variable org-tag-alist
in
your Emacs init file. For example, you may find the need to tag many items
in different files with ‘:@home:’. In this case you can set something
like:
(setq org-tag-alist '(("@work" . ?w) ("@home" . ?h) ("laptop" . ?l)))
If the tag is only relevant to the file you are working on, then you can instead set the TAGS option line as:
#+TAGS: @work(w) @home(h) @tennisclub(t) laptop(l) pc(p)
The tags interface will show the available tags in a splash window. If you want to start a new line after a specific tag, insert ‘\n’ into the tag list
#+TAGS: @work(w) @home(h) @tennisclub(t) \n laptop(l) pc(p)
or write them in two lines:
#+TAGS: @work(w) @home(h) @tennisclub(t) #+TAGS: laptop(l) pc(p)
You can also group together tags that are mutually exclusive by using braces, as in:
#+TAGS: { @work(w) @home(h) @tennisclub(t) } laptop(l) pc(p)
you indicate that at most one of ‘@work’, ‘@home’, and ‘@tennisclub’ should be selected. Multiple such groups are allowed.
Don’t forget to press C-c C-c with the cursor in one of these lines to activate any changes.
To set these mutually exclusive groups in the variable org-tag-alist
,
you must use the dummy tags :startgroup
and :endgroup
instead
of the braces. Similarly, you can use :newline
to indicate a line
break. The previous example would be set globally by the following
configuration:
(setq org-tag-alist '((:startgroup . nil) ("@work" . ?w) ("@home" . ?h) ("@tennisclub" . ?t) (:endgroup . nil) ("laptop" . ?l) ("pc" . ?p)))
If at least one tag has a selection key then pressing C-c C-c will automatically present you with a special interface, listing inherited tags, the tags of the current headline, and a list of all valid tags with corresponding keys59.
Pressing keys assigned to tags will add or remove them from the list of tags in the current line. Selecting a tag in a group of mutually exclusive tags will turn off any other tags from that group.
In this interface, you can also use the following special keys:
Enter a tag in the minibuffer, even if the tag is not in the predefined list. You will be able to complete on all tags present in the buffer. You can also add several tags: just separate them with a comma.
Clear all tags for this line.
Accept the modified set.
Abort without installing changes.
If q is not assigned to a tag, it aborts like C-g.
Turn off groups of mutually exclusive tags. Use this to (as an exception) assign several tags from such a group.
Toggle auto-exit after the next change (see below). If you are using expert mode, the first C-c will display the selection window.
This method lets you assign tags to a headline with very few keys. With the above setup, you could clear the current tags and set ‘@home’, ‘laptop’ and ‘pc’ tags with just the following keys: C-c C-c SPC h l p RET. Switching from ‘@home’ to ‘@work’ would be done with C-c C-c w RET or alternatively with C-c C-c C-c w. Adding the non-predefined tag ‘Sarah’ could be done with C-c C-c TAB S a r a h RET RET.
If you find that most of the time you need only a single key press to
modify your list of tags, set org-fast-tag-selection-single-key
.
Then you no longer have to press RET to exit fast tag selection—it
will immediately exit after the first change. If you then occasionally
need more keys, press C-c to turn off auto-exit for the current tag
selection process (in effect: start selection with C-c C-c C-c
instead of C-c C-c). If you set the variable to the value
expert
, the special window is not even shown for single-key tag
selection, it comes up only when you press an extra C-c.
Next: Tag searches, Previous: Setting tags, Up: Tags [Contents][Index]
Tags can be defined in hierarchies. A tag can be defined as a group tag for a set of other tags. The group tag can be seen as the “broader term” for its set of tags. Defining multiple group tags and nesting them creates a tag hierarchy.
One use-case is to create a taxonomy of terms (tags) that can be used to classify nodes in a document or set of documents.
When you search for a group tag, it will return matches for all members in the group and its subgroups. In an agenda view, filtering by a group tag will display or hide headlines tagged with at least one of the members of the group or any of its subgroups. This makes tag searches and filters even more flexible.
You can set group tags by using brackets and inserting a colon between the group tag and its related tags—beware that all whitespaces are mandatory so that Org can parse this line correctly:
#+TAGS: [ GTD : Control Persp ]
In this example, ‘GTD’ is the group tag and it is related to two other tags: ‘Control’, ‘Persp’. Defining ‘Control’ and ‘Persp’ as group tags creates a hierarchy of tags:
#+TAGS: [ Control : Context Task ] #+TAGS: [ Persp : Vision Goal AOF Project ]
That can conceptually be seen as a hierarchy of tags:
- GTD - Persp - Vision - Goal - AOF - Project - Control - Context - Task
You can use the :startgrouptag
, :grouptags
and
:endgrouptag
keyword directly when setting org-tag-alist
directly:
(setq org-tag-alist '((:startgrouptag) ("GTD") (:grouptags) ("Control") ("Persp") (:endgrouptag) (:startgrouptag) ("Control") (:grouptags) ("Context") ("Task") (:endgrouptag)))
The tags in a group can be mutually exclusive if using the same group syntax as is used for grouping mutually exclusive tags together; using curly brackets.
#+TAGS: { Context : @Home @Work @Call }
When setting org-tag-alist
you can use :startgroup
&
:endgroup
instead of :startgrouptag
& :endgrouptag
to
make the tags mutually exclusive.
Furthermore, the members of a group tag can also be regular expressions, creating the possibility of a more dynamic and rule-based tag structure. The regular expressions in the group must be specified within { }. Here is an expanded example:
#+TAGS: [ Vision : {V@.+} ] #+TAGS: [ Goal : {G@.+} ] #+TAGS: [ AOF : {AOF@.+} ] #+TAGS: [ Project : {P@.+} ]
Searching for the tag ‘Project’ will now list all tags also including regular expression matches for ‘P@.+’, and similarly for tag searches on ‘Vision’, ‘Goal’ and ‘AOF’. For example, this would work well for a project tagged with a common project-identifier, e.g. ‘P@2014_OrgTags’.
If you want to ignore group tags temporarily, toggle group tags support
with org-toggle-tags-groups
, bound to C-c C-x q. If you
want to disable tag groups completely, set org-group-tags
to nil
.
Previous: Tag hierarchy, Up: Tags [Contents][Index]
Once a system of tags has been set up, it can be used to collect related information into special lists.
org-match-sparse-tree
)Create a sparse tree with all headlines matching a tags/property/TODO search. With a C-u prefix argument, ignore headlines that are not a TODO line. See Matching tags and properties.
org-tags-view
)Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files. See Matching tags and properties.
org-tags-view
)Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files, but check
only TODO items and force checking subitems (see the option
org-tags-match-list-sublevels
).
These commands all prompt for a match string which allows basic Boolean logic like ‘+boss+urgent-project1’, to find entries with tags ‘boss’ and ‘urgent’, but not ‘project1’, or ‘Kathy|Sally’ to find entries tagged as ‘Kathy’ or ‘Sally’. The full syntax of the search string is rich and allows also matching against TODO keywords, entry levels and properties. For a complete description with many examples, see Matching tags and properties.
Next: Dates and times, Previous: Tags, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
A property is a key-value pair associated with an entry. Properties can be set so they are associated with a single entry, with every entry in a tree, or with every entry in an Org mode file.
There are two main applications for properties in Org mode. First,
properties are like tags, but with a value. Imagine maintaining a file where
you document bugs and plan releases for a piece of software. Instead of
using tags like :release_1:
, :release_2:
, you can use a
property, say :Release:
, that in different subtrees has different
values, such as 1.0
or 2.0
. Second, you can use properties to
implement (very basic) database capabilities in an Org buffer. Imagine
keeping track of your music CDs, where properties could be things such as the
album, artist, date of release, number of tracks, and so on.
Properties can be conveniently edited and viewed in column view (see Column view).
• Property syntax: | How properties are spelled out | |
• Special properties: | Access to other Org mode features | |
• Property searches: | Matching property values | |
• Property inheritance: | Passing values down the tree | |
• Column view: | Tabular viewing and editing | |
• Property API: | Properties for Lisp programmers |
Next: Special properties, Up: Properties and columns [Contents][Index]
Properties are key-value pairs. When they are associated with a single entry
or with a tree they need to be inserted into a special drawer
(see Drawers) with the name PROPERTIES
, which has to be located
right below a headline, and its planning line (see Deadlines and scheduling) when applicable. Each property is specified on a single line,
with the key (surrounded by colons) first, and the value after it. Keys are
case-insensitive. Here is an example:
* CD collection ** Classic *** Goldberg Variations :PROPERTIES: :Title: Goldberg Variations :Composer: J.S. Bach :Artist: Glen Gould :Publisher: Deutsche Grammophon :NDisks: 1 :END:
Depending on the value of org-use-property-inheritance
, a property set
this way will either be associated with a single entry, or the subtree
defined by the entry, see Property inheritance.
You may define the allowed values for a particular property ‘:Xyz:’ by setting a property ‘:Xyz_ALL:’. This special property is inherited, so if you set it in a level 1 entry, it will apply to the entire tree. When allowed values are defined, setting the corresponding property becomes easier and is less prone to typing errors. For the example with the CD collection, we can predefine publishers and the number of disks in a box like this:
* CD collection :PROPERTIES: :NDisks_ALL: 1 2 3 4 :Publisher_ALL: "Deutsche Grammophon" Philips EMI :END:
If you want to set properties that can be inherited by any entry in a file, use a line like
#+PROPERTY: NDisks_ALL 1 2 3 4
Contrary to properties set from a special drawer, you have to refresh the buffer with C-c C-c to activate this change.
If you want to add to the value of an existing property, append a +
to
the property name. The following results in the property var
having
the value “foo=1 bar=2”.
#+PROPERTY: var foo=1 #+PROPERTY: var+ bar=2
It is also possible to add to the values of inherited properties. The
following results in the genres
property having the value “Classic
Baroque” under the Goldberg Variations
subtree.
* CD collection ** Classic :PROPERTIES: :GENRES: Classic :END: *** Goldberg Variations :PROPERTIES: :Title: Goldberg Variations :Composer: J.S. Bach :Artist: Glen Gould :Publisher: Deutsche Grammophon :NDisks: 1 :GENRES+: Baroque :END:
Note that a property can only have one entry per Drawer.
Property values set with the global variable
org-global-properties
can be inherited by all entries in all
Org files.
The following commands help to work with properties:
pcomplete
)After an initial colon in a line, complete property keys. All keys used in the current file will be offered as possible completions.
org-set-property
)Set a property. This prompts for a property name and a value. If necessary, the property drawer is created as well.
Insert a property drawer into the current entry. The drawer will be inserted early in the entry, but after the lines with planning information like deadlines.
org-property-action
)With the cursor in a property drawer, this executes property commands.
org-set-property
)Set a property in the current entry. Both the property and the value can be inserted using completion.
org-property-next-allowed-value
)org-property-previous-allowed-value
)Switch property at point to the next/previous allowed value.
org-delete-property
)org-delete-property-globally
)Globally remove a property, from all entries in the current file.
org-compute-property-at-point
)Compute the property at point, using the operator and scope from the nearest column format definition.
Next: Property searches, Previous: Property syntax, Up: Properties and columns [Contents][Index]
Special properties provide an alternative access method to Org mode features, like the TODO state or the priority of an entry, discussed in the previous chapters. This interface exists so that you can include these states in a column view (see Column view), or to use them in queries. The following property names are special and should not be used as keys in the properties drawer:
ALLTAGS All tags, including inherited ones. BLOCKED "t" if task is currently blocked by children or siblings. CLOCKSUM The sum of CLOCK intervals in the subtree.org-clock-sum
must be run first to compute the values in the current buffer. CLOCKSUM_T The sum of CLOCK intervals in the subtree for today.org-clock-sum-today
must be run first to compute the values in the current buffer. CLOSED When was this entry closed? DEADLINE The deadline time string, without the angular brackets. FILE The filename the entry is located in. ITEM The headline of the entry. PRIORITY The priority of the entry, a string with a single letter. SCHEDULED The scheduling timestamp, without the angular brackets. TAGS The tags defined directly in the headline. TIMESTAMP The first keyword-less timestamp in the entry. TIMESTAMP_IA The first inactive timestamp in the entry. TODO The TODO keyword of the entry.
Next: Property inheritance, Previous: Special properties, Up: Properties and columns [Contents][Index]
To create sparse trees and special lists with selection based on properties, the same commands are used as for tag searches (see Tag searches).
org-match-sparse-tree
)Create a sparse tree with all matching entries. With a C-u prefix argument, ignore headlines that are not a TODO line.
org-tags-view
)Create a global list of tag/property matches from all agenda files. See Matching tags and properties.
org-tags-view
)Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files, but check
only TODO items and force checking of subitems (see the option
org-tags-match-list-sublevels
).
The syntax for the search string is described in Matching tags and properties.
There is also a special command for creating sparse trees based on a single property:
Create a sparse tree based on the value of a property. This first prompts for the name of a property, and then for a value. A sparse tree is created with all entries that define this property with the given value. If you enclose the value in curly braces, it is interpreted as a regular expression and matched against the property values.
Next: Column view, Previous: Property searches, Up: Properties and columns [Contents][Index]
The outline structure of Org mode documents lends itself to an
inheritance model of properties: if the parent in a tree has a certain
property, the children can inherit this property. Org mode does not
turn this on by default, because it can slow down property searches
significantly and is often not needed. However, if you find inheritance
useful, you can turn it on by setting the variable
org-use-property-inheritance
. It may be set to t
to make
all properties inherited from the parent, to a list of properties
that should be inherited, or to a regular expression that matches
inherited properties. If a property has the value nil
, this is
interpreted as an explicit undefine of the property, so that inheritance
search will stop at this value and return nil
.
Org mode has a few properties for which inheritance is hard-coded, at least for the special applications for which they are used:
COLUMNS
The :COLUMNS:
property defines the format of column view
(see Column view). It is inherited in the sense that the level
where a :COLUMNS:
property is defined is used as the starting
point for a column view table, independently of the location in the
subtree from where columns view is turned on.
CATEGORY
For agenda view, a category set through a :CATEGORY:
property
applies to the entire subtree.
ARCHIVE
For archiving, the :ARCHIVE:
property may define the archive
location for the entire subtree (see Moving subtrees).
LOGGING
The LOGGING
property may define logging settings for an entry or a
subtree (see Tracking TODO state changes).
Next: Property API, Previous: Property inheritance, Up: Properties and columns [Contents][Index]
A great way to view and edit properties in an outline tree is column view. In column view, each outline node is turned into a table row. Columns in this table provide access to properties of the entries. Org mode implements columns by overlaying a tabular structure over the headline of each item. While the headlines have been turned into a table row, you can still change the visibility of the outline tree. For example, you get a compact table by switching to CONTENTS view (S-TAB S-TAB, or simply c while column view is active), but you can still open, read, and edit the entry below each headline. Or, you can switch to column view after executing a sparse tree command and in this way get a table only for the selected items. Column view also works in agenda buffers (see Agenda views) where queries have collected selected items, possibly from a number of files.
• Defining columns: | The COLUMNS format property | |
• Using column view: | How to create and use column view | |
• Capturing column view: | A dynamic block for column view |
Next: Using column view, Up: Column view [Contents][Index]
Setting up a column view first requires defining the columns. This is done by defining a column format line.
• Scope of column definitions: | Where defined, where valid? | |
• Column attributes: | Appearance and content of a column |
Next: Column attributes, Up: Defining columns [Contents][Index]
To define a column format for an entire file, use a line like
#+COLUMNS: %25ITEM %TAGS %PRIORITY %TODO
To specify a format that only applies to a specific tree, add a
:COLUMNS:
property to the top node of that tree, for example:
** Top node for columns view :PROPERTIES: :COLUMNS: %25ITEM %TAGS %PRIORITY %TODO :END:
If a :COLUMNS:
property is present in an entry, it defines columns
for the entry itself, and for the entire subtree below it. Since the
column definition is part of the hierarchical structure of the document,
you can define columns on level 1 that are general enough for all
sublevels, and more specific columns further down, when you edit a
deeper part of the tree.
Previous: Scope of column definitions, Up: Defining columns [Contents][Index]
A column definition sets the attributes of a column. The general definition looks like this:
%[width]property[(title)][{summary-type}]
Except for the percent sign and the property name, all items are optional. The individual parts have the following meaning:
width An integer specifying the width of the column in characters. If omitted, the width will be determined automatically. property The property that should be edited in this column. Special properties representing meta data are allowed here as well (see Special properties) title The header text for the column. If omitted, the property name is used. {summary-type} The summary type. If specified, the column values for parent nodes are computed from the children(60). Supported summary types are: {+} Sum numbers in this column. {+;%.1f} Like ‘+’, but format result with ‘%.1f’. {$} Currency, short for ‘+;%.2f’. {min} Smallest number in column. {max} Largest number. {mean} Arithmetic mean of numbers. {X} Checkbox status, ‘[X]’ if all children are ‘[X]’. {X/} Checkbox status, ‘[n/m]’. {X%} Checkbox status, ‘[n%]’. {:} Sum times, HH:MM, plain numbers are hours(61). {:min} Smallest time value in column. {:max} Largest time value. {:mean} Arithmetic mean of time values. {@min} Minimum age(62) (in days/hours/mins/seconds). {@max} Maximum age (in days/hours/mins/seconds). {@mean} Arithmetic mean of ages (in days/hours/mins/seconds). {est+} Add ‘low-high’ estimates.
The est+
summary type requires further explanation. It is used for
combining estimates, expressed as ‘low-high’ ranges or plain numbers.
For example, instead of estimating a particular task will take 5 days, you
might estimate it as 5–6 days if you’re fairly confident you know how much
work is required, or 1–10 days if you don’t really know what needs to be
done. Both ranges average at 5.5 days, but the first represents a more
predictable delivery.
When combining a set of such estimates, simply adding the lows and highs
produces an unrealistically wide result. Instead, est+
adds the
statistical mean and variance of the sub-tasks, generating a final estimate
from the sum. For example, suppose you had ten tasks, each of which was
estimated at 0.5 to 2 days of work. Straight addition produces an estimate
of 5 to 20 days, representing what to expect if everything goes either
extremely well or extremely poorly. In contrast, est+
estimates the
full job more realistically, at 10–15 days.
Numbers are right-aligned when a format specifier with an explicit width like
%5d
or %5.1f
is used.
You can also define custom summary types by setting
org-columns-summary-types
, which see.
Here is an example for a complete columns definition, along with allowed values.
:COLUMNS: %25ITEM %9Approved(Approved?){X} %Owner %11Status \(63) %10Time_Estimate{:} %CLOCKSUM %CLOCKSUM_T :Owner_ALL: Tammy Mark Karl Lisa Don :Status_ALL: "In progress" "Not started yet" "Finished" "" :Approved_ALL: "[ ]" "[X]"
The first column, ‘%25ITEM’, means the first 25 characters of the item itself, i.e., of the headline. You probably always should start the column definition with the ‘ITEM’ specifier. The other specifiers create columns ‘Owner’ with a list of names as allowed values, for ‘Status’ with four different possible values, and for a checkbox field ‘Approved’. When no width is given after the ‘%’ character, the column will be exactly as wide as it needs to be in order to fully display all values. The ‘Approved’ column does have a modified title (‘Approved?’, with a question mark). Summaries will be created for the ‘Time_Estimate’ column by adding time duration expressions like HH:MM, and for the ‘Approved’ column, by providing an ‘[X]’ status if all children have been checked. The ‘CLOCKSUM’ and ‘CLOCKSUM_T’ columns are special, they lists the sums of CLOCK intervals in the subtree, either for all clocks or just for today.
Next: Capturing column view, Previous: Defining columns, Up: Column view [Contents][Index]
org-columns
)Turn on column view. If the cursor is before the first headline in the file,
or the function called with the universal prefix argument, column view is
turned on for the entire file, using the #+COLUMNS
definition. If the
cursor is somewhere inside the outline, this command searches the hierarchy,
up from point, for a :COLUMNS:
property that defines a format. When
one is found, the column view table is established for the tree starting at
the entry that contains the :COLUMNS:
property. If no such property
is found, the format is taken from the #+COLUMNS
line or from the
variable org-columns-default-format
, and column view is established
for the current entry and its subtree.
org-columns-redo
)Recreate the column view, to include recent changes made in the buffer.
org-columns-redo
)org-columns-quit
)Exit column view.
Switch to the next/previous allowed value of the field. For this, you have to have specified allowed values for a property.
Directly select the Nth allowed value, 0 selects the 10th value.
org-columns-next-allowed-value
)org-columns-previous-allowed-value
)org-columns-edit-value
)Edit the property at point. For the special properties, this will invoke the same interface that you normally use to change that property. For example, when editing a TAGS property, the tag completion or fast selection interface will pop up.
org-columns-set-tags-or-toggle
)org-columns-show-value
)View the full value of this property. This is useful if the width of the column is smaller than that of the value.
org-columns-edit-allowed
)Edit the list of allowed values for this property. If the list is found in the hierarchy, the modified value is stored there. If no list is found, the new value is stored in the first entry that is part of the current column view.
org-columns-narrow
)org-columns-widen
)org-columns-new
)org-columns-delete
)Delete the current column.
Previous: Using column view, Up: Column view [Contents][Index]
Since column view is just an overlay over a buffer, it cannot be
exported or printed directly. If you want to capture a column view, use
a columnview
dynamic block (see Dynamic blocks). The frame
of this block looks like this:
* The column view #+BEGIN: columnview :hlines 1 :id "label" #+END:
This dynamic block has the following parameters:
:id
This is the most important parameter. Column view is a feature that is often localized to a certain (sub)tree, and the capture block might be at a different location in the file. To identify the tree whose view to capture, you can use 4 values:
local use the tree in which the capture block is located global make a global view, including all headings in the file "file:path-to-file" run column view at the top of this file "ID" call column view in the tree that has an:ID:
property with the value label. You can use M-x org-id-copy RET to create a globally uniqueID
for the current entry and copy it to the kill-ring.
:hlines
When t
, insert an hline after every line. When a number N, insert
an hline before each headline with level <= N
.
:vlines
When set to t
, force column groups to get vertical lines.
:maxlevel
When set to a number, don’t capture entries below this level.
:skip-empty-rows
When set to t
, skip rows where the only non-empty specifier of the
column view is ITEM
.
:indent
When non-nil
, indent each ITEM
field according to its level.
The following commands insert or update the dynamic block:
org-insert-columns-dblock
)Insert a dynamic block capturing a column view. You will be prompted
for the scope or ID
of the view.
org-dblock-update
)org-update-all-dblocks
)Update all dynamic blocks (see Dynamic blocks). This is useful if you have several clock table blocks, column-capturing blocks or other dynamic blocks in a buffer.
You can add formulas to the column view table and you may add plotting
instructions in front of the table—these will survive an update of the
block. If there is a #+TBLFM:
after the table, the table will
actually be recalculated automatically after an update.
An alternative way to capture and process property values into a table is provided by Eric Schulte’s org-collector.el which is a contributed package64. It provides a general API to collect properties from entries in a certain scope, and arbitrary Lisp expressions to process these values before inserting them into a table or a dynamic block.
Previous: Column view, Up: Properties and columns [Contents][Index]
There is a full API for accessing and changing properties. This API can be used by Emacs Lisp programs to work with properties and to implement features based on them. For more information see Using the property API.
Next: Capture - Refile - Archive, Previous: Properties and columns, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
To assist project planning, TODO items can be labeled with a date and/or a time. The specially formatted string carrying the date and time information is called a timestamp in Org mode. This may be a little confusing because timestamp is often used to indicate when something was created or last changed. However, in Org mode this term is used in a much wider sense.
• Timestamps: | Assigning a time to a tree entry | |
• Creating timestamps: | Commands which insert timestamps | |
• Deadlines and scheduling: | Planning your work | |
• Clocking work time: | Tracking how long you spend on a task | |
• Effort estimates: | Planning work effort in advance | |
• Timers: | Notes with a running timer |
Next: Creating timestamps, Up: Dates and times [Contents][Index]
A timestamp is a specification of a date (possibly with a time or a range of times) in a special format, either ‘<2003-09-16 Tue>’65 or ‘<2003-09-16 Tue 09:39>’ or ‘<2003-09-16 Tue 12:00-12:30>’66. A timestamp can appear anywhere in the headline or body of an Org tree entry. Its presence causes entries to be shown on specific dates in the agenda (see Weekly/daily agenda). We distinguish:
A simple timestamp just assigns a date/time to an item. This is just like writing down an appointment or event in a paper agenda. In the agenda display, the headline of an entry associated with a plain timestamp will be shown exactly on that date.
* Meet Peter at the movies <2006-11-01 Wed 19:15> * Discussion on climate change <2006-11-02 Thu 20:00-22:00>
A timestamp may contain a repeater interval, indicating that it applies not only on the given date, but again and again after a certain interval of N days (d), weeks (w), months (m), or years (y). The following will show up in the agenda every Wednesday:
* Pick up Sam at school <2007-05-16 Wed 12:30 +1w>
For more complex date specifications, Org mode supports using the special sexp diary entries implemented in the Emacs calendar/diary package67. For example with optional time
* 22:00-23:00 The nerd meeting on every 2nd Thursday of the month <%%(diary-float t 4 2)>
Two timestamps connected by ‘--’ denote a range. The headline will be shown on the first and last day of the range, and on any dates that are displayed and fall in the range. Here is an example:
** Meeting in Amsterdam <2004-08-23 Mon>--<2004-08-26 Thu>
Just like a plain timestamp, but with square brackets instead of angular ones. These timestamps are inactive in the sense that they do not trigger an entry to show up in the agenda.
* Gillian comes late for the fifth time [2006-11-01 Wed]
Next: Deadlines and scheduling, Previous: Timestamps, Up: Dates and times [Contents][Index]
For Org mode to recognize timestamps, they need to be in the specific format. All commands listed below produce timestamps in the correct format.
org-time-stamp
)Prompt for a date and insert a corresponding timestamp. When the cursor is at an existing timestamp in the buffer, the command is used to modify this timestamp instead of inserting a new one. When this command is used twice in succession, a time range is inserted.
org-time-stamp-inactive
)Like C-c ., but insert an inactive timestamp that will not cause an agenda entry.
Like C-c . and C-c !, but use the alternative format which
contains date and time. The default time can be rounded to multiples of 5
minutes, see the option org-time-stamp-rounding-minutes
.
Normalize timestamp, insert/fix day name if missing or wrong.
org-date-from-calendar
)Insert a timestamp corresponding to the cursor date in the Calendar.
org-goto-calendar
)Access the Emacs calendar for the current date. If there is a timestamp in the current line, go to the corresponding date instead.
org-open-at-point
)Access the agenda for the date given by the timestamp or -range at point (see Weekly/daily agenda).
org-timestamp-down-day
)org-timestamp-up-day
)Change date at cursor by one day. These key bindings conflict with shift-selection and related modes (see Conflicts).
org-timestamp-up
)org-timestamp-down-down
)Change the item under the cursor in a timestamp. The cursor can be on a year, month, day, hour or minute. When the timestamp contains a time range like ‘15:30-16:30’, modifying the first time will also shift the second, shifting the time block with constant length. To change the length, modify the second time. Note that if the cursor is in a headline and not at a timestamp, these same keys modify the priority of an item. (see Priorities). The key bindings also conflict with shift-selection and related modes (see Conflicts).
org-evaluate-time-range
)Evaluate a time range by computing the difference between start and end. With a prefix argument, insert result after the time range (in a table: into the following column).
• The date/time prompt: | How Org mode helps you entering date and time | |
• Custom time format: | Making dates look different |
Next: Custom time format, Up: Creating timestamps [Contents][Index]
When Org mode prompts for a date/time, the default is shown in default date/time format, and the prompt therefore seems to ask for a specific format. But it will in fact accept date/time information in a variety of formats. Generally, the information should start at the beginning of the string. Org mode will find whatever information is in there and derive anything you have not specified from the default date and time. The default is usually the current date and time, but when modifying an existing timestamp, or when entering the second stamp of a range, it is taken from the stamp in the buffer. When filling in information, Org mode assumes that most of the time you will want to enter a date in the future: if you omit the month/year and the given day/month is before today, it will assume that you mean a future date68. If the date has been automatically shifted into the future, the time prompt will show this with ‘(=>F).’
For example, let’s assume that today is June 13, 2006. Here is how various inputs will be interpreted, the items filled in by Org mode are in bold.
3-2-5 ⇒ 2003-02-05 2/5/3 ⇒ 2003-02-05 14 ⇒ 2006-06-14 12 ⇒ 2006-07-12 2/5 ⇒ 2007-02-05 Fri ⇒ nearest Friday after the default date sep 15 ⇒ 2006-09-15 feb 15 ⇒ 2007-02-15 sep 12 9 ⇒ 2009-09-12 12:45 ⇒ 2006-06-13 12:45 22 sept 0:34 ⇒ 2006-09-22 00:34 w4 ⇒ ISO week four of the current year 2006 2012 w4 fri ⇒ Friday of ISO week 4 in 2012 2012-w04-5 ⇒ Same as above
Furthermore you can specify a relative date by giving, as the first thing in the input: a plus/minus sign, a number and a letter ([hdwmy]) to indicate change in hours, days, weeks, months, or years. With a single plus or minus, the date is always relative to today. With a double plus or minus, it is relative to the default date. If instead of a single letter, you use the abbreviation of day name, the date will be the Nth such day, e.g.:
+0 ⇒ today . ⇒ today +4d ⇒ four days from today +4 ⇒ same as above +2w ⇒ two weeks from today ++5 ⇒ five days from default date +2tue ⇒ second Tuesday from now -wed ⇒ last Wednesday
The function understands English month and weekday abbreviations. If
you want to use unabbreviated names and/or other languages, configure
the variables parse-time-months
and parse-time-weekdays
.
Not all dates can be represented in a given Emacs implementation. By default
Org mode forces dates into the compatibility range 1970–2037 which works on
all Emacs implementations. If you want to use dates outside of this range,
read the docstring of the variable
org-read-date-force-compatible-dates
.
You can specify a time range by giving start and end times or by giving a start time and a duration (in HH:MM format). Use one or two dash(es) as the separator in the former case and use ’+’ as the separator in the latter case, e.g.:
11am-1:15pm ⇒ 11:00-13:15 11am--1:15pm ⇒ same as above 11am+2:15 ⇒ same as above
Parallel to the minibuffer prompt, a calendar is popped up69. When you exit the date prompt, either by clicking on a date in the calendar, or by pressing RET, the date selected in the calendar will be combined with the information entered at the prompt. You can control the calendar fully from the minibuffer:
RET Choose date at cursor in calendar. mouse-1 Select date by clicking on it. S-RIGHT/LEFT One day forward/backward. S-DOWN/UP One week forward/backward. M-S-RIGHT/LEFT One month forward/backward. > / < Scroll calendar forward/backward by one month. M-v / C-v Scroll calendar forward/backward by 3 months. M-S-DOWN/UP Scroll calendar forward/backward by one year.
The actions of the date/time prompt may seem complex, but I assure you they will grow on you, and you will start getting annoyed by pretty much any other way of entering a date/time out there. To help you understand what is going on, the current interpretation of your input will be displayed live in the minibuffer70.
Previous: The date/time prompt, Up: Creating timestamps [Contents][Index]
Org mode uses the standard ISO notation for dates and times as it is
defined in ISO 8601. If you cannot get used to this and require another
representation of date and time to keep you happy, you can get it by
customizing the options org-display-custom-times
and
org-time-stamp-custom-formats
.
org-toggle-time-stamp-overlays
)Toggle the display of custom formats for dates and times.
Org mode needs the default format for scanning, so the custom date/time format does not replace the default format—instead it is put over the default format using text properties. This has the following consequences:
Next: Clocking work time, Previous: Creating timestamps, Up: Dates and times [Contents][Index]
A timestamp may be preceded by special keywords to facilitate planning. Both the timestamp and the keyword have to be positioned immediately after the task they refer to.
Meaning: the task (most likely a TODO item, though not necessarily) is supposed to be finished on that date.
On the deadline date, the task will be listed in the agenda. In
addition, the agenda for today will carry a warning about the
approaching or missed deadline, starting
org-deadline-warning-days
before the due date, and continuing
until the entry is marked DONE. An example:
*** TODO write article about the Earth for the Guide DEADLINE: <2004-02-29 Sun> The editor in charge is [[bbdb:Ford Prefect]]
You can specify a different lead time for warnings for a specific
deadline using the following syntax. Here is an example with a warning
period of 5 days DEADLINE: <2004-02-29 Sun -5d>
. This warning is
deactivated if the task gets scheduled and you set
org-agenda-skip-deadline-prewarning-if-scheduled
to t
.
Meaning: you are planning to start working on that task on the given date.
The headline will be listed under the given date71. In addition, a reminder that the scheduled date has passed will be present in the compilation for today, until the entry is marked DONE, i.e., the task will automatically be forwarded until completed.
*** TODO Call Trillian for a date on New Years Eve. SCHEDULED: <2004-12-25 Sat>
If you want to delay the display of this task in the agenda, use
SCHEDULED: <2004-12-25 Sat -2d>
: the task is still scheduled on the
25th but will appear two days later. In case the task contains a repeater,
the delay is considered to affect all occurrences; if you want the delay to
only affect the first scheduled occurrence of the task, use --2d
instead. See org-scheduled-delay-days
and
org-agenda-skip-scheduled-delay-if-deadline
for details on how to
control this globally or per agenda.
Important: Scheduling an item in Org mode should not be understood in the same way that we understand scheduling a meeting. Setting a date for a meeting is just a simple appointment, you should mark this entry with a simple plain timestamp, to get this item shown on the date where it applies. This is a frequent misunderstanding by Org users. In Org mode, scheduling means setting a date when you want to start working on an action item.
You may use timestamps with repeaters in scheduling and deadline
entries. Org mode will issue early and late warnings based on the
assumption that the timestamp represents the nearest instance of
the repeater. However, the use of diary sexp entries like
<%%(diary-float t 42)>
in scheduling and deadline timestamps is limited. Org mode does not
know enough about the internals of each sexp function to issue early and
late warnings. However, it will show the item on each day where the
sexp entry matches.
• Inserting deadline/schedule: | Planning items | |
• Repeated tasks: | Items that show up again and again |
Next: Repeated tasks, Up: Deadlines and scheduling [Contents][Index]
The following commands allow you to quickly insert a deadline or to schedule an item:
org-deadline
)Insert DEADLINE
keyword along with a stamp. Any CLOSED timestamp will
be removed. When called with a prefix arg, an existing deadline will be
removed from the entry. Depending on the variable
org-log-redeadline
72, a note will be taken when changing an existing
deadline.
org-schedule
)Insert SCHEDULED
keyword along with a stamp. Any CLOSED timestamp
will be removed. When called with a prefix argument, remove the scheduling
date from the entry. Depending on the variable
org-log-reschedule
73, a note will be taken when changing an existing
scheduling time.
org-check-deadlines
)Create a sparse tree with all deadlines that are either past-due, or
which will become due within org-deadline-warning-days
.
With C-u prefix, show all deadlines in the file. With a numeric
prefix, check that many days. For example, C-1 C-c / d shows
all deadlines due tomorrow.
org-check-before-date
)Sparse tree for deadlines and scheduled items before a given date.
org-check-after-date
)Sparse tree for deadlines and scheduled items after a given date.
Note that org-schedule
and org-deadline
supports
setting the date by indicating a relative time: e.g., +1d will set
the date to the next day after today, and –1w will set the date
to the previous week before any current timestamp.
Previous: Inserting deadline/schedule, Up: Deadlines and scheduling [Contents][Index]
Some tasks need to be repeated again and again. Org mode helps to organize
such tasks using a so-called repeater in a DEADLINE
, SCHEDULED
,
or plain timestamp. In the following example
** TODO Pay the rent DEADLINE: <2005-10-01 Sat +1m>
the +1m
is a repeater; the intended interpretation is that the task
has a deadline on <2005-10-01> and repeats itself every (one) month starting
from that time. You can use yearly, monthly, weekly, daily and hourly repeat
cookies by using the y/w/m/d/h
letters. If you need both a repeater
and a special warning period in a deadline entry, the repeater should come
first and the warning period last: DEADLINE: <2005-10-01 Sat +1m -3d>
.
Deadlines and scheduled items produce entries in the agenda when they are
over-due, so it is important to be able to mark such an entry as completed
once you have done so. When you mark a DEADLINE
or a SCHEDULED
with the TODO keyword DONE, it will no longer produce entries in the agenda.
The problem with this is, however, that then also the next instance of
the repeated entry will not be active. Org mode deals with this in the
following way: When you try to mark such an entry DONE (using C-c C-t),
it will shift the base date of the repeating timestamp by the repeater
interval, and immediately set the entry state back to TODO74. In the example above, setting the state to DONE would
actually switch the date like this:
** TODO Pay the rent DEADLINE: <2005-11-01 Tue +1m>
To mark a task with a repeater as DONE
, use C-- 1 C-c C-t
(i.e., org-todo
with a numeric prefix argument of -1.)
A timestamp75 will be added under the deadline, to keep a record that you actually acted on the previous instance of this deadline.
As a consequence of shifting the base date, this entry will no longer be visible in the agenda when checking past dates, but all future instances will be visible.
With the ‘+1m’ cookie, the date shift will always be exactly one month. So if you have not paid the rent for three months, marking this entry DONE will still keep it as an overdue deadline. Depending on the task, this may not be the best way to handle it. For example, if you forgot to call your father for 3 weeks, it does not make sense to call him 3 times in a single day to make up for it. Finally, there are tasks like changing batteries which should always repeat a certain time after the last time you did it. For these tasks, Org mode has special repeaters ‘++’ and ‘.+’. For example:
** TODO Call Father DEADLINE: <2008-02-10 Sun ++1w> Marking this DONE will shift the date by at least one week, but also by as many weeks as it takes to get this date into the future. However, it stays on a Sunday, even if you called and marked it done on Saturday. ** TODO Empty kitchen trash DEADLINE: <2008-02-08 Fri 20:00 ++1d> Marking this DONE will shift the date by at least one day, and also by as many days as it takes to get the timestamp into the future. Since there is a time in the timestamp, the next deadline in the future will be on today's date if you complete the task before 20:00. ** TODO Check the batteries in the smoke detectors DEADLINE: <2005-11-01 Tue .+1m> Marking this DONE will shift the date to one month after today.
You may have both scheduling and deadline information for a specific task.
If the repeater is set for the scheduling information only, you probably want
the repeater to be ignored after the deadline. If so, set the variable
org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-deadline-is-shown
to
repeated-after-deadline
. However, any scheduling information without
a repeater is no longer relevant once the task is done, and thus, removed
upon repeating the task. If you want both scheduling and deadline
information to repeat after the same interval, set the same repeater for both
timestamps.
An alternative to using a repeater is to create a number of copies of a task subtree, with dates shifted in each copy. The command C-c C-x c was created for this purpose, it is described in Structure editing.
Next: Effort estimates, Previous: Deadlines and scheduling, Up: Dates and times [Contents][Index]
Org mode allows you to clock the time you spend on specific tasks in a project. When you start working on an item, you can start the clock. When you stop working on that task, or when you mark the task done, the clock is stopped and the corresponding time interval is recorded. It also computes the total time spent on each subtree76 of a project. And it remembers a history or tasks recently clocked, so that you can jump quickly between a number of tasks absorbing your time.
To save the clock history across Emacs sessions, use
(setq org-clock-persist 'history) (org-clock-persistence-insinuate)
When you clock into a new task after resuming Emacs, the incomplete clock77 will be found (see Resolving idle time) and you will be prompted about what to do with it.
• Clocking commands: | Starting and stopping a clock | |
• The clock table: | Detailed reports | |
• Resolving idle time: | Resolving time when you’ve been idle |
Next: The clock table, Up: Clocking work time [Contents][Index]
org-clock-in
)!Start the clock on the current item (clock-in). This inserts the
CLOCK
keyword together with a timestamp. If this is not the first
clocking of this item, the multiple CLOCK
lines will be wrapped into a
:LOGBOOK:
drawer (see also the variable org-clock-into-drawer
).
You can also overrule the setting of this variable for a subtree by setting a
CLOCK_INTO_DRAWER
or LOG_INTO_DRAWER
property. When called
with a C-u prefix argument, select the task from a list of recently
clocked tasks. With two C-u C-u prefixes, clock into the task at point
and mark it as the default task; the default task will then always be
available with letter d when selecting a clocking task. With three
C-u C-u C-u prefixes, force continuous clocking by starting the clock
when the last clock stopped.
While the clock is running, the current clocking time is shown in the mode
line, along with the title of the task. The clock time shown will be all
time ever clocked for this task and its children. If the task has an effort
estimate (see Effort estimates), the mode line displays the current
clocking time against it78 If the task
is a repeating one (see Repeated tasks), only the time since the last
reset of the task 79
will be shown. More control over what time is shown can be exercised with
the CLOCK_MODELINE_TOTAL
property. It may have the values
current
to show only the current clocking instance, today
to
show all time clocked on this task today (see also the variable
org-extend-today-until
), all
to include all time, or
auto
which is the default80.
Clicking with mouse-1 onto the
mode line entry will pop up a menu with clocking options.
org-clock-out
)Stop the clock (clock-out). This inserts another timestamp at the same
location where the clock was last started. It also directly computes
the resulting time and inserts it after the time range as ‘=>
HH:MM’. See the variable org-log-note-clock-out
for the
possibility to record an additional note together with the clock-out
timestamp81.
org-clock-in-last
)Reclock the last clocked task. With one C-u prefix argument, select the task from the clock history. With two C-u prefixes, force continuous clocking by starting the clock when the last clock stopped.
org-clock-modify-effort-estimate
)org-evaluate-time-range
)Recompute the time interval after changing one of the timestamps. This is only necessary if you edit the timestamps directly. If you change them with S-cursor keys, the update is automatic.
org-clock-timestamps-up/down
)On CLOCK
log lines, increase/decrease both timestamps so that the
clock duration keeps the same.
org-timestamp-up/down
)On CLOCK
log lines, increase/decrease the timestamp at point and
the one of the previous (or the next clock) timestamp by the same duration.
For example, if you hit S-M-UP to increase a clocked-out timestamp
by five minutes, then the clocked-in timestamp of the next clock will be
increased by five minutes.
org-todo
)Changing the TODO state of an item to DONE automatically stops the clock if it is running in this same item.
org-clock-cancel
)Cancel the current clock. This is useful if a clock was started by mistake, or if you ended up working on something else.
org-clock-goto
)Jump to the headline of the currently clocked in task. With a C-u prefix arg, select the target task from a list of recently clocked tasks.
org-clock-display
)Display time summaries for each subtree in the current buffer. This puts
overlays at the end of each headline, showing the total time recorded under
that heading, including the time of any subheadings. You can use visibility
cycling to study the tree, but the overlays disappear when you change the
buffer (see variable org-remove-highlights-with-change
) or press
C-c C-c.
The l key may be used the agenda (see Weekly/daily agenda) to show which tasks have been worked on or closed during a day.
Important: note that both org-clock-out
and
org-clock-in-last
can have a global key binding and will not
modify the window disposition.
Next: Resolving idle time, Previous: Clocking commands, Up: Clocking work time [Contents][Index]
Org mode can produce quite complex reports based on the time clocking information. Such a report is called a clock table, because it is formatted as one or several Org tables.
org-clock-report
)Insert a dynamic block (see Dynamic blocks) containing a clock
report as an Org mode table into the current file. When the cursor is
at an existing clock table, just update it. When called with a prefix
argument, jump to the first clock report in the current document and
update it. The clock table always includes also trees with
:ARCHIVE:
tag.
org-dblock-update
)Update all dynamic blocks (see Dynamic blocks). This is useful if you have several clock table blocks in a buffer.
org-clocktable-try-shift
)Shift the current :block
interval and update the table. The cursor
needs to be in the #+BEGIN: clocktable
line for this command. If
:block
is today
, it will be shifted to today-1
etc.
Here is an example of the frame for a clock table as it is inserted into the buffer with the C-c C-x C-r command:
#+BEGIN: clocktable :maxlevel 2 :emphasize nil :scope file #+END: clocktable
The ‘BEGIN’ line specifies a number of options to define the scope,
structure, and formatting of the report. Defaults for all these options can
be configured in the variable org-clocktable-defaults
.
First there are options that determine which clock entries are to be selected:
:maxlevel Maximum level depth to which times are listed in the table. Clocks at deeper levels will be summed into the upper level. :scope The scope to consider. This can be any of the following: nil the current buffer or narrowed region file the full current buffer subtree the subtree where the clocktable is located treeN the surrounding level N tree, for exampletree3
tree the surrounding level 1 tree agenda all agenda files ("file"..) scan these files function the list of files returned by a function of no argument file-with-archives current file and its archives agenda-with-archives all agenda files, including archives :block The time block to consider. This block is specified either absolutely, or relative to the current time and may be any of these formats: 2007-12-31 New year eve 2007 2007-12 December 2007 2007-W50 ISO-week 50 in 2007 2007-Q2 2nd quarter in 2007 2007 the year 2007 today, yesterday, today-N a relative day thisweek, lastweek, thisweek-N a relative week thismonth, lastmonth, thismonth-N a relative month thisyear, lastyear, thisyear-N a relative year untilnow Use S-LEFT/RIGHT keys to shift the time interval. :tstart A time string specifying when to start considering times. Relative times like"<-2w>"
can also be used. See Matching tags and properties for relative time syntax. :tend A time string specifying when to stop considering times. Relative times like"<now>"
can also be used. See Matching tags and properties for relative time syntax. :wstart The starting day of the week. The default is 1 for monday. :mstart The starting day of the month. The default 1 is for the first day of the month. :stepweek
orday
, to split the table into chunks. To use this,:block
or:tstart
,:tend
are needed. :stepskip0 Do not show steps that have zero time. :fileskip0 Do not show table sections from files which did not contribute. :tags A tags match to select entries that should contribute. See Matching tags and properties for the match syntax.
Then there are options which determine the formatting of the table. These
options are interpreted by the function org-clocktable-write-default
,
but you can specify your own function using the :formatter
parameter.
:emphasize Whent
, emphasize level one and level two items. :lang Language(82) to use for descriptive cells like "Task". :link Link the item headlines in the table to their origins. :narrow An integer to limit the width of the headline column in the org table. If you write it like ‘50!’, then the headline will also be shortened in export. :indent Indent each headline field according to its level. :tcolumns Number of columns to be used for times. If this is smaller than:maxlevel
, lower levels will be lumped into one column. :level Should a level number column be included? :sort A cons cell like containing the column to sort and a sorting type. E.g.,:sort (1 . ?a)
sorts the first column alphabetically. :compact Abbreviation for:level nil :indent t :narrow 40! :tcolumns 1
All are overwritten except if there is an explicit:narrow
:timestamp A timestamp for the entry, when available. Look forSCHEDULED
,DEADLINE
,TIMESTAMP
andTIMESTAMP_IA
, in this order. :properties List of properties that should be shown in the table. Each property will get its own column. :inherit-props When this flag ist
, the values for:properties
will be inherited. :formula Content of a#+TBLFM
line to be added and evaluated. As a special case, ‘:formula %’ adds a column with % time. If you do not specify a formula here, any existing formula below the clock table will survive updates and be evaluated. :formatter A function to format clock data and insert it into the buffer.
To get a clock summary of the current level 1 tree, for the current day, you could write
#+BEGIN: clocktable :maxlevel 2 :block today :scope tree1 :link t #+END: clocktable
and to use a specific time range you could write83
#+BEGIN: clocktable :tstart "<2006-08-10 Thu 10:00>" :tend "<2006-08-10 Thu 12:00>" #+END: clocktable
A range starting a week ago and ending right now could be written as
#+BEGIN: clocktable :tstart "<-1w>" :tend "<now>" #+END: clocktable
A summary of the current subtree with % times would be
#+BEGIN: clocktable :scope subtree :link t :formula % #+END: clocktable
A horizontally compact representation of everything clocked during last week would be
#+BEGIN: clocktable :scope agenda :block lastweek :compact t #+END: clocktable
Previous: The clock table, Up: Clocking work time [Contents][Index]
If you clock in on a work item, and then walk away from your computer—perhaps to take a phone call—you often need to “resolve” the time you were away by either subtracting it from the current clock, or applying it to another one.
By customizing the variable org-clock-idle-time
to some integer, such
as 10 or 15, Emacs can alert you when you get back to your computer after
being idle for that many minutes84, and ask what you want to do with the idle time.
There will be a question waiting for you when you get back, indicating how
much idle time has passed (constantly updated with the current amount), as
well as a set of choices to correct the discrepancy:
To keep some or all of the minutes and stay clocked in, press k. Org will ask how many of the minutes to keep. Press RET to keep them all, effectively changing nothing, or enter a number to keep that many minutes.
If you use the shift key and press K, it will keep however many minutes you request and then immediately clock out of that task. If you keep all of the minutes, this is the same as just clocking out of the current task.
To keep none of the minutes, use s to subtract all the away time from the clock, and then check back in from the moment you returned.
To keep none of the minutes and just clock out at the start of the away time, use the shift key and press S. Remember that using shift will always leave you clocked out, no matter which option you choose.
To cancel the clock altogether, use C. Note that if instead of canceling you subtract the away time, and the resulting clock amount is less than a minute, the clock will still be canceled rather than clutter up the log with an empty entry.
What if you subtracted those away minutes from the current clock, and now want to apply them to a new clock? Simply clock in to any task immediately after the subtraction. Org will notice that you have subtracted time “on the books”, so to speak, and will ask if you want to apply those minutes to the next task you clock in on.
There is one other instance when this clock resolution magic occurs. Say you were clocked in and hacking away, and suddenly your cat chased a mouse who scared a hamster that crashed into your UPS’s power button! You suddenly lose all your buffers, but thanks to auto-save you still have your recent Org mode changes, including your last clock in.
If you restart Emacs and clock into any task, Org will notice that you have a dangling clock which was never clocked out from your last session. Using that clock’s starting time as the beginning of the unaccounted-for period, Org will ask how you want to resolve that time. The logic and behavior is identical to dealing with away time due to idleness; it is just happening due to a recovery event rather than a set amount of idle time.
You can also check all the files visited by your Org agenda for dangling clocks at any time using M-x org-resolve-clocks RET (or C-c C-x C-z).
You may want to start clocking from the time when you clocked out the
previous task. To enable this systematically, set org-clock-continuously
to t
. Each time you clock in, Org retrieves the clock-out time of the
last clocked entry for this session, and start the new clock from there.
If you only want this from time to time, use three universal prefix arguments
with org-clock-in
and two C-u C-u with org-clock-in-last
.
Next: Timers, Previous: Clocking work time, Up: Dates and times [Contents][Index]
If you want to plan your work in a very detailed way, or if you need to
produce offers with quotations of the estimated work effort, you may want to
assign effort estimates to entries. If you are also clocking your work, you
may later want to compare the planned effort with the actual working time,
a great way to improve planning estimates. Effort estimates are stored in
a special property EFFORT
. You can set the effort for an entry with
the following commands:
org-set-effort
)Set the effort estimate for the current entry. With a numeric prefix argument, set it to the Nth allowed value (see below). This command is also accessible from the agenda with the e key.
org-clock-modify-effort-estimate
)Modify the effort estimate of the item currently being clocked.
Clearly the best way to work with effort estimates is through column view
(see Column view). You should start by setting up discrete values for
effort estimates, and a COLUMNS
format that displays these values
together with clock sums (if you want to clock your time). For a specific
buffer you can use
#+PROPERTY: Effort_ALL 0 0:10 0:30 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00 5:00 6:00 7:00 #+COLUMNS: %40ITEM(Task) %17Effort(Estimated Effort){:} %CLOCKSUM
or, even better, you can set up these values globally by customizing the
variables org-global-properties
and org-columns-default-format
.
In particular if you want to use this setup also in the agenda, a global
setup may be advised.
The way to assign estimates to individual items is then to switch to column mode, and to use S-RIGHT and S-LEFT to change the value. The values you enter will immediately be summed up in the hierarchy. In the column next to it, any clocked time will be displayed.
If you switch to column view in the daily/weekly agenda, the effort column
will summarize the estimated work effort for each day85, and you can use this to find space in your schedule. To get
an overview of the entire part of the day that is committed, you can set the
option org-agenda-columns-add-appointments-to-effort-sum
. The
appointments on a day that take place over a specified time interval will
then also be added to the load estimate of the day.
Effort estimates can be used in secondary agenda filtering that is triggered with the / key in the agenda (see Agenda commands). If you have these estimates defined consistently, two or three key presses will narrow down the list to stuff that fits into an available time slot.
Previous: Effort estimates, Up: Dates and times [Contents][Index]
Org provides two types of timers. There is a relative timer that counts up, which can be useful when taking notes during, for example, a meeting or a video viewing. There is also a countdown timer.
The relative and countdown are started with separate commands.
org-timer-start
)Start or reset the relative timer. By default, the timer is set to 0. When called with a C-u prefix, prompt the user for a starting offset. If there is a timer string at point, this is taken as the default, providing a convenient way to restart taking notes after a break in the process. When called with a double prefix argument C-u C-u, change all timer strings in the active region by a certain amount. This can be used to fix timer strings if the timer was not started at exactly the right moment.
org-timer-set-timer
)Start a countdown timer. The user is prompted for a duration.
org-timer-default-timer
sets the default countdown value. Giving
a numeric prefix argument overrides this default value. This command is
available as ; in agenda buffers.
Once started, relative and countdown timers are controlled with the same commands.
org-timer
)Insert the value of the current relative or countdown timer into the buffer. If no timer is running, the relative timer will be started. When called with a prefix argument, the relative timer is restarted.
org-timer-item
)Insert a description list item with the value of the current relative or countdown timer. With a prefix argument, first reset the relative timer to 0.
org-insert-heading
)Once the timer list is started, you can also use M-RET to insert new timer items.
org-timer-pause-or-continue
)org-timer-stop
)Stop the timer. After this, you can only start a new timer, not continue the old one. This command also removes the timer from the mode line.
Next: Agenda views, Previous: Dates and times, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
An important part of any organization system is the ability to quickly capture new ideas and tasks, and to associate reference material with them. Org does this using a process called capture. It also can store files related to a task (attachments) in a special directory. Once in the system, tasks and projects need to be moved around. Moving completed project trees to an archive file keeps the system compact and fast.
• Capture: | Capturing new stuff | |
• Attachments: | Add files to tasks | |
• RSS feeds: | Getting input from RSS feeds | |
• Protocols: | External (e.g., Browser) access to Emacs and Org | |
• Refile and copy: | Moving/copying a tree from one place to another | |
• Archiving: | What to do with finished projects |
Next: Attachments, Up: Capture - Refile - Archive [Contents][Index]
Capture lets you quickly store notes with little interruption of your work flow. Org’s method for capturing new items is heavily inspired by John Wiegley excellent remember.el package. Up to version 6.36, Org used a special setup for remember.el, then replaced it with org-remember.el. As of version 8.0, org-remember.el has been completely replaced by org-capture.el.
If your configuration depends on org-remember.el, you need to update
it and use the setup described below. To convert your
org-remember-templates
, run the command
M-x org-capture-import-remember-templates RET
and then customize the new variable with M-x customize-variable org-capture-templates, check the result, and save the customization.
• Setting up capture: | Where notes will be stored | |
• Using capture: | Commands to invoke and terminate capture | |
• Capture templates: | Define the outline of different note types |
Next: Using capture, Up: Capture [Contents][Index]
The following customization sets a default target file for notes, and defines a global key86 for capturing new material.
(setq org-default-notes-file (concat org-directory "/notes.org")) (define-key global-map "\C-cc" 'org-capture)
Next: Capture templates, Previous: Setting up capture, Up: Capture [Contents][Index]
org-capture
)Call the command org-capture
. Note that this key binding is global and
not active by default: you need to install it. If you have templates
defined see Capture templates, it will offer these templates for
selection or use a new Org outline node as the default template. It will
insert the template into the target file and switch to an indirect buffer
narrowed to this new node. You may then insert the information you want.
org-capture-finalize
)Once you have finished entering information into the capture buffer, C-c C-c will return you to the window configuration before the capture process, so that you can resume your work without further distraction. When called with a prefix arg, finalize and then jump to the captured item.
org-capture-refile
)Finalize the capture process by refiling (see Refile and copy) the note to
a different place. Please realize that this is a normal refiling command
that will be executed—so the cursor position at the moment you run this
command is important. If you have inserted a tree with a parent and
children, first move the cursor back to the parent. Any prefix argument
given to this command will be passed on to the org-refile
command.
org-capture-kill
)Abort the capture process and return to the previous state.
You can also call org-capture
in a special way from the agenda, using
the k c key combination. With this access, any timestamps inserted by
the selected capture template will default to the cursor date in the agenda,
rather than to the current date.
To find the locations of the last stored capture, use org-capture
with
prefix commands:
Visit the target location of a capture template. You get to select the template in the usual way.
Visit the last stored capture item in its buffer.
You can also jump to the bookmark org-capture-last-stored
, which will
automatically be created unless you set org-capture-bookmark
to
nil
.
To insert the capture at point in an Org buffer, call org-capture
with
a C-0
prefix argument.
Previous: Using capture, Up: Capture [Contents][Index]
You can use templates for different types of capture items, and for different target locations. The easiest way to create such templates is through the customize interface.
Customize the variable org-capture-templates
.
Before we give the formal description of template definitions, let’s look at an example. Say you would like to use one template to create general TODO entries, and you want to put these entries under the heading ‘Tasks’ in your file ~/org/gtd.org. Also, a date tree in the file journal.org should capture journal entries. A possible configuration would look like:
(setq org-capture-templates '(("t" "Todo" entry (file+headline "~/org/gtd.org" "Tasks") "* TODO %?\n %i\n %a") ("j" "Journal" entry (file+olp+datetree "~/org/journal.org") "* %?\nEntered on %U\n %i\n %a")))
If you then press C-c c t, Org will prepare the template for you like this:
* TODO [[file:link to where you initiated capture]]
During expansion of the template, %a
has been replaced by a link to
the location from where you called the capture command. This can be
extremely useful for deriving tasks from emails, for example. You fill in
the task definition, press C-c C-c and Org returns you to the same
place where you started the capture process.
To define special keys to capture to a particular template without going through the interactive template selection, you can create your key binding like this:
(define-key global-map "\C-cx" (lambda () (interactive) (org-capture nil "x")))
• Template elements: | What is needed for a complete template entry | |
• Template expansion: | Filling in information about time and context | |
• Templates in contexts: | Only show a template in a specific context |
Next: Template expansion, Up: Capture templates [Contents][Index]
Now lets look at the elements of a template definition. Each entry in
org-capture-templates
is a list with the following items:
The keys that will select the template, as a string, characters
only, for example "a"
for a template to be selected with a
single key, or "bt"
for selection with two keys. When using
several keys, keys using the same prefix key must be sequential
in the list and preceded by a 2-element entry explaining the
prefix key, for example
("b" "Templates for marking stuff to buy")
If you do not define a template for the C key, this key will be used to open the customize buffer for this complex variable.
A short string describing the template, which will be shown during selection.
The type of entry, a symbol. Valid values are:
entry
An Org mode node, with a headline. Will be filed as the child of the target entry or as a top-level entry. The target file should be an Org mode file.
item
A plain list item, placed in the first plain list at the target location. Again the target file should be an Org file.
checkitem
A checkbox item. This only differs from the plain list item by the default template.
table-line
a new line in the first table at the target location. Where exactly the
line will be inserted depends on the properties :prepend
and
:table-line-pos
(see below).
plain
Text to be inserted as it is.
Specification of where the captured item should be placed. In Org mode
files, targets usually define a node. Entries will become children of this
node. Other types will be added to the table or list in the body of this
node. Most target specifications contain a file name. If that file name is
the empty string, it defaults to org-default-notes-file
. A file can
also be given as a variable or as a function called with no argument. When
an absolute path is not specified for a target, it is taken as relative to
org-directory
.
Valid values are:
(file "path/to/file")
Text will be placed at the beginning or end of that file.
(id "id of existing org entry")
Filing as child of this entry, or in the body of the entry.
(file+headline "path/to/file" "node headline")
Fast configuration if the target heading is unique in the file.
(file+olp "path/to/file" "Level 1 heading" "Level 2" ...)
For non-unique headings, the full path is safer.
(file+regexp "path/to/file" "regexp to find location")
Use a regular expression to position the cursor.
(file+olp+datetree "path/to/file" [ "Level 1 heading" ....])
This target87
will create a heading in a date tree88
for today’s date. If the optional outline path is given, the tree will be
built under the node it is pointing to, instead of at top level. Check out
the :time-prompt
and :tree-type
properties below for additional
options.
(file+function "path/to/file" function-finding-location)
A function to find the right location in the file.
(clock)
File to the entry that is currently being clocked.
(function function-finding-location)
Most general way: write your own function which both visits the file and moves point to the right location.
The template for creating the capture item. If you leave this empty, an
appropriate default template will be used. Otherwise this is a string with
escape codes, which will be replaced depending on time and context of the
capture call. The string with escapes may be loaded from a template file,
using the special syntax (file "path/to/template")
. See below for
more details.
The rest of the entry is a property list of additional options. Recognized properties are:
:prepend
Normally new captured information will be appended at the target location (last child, last table line, last list item...). Setting this property will change that.
:immediate-finish
When set, do not offer to edit the information, just file it away immediately. This makes sense if the template only needs information that can be added automatically.
:empty-lines
Set this to the number of lines to insert before and after the new item. Default 0, only common other value is 1.
:clock-in
Start the clock in this item.
:clock-keep
Keep the clock running when filing the captured entry.
:clock-resume
If starting the capture interrupted a clock, restart that clock when finished
with the capture. Note that :clock-keep
has precedence over
:clock-resume
. When setting both to t
, the current clock will
run and the previous one will not be resumed.
:time-prompt
Prompt for a date/time to be used for date/week trees and when filling the
template. Without this property, capture uses the current date and time.
Even if this property has not been set, you can force the same behavior by
calling org-capture
with a C-1 prefix argument.
:tree-type
When ‘week’, make a week tree instead of the month tree, i.e. place the headings for each day under a heading with the current iso week.
:unnarrowed
Do not narrow the target buffer, simply show the full buffer. Default is to narrow it so that you only see the new material.
:table-line-pos
Specification of the location in the table where the new line should be
inserted. It can be a string, a variable holding a string or a function
returning a string. The string should look like "II-3"
meaning that
the new line should become the third line before the second horizontal
separator line.
:kill-buffer
If the target file was not yet visited when capture was invoked, kill the buffer again after capture is completed.
Next: Templates in contexts, Previous: Template elements, Up: Capture templates [Contents][Index]
In the template itself, special %-escapes89 allow dynamic insertion of content. The templates are expanded in the order given here:
%[file] Insert the contents of the file given by file. %(sexp) Evaluate Elisp sexp and replace with the result. For convenience, %:keyword (see below) placeholders within the expression will be expanded prior to this. The sexp must return a string. %<...> The result of format-time-string on the ... format specification. %t Timestamp, date only. %T Timestamp, with date and time. %u, %U Like the above, but inactive timestamps. %i Initial content, the region when capture is called while the region is active. The entire text will be indented like%i
itself. %a Annotation, normally the link created withorg-store-link
. %A Like%a
, but prompt for the description part. %l Like %a, but only insert the literal link. %c Current kill ring head. %x Content of the X clipboard. %k Title of the currently clocked task. %K Link to the currently clocked task. %n User name (taken fromuser-full-name
). %f File visited by current buffer when org-capture was called. %F Full path of the file or directory visited by current buffer. %:keyword Specific information for certain link types, see below. %^g Prompt for tags, with completion on tags in target file. %^G Prompt for tags, with completion all tags in all agenda files. %^t Like%t
, but prompt for date. Similarly%^T
,%^u
,%^U
. You may define a prompt like%^{Birthday}t
. %^C Interactive selection of which kill or clip to use. %^L Like%^C
, but insert as link. %^{prop}p Prompt the user for a value for property prop. %^{prompt} prompt the user for a string and replace this sequence with it. You may specify a default value and a completion table with %^{prompt|default|completion2|completion3...}. The arrow keys access a prompt-specific history. %\1 … %\N Insert the text entered at the Nth %^{prompt}, whereN
is a number, starting from 1.(90) %? After completing the template, position cursor here.
For specific link types, the following keywords will be defined91:
Link type | Available keywords ---------------------------------+---------------------------------------------- bbdb | %:name %:company irc | %:server %:port %:nick vm, vm-imap, wl, mh, mew, rmail, | %:type %:subject %:message-id gnus, notmuch | %:from %:fromname %:fromaddress | %:to %:toname %:toaddress | %:date (message date header field) | %:date-timestamp (date as active timestamp) | %:date-timestamp-inactive (date as inactive timestamp) | %:fromto (either "to NAME" or "from NAME")(92) gnus | %:group, for messages also all email fields eww, w3, w3m | %:url info | %:file %:node calendar | %:date org-protocol | %:link %:description %:annotation
To place the cursor after template expansion use:
%? After completing the template, position cursor here.
Previous: Template expansion, Up: Capture templates [Contents][Index]
To control whether a capture template should be accessible from a specific
context, you can customize org-capture-templates-contexts
. Let’s say
for example that you have a capture template "p"
for storing Gnus
emails containing patches. Then you would configure this option like this:
(setq org-capture-templates-contexts '(("p" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))
You can also tell that the command key "p"
should refer to another
template. In that case, add this command key like this:
(setq org-capture-templates-contexts '(("p" "q" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))
See the docstring of the variable for more information.
Next: RSS feeds, Previous: Capture, Up: Capture - Refile - Archive [Contents][Index]
It is often useful to associate reference material with an outline node/task.
Small chunks of plain text can simply be stored in the subtree of a project.
Hyperlinks (see Hyperlinks) can establish associations with
files that live elsewhere on your computer or in the cloud, like emails or
source code files belonging to a project. Another method is attachments,
which are files located in a directory belonging to an outline node. Org
uses directories named by the unique ID of each entry. These directories are
located in the data directory which lives in the same directory where
your Org file lives93. If you initialize this directory with
git init
, Org will automatically commit changes when it sees them.
The attachment system has been contributed to Org by John Wiegley.
In cases where it seems better to do so, you can also attach a directory of your choice to an entry. You can also make children inherit the attachment directory from a parent, so that an entire subtree uses the same attached directory.
The following commands deal with attachments:
org-attach
)The dispatcher for commands related to the attachment system. After these keys, a list of commands is displayed and you must press an additional key to select a command:
org-attach-attach
)Select a file and move it into the task’s attachment directory. The file
will be copied, moved, or linked, depending on org-attach-method
.
Note that hard links are not supported on all systems.
Attach a file using the copy/move/link method. Note that hard links are not supported on all systems.
org-attach-url
)Attach a file from URL
org-attach-new
)Create a new attachment as an Emacs buffer.
org-attach-sync
)Synchronize the current task with its attachment directory, in case you added attachments yourself.
org-attach-open
)Open current task’s attachment. If there is more than one, prompt for a
file name first. Opening will follow the rules set by org-file-apps
.
For more details, see the information on following hyperlinks
(see Handling links).
org-attach-open-in-emacs
)Also open the attachment, but force opening the file in Emacs.
org-attach-reveal
)Open the current task’s attachment directory.
org-attach-reveal-in-emacs
)Also open the directory, but force using dired
in Emacs.
org-attach-delete-one
)Select and delete a single attachment.
org-attach-delete-all
)Delete all of a task’s attachments. A safer way is to open the directory in
dired
and delete from there.
org-attach-set-directory
)Set a specific directory as the entry’s attachment directory. This works by
putting the directory path into the ATTACH_DIR
property.
org-attach-set-inherit
)Set the ATTACH_DIR_INHERIT
property, so that children will use the
same directory for attachments as the parent does.
Next: Protocols, Previous: Attachments, Up: Capture - Refile - Archive [Contents][Index]
Org can add and change entries based on information found in RSS feeds and
Atom feeds. You could use this to make a task out of each new podcast in a
podcast feed. Or you could use a phone-based note-creating service on the
web to import tasks into Org. To access feeds, configure the variable
org-feed-alist
. The docstring of this variable has detailed
information. Here is just an example:
(setq org-feed-alist '(("Slashdot" "http://rss.slashdot.org/Slashdot/slashdot" "~/txt/org/feeds.org" "Slashdot Entries")))
will configure that new items from the feed provided by
rss.slashdot.org
will result in new entries in the file
~/org/feeds.org under the heading ‘Slashdot Entries’, whenever
the following command is used:
org-feed-update-all
)Collect items from the feeds configured in org-feed-alist
and act upon
them.
org-feed-goto-inbox
)Prompt for a feed name and go to the inbox configured for this feed.
Under the same headline, Org will create a drawer ‘FEEDSTATUS’ in which it will store information about the status of items in the feed, to avoid adding the same item several times.
For more information, including how to read atom feeds, see
org-feed.el and the docstring of org-feed-alist
.
Next: Refile and copy, Previous: RSS feeds, Up: Capture - Refile - Archive [Contents][Index]
Org protocol is a mean to trigger custom actions in Emacs from external applications. Any application that supports calling external programs with an URL as argument may be used with this functionality. For example, you can configure bookmarks in your web browser to send a link to the current page to Org and create a note from it using capture (see Capture). You can also create a bookmark that tells Emacs to open the local source file of a remote website you are browsing.
In order to use Org protocol from an application, you need to register
‘org-protocol://’ as a valid scheme-handler. External calls are passed
to Emacs through the emacsclient
command, so you also need to ensure
an Emacs server is running. More precisely, when the application calls
emacsclient org-protocol://PROTOCOL?key1=val1&key2=val2
Emacs calls the handler associated to ‘PROTOCOL’ with argument ‘(:key1 val1 :key2 val2)’.
Org protocol comes with three predefined protocols, detailed in the following
sections. Configure org-protocol-protocol-alist
to define your own.
• store-link protocol: | Store a link, push URL to kill-ring. | |
• capture protocol: | Fill a buffer with external information. | |
• open-source protocol: | Edit published contents. |
Next: capture
protocol, Up: Protocols [Contents][Index]
store-link
protocolUsing store-link
handler, you can copy links, insertable through
M-x org-insert-link or yanking thereafter. More precisely, the command
emacsclient org-protocol://store-link?url=URL&title=TITLE
stores the following link:
[[URL][TITLE]]
In addition, ‘URL’ is pushed on the kill-ring for yanking. You need to encode ‘URL’ and ‘TITLE’ if they contain slashes, and probably quote those for the shell.
To use this feature from a browser, add a bookmark with an arbitrary name, e.g., ‘Org: store-link’ and enter this as Location:
javascript:location.href='org-protocol://store-link?url='+ encodeURIComponent(location.href);
Next: open-source
protocol, Previous: store-link
protocol, Up: Protocols [Contents][Index]
capture
protocolActivating capture
handler pops up a ‘Capture’ buffer and fills
the capture template associated to the ‘X’ key with them.
emacsclient org-protocol://capture?template=X?url=URL?title=TITLE?body=BODY
To use this feature, add a bookmark with an arbitrary name, e.g. ‘Org: capture’ and enter this as ‘Location’:
javascript:location.href='org-protocol://capture?template=x'+ '&url='+encodeURIComponent(window.location.href)+ '&title='+encodeURIComponent(document.title)+ '&body='+encodeURIComponent(window.getSelection());
The result depends on the capture template used, which is set in the bookmark
itself, as in the example above, or in
org-protocol-default-template-key
.
The following template placeholders are available:
%:link The URL %:description The webpage title %:annotation Equivalent to [[%:link][%:description]] %i The selected text
Previous: capture
protocol, Up: Protocols [Contents][Index]
open-source
protocolThe open-source
handler is designed to help with editing local sources
when reading a document. To that effect, you can use a bookmark with the
following location:
javascript:location.href='org-protocol://open-source?&url='+ encodeURIComponent(location.href)
The variable org-protocol-project-alist
maps URLs to local file names,
by stripping URL parameters from the end and replacing the :base-url
with :working-directory
and :online-suffix
with
:working-suffix
. For example, assuming you own a local copy of
https://orgmode.org/worg/ contents at /home/user/worg, you can
set org-protocol-project-alist
to the following
(setq org-protocol-project-alist '(("Worg" :base-url "https://orgmode.org/worg/" :working-directory "/home/user/worg/" :online-suffix ".html" :working-suffix ".org")))
If you are now browsing https://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/org-protocol.html and find a typo or have an idea about how to enhance the documentation, simply click the bookmark and start editing.
However, such mapping may not yield the desired results. Suppose you
maintain an online store located at http://example.com/. The local
sources reside in /home/user/example/. It is common practice to serve
all products in such a store through one file and rewrite URLs that do not
match an existing file on the server. That way, a request to
http://example.com/print/posters.html might be rewritten on the server
to something like
http://example.com/shop/products.php/posters.html.php. The
open-source
handler probably cannot find a file named
/home/user/example/print/posters.html.php and fails.
Such an entry in org-protocol-project-alist
may hold an additional
property :rewrites
. This property is a list of cons cells, each of
which maps a regular expression to a path relative to the
:working-directory
.
Now map the URL to the path /home/user/example/products.php by adding
:rewrites
rules like this:
(setq org-protocol-project-alist '(("example.com" :base-url "http://example.com/" :working-directory "/home/user/example/" :online-suffix ".php" :working-suffix ".php" :rewrites (("example.com/print/" . "products.php") ("example.com/$" . "index.php")))))
Since ‘example.com/$’ is used as a regular expression, it maps http://example.com/, https://example.com, http://www.example.com/ and similar to /home/user/example/index.php.
The :rewrites
rules are searched as a last resort if and only if no
existing file name is matched.
Two functions can help you filling org-protocol-project-alist
with
valid contents: org-protocol-create
and
org-protocol-create-for-org
. The latter is of use if you’re editing
an Org file that is part of a publishing project.
Next: Archiving, Previous: Protocols, Up: Capture - Refile - Archive [Contents][Index]
When reviewing the captured data, you may want to refile or to copy some of the entries into a different list, for example into a project. Cutting, finding the right location, and then pasting the note is cumbersome. To simplify this process, you can use the following special command:
org-copy
)Copying works like refiling, except that the original note is not deleted.
org-refile
)Refile the entry or region at point. This command offers possible locations
for refiling the entry and lets you select one with completion. The item (or
all items in the region) is filed below the target heading as a subitem.
Depending on org-reverse-note-order
, it will be either the first or
last subitem.
By default, all level 1 headlines in the current buffer are considered to be
targets, but you can have more complex definitions across a number of files.
See the variable org-refile-targets
for details. If you would like to
select a location via a file-path-like completion along the outline path, see
the variables org-refile-use-outline-path
and
org-outline-path-complete-in-steps
. If you would like to be able to
create new nodes as new parents for refiling on the fly, check the
variable org-refile-allow-creating-parent-nodes
.
When the variable org-log-refile
94 is set, a timestamp or a note will be
recorded when an entry has been refiled.
org-refile-goto-last-stored
)Jump to the location where org-refile
last moved a tree to.
Refile as the child of the item currently being clocked.
Refile and keep the entry in place. Also see org-refile-keep
to make
this the default behavior, and beware that this may result in duplicated
ID
properties.
org-refile-cache-clear
)Clear the target cache. Caching of refile targets can be turned on by
setting org-refile-use-cache
. To make the command see new possible
targets, you have to clear the cache with this command.
Previous: Refile and copy, Up: Capture - Refile - Archive [Contents][Index]
When a project represented by a (sub)tree is finished, you may want to move the tree out of the way and to stop it from contributing to the agenda. Archiving is important to keep your working files compact and global searches like the construction of agenda views fast.
org-archive-subtree-default
)Archive the current entry using the command specified in the variable
org-archive-default-command
.
• Moving subtrees: | Moving a tree to an archive file | |
• Internal archiving: | Switch off a tree but keep it in the file |
Next: Internal archiving, Up: Archiving [Contents][Index]
The most common archiving action is to move a project tree to another file, the archive file.
org-archive-subtree
)Archive the subtree starting at the cursor position to the location
given by org-archive-location
.
Check if any direct children of the current headline could be moved to the archive. To do this, each subtree is checked for open TODO entries. If none are found, the command offers to move it to the archive location. If the cursor is not on a headline when this command is invoked, the level 1 trees will be checked.
As above, but check subtree for timestamps instead of TODO entries. The command will offer to archive the subtree if it does contain a timestamp, and that timestamp is in the past.
The default archive location is a file in the same directory as the
current file, with the name derived by appending _archive to the
current file name. You can also choose what heading to file archived
items under, with the possibility to add them to a datetree in a file.
For information and examples on how to specify the file and the heading,
see the documentation string of the variable
org-archive-location
.
There is also an in-buffer option for setting this variable, for example:
#+ARCHIVE: %s_done::
If you would like to have a special ARCHIVE location for a single entry
or a (sub)tree, give the entry an :ARCHIVE:
property with the
location as the value (see Properties and columns).
When a subtree is moved, it receives a number of special properties that
record context information like the file from where the entry came, its
outline path the archiving time etc. Configure the variable
org-archive-save-context-info
to adjust the amount of information
added.
Previous: Moving subtrees, Up: Archiving [Contents][Index]
If you want to just switch off—for agenda views—certain subtrees without moving them to a different file, you can use the archive tag.
A headline that is marked with the ‘:ARCHIVE:’ tag (see Tags) stays at its location in the outline tree, but behaves in the following way:
org-cycle-open-archived-trees
. Also normal outline commands like
show-all
will open archived subtrees.
org-sparse-tree-open-archived-trees
.
org-agenda-skip-archived-trees
, in which case these trees will always
be included. In the agenda you can press v a to get archives
temporarily included.
org-export-with-archived-trees
.
org-columns-skip-archived-trees
is configured to nil
.
The following commands help manage the ARCHIVE tag:
org-toggle-archive-tag
)Toggle the ARCHIVE tag for the current headline. When the tag is set, the headline changes to a shadowed face, and the subtree below it is hidden.
Check if any direct children of the current headline should be archived. To do this, each subtree is checked for open TODO entries. If none are found, the command offers to set the ARCHIVE tag for the child. If the cursor is not on a headline when this command is invoked, the level 1 trees will be checked.
org-force-cycle-archived
)org-archive-to-archive-sibling
)Move the current entry to the Archive Sibling. This is a sibling of the entry with the heading ‘Archive’ and the tag ‘ARCHIVE’. The entry becomes a child of that sibling and in this way retains a lot of its original context, including inherited tags and approximate position in the outline.
Next: Markup, Previous: Capture - Refile - Archive, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Due to the way Org works, TODO items, time-stamped items, and tagged headlines can be scattered throughout a file or even a number of files. To get an overview of open action items, or of events that are important for a particular date, this information must be collected, sorted and displayed in an organized way.
Org can select items based on various criteria and display them in a separate buffer. Six different view types are provided:
The extracted information is displayed in a special agenda buffer. This buffer is read-only, but provides commands to visit the corresponding locations in the original Org files, and even to edit these files remotely.
By default, the report ignores commented (see Comment lines) and archived
(see Internal archiving) entries. You can override this by setting
org-agenda-skip-comment-trees
and
org-agenda-skip-archived-trees
to nil
.
Two variables control how the agenda buffer is displayed and whether the
window configuration is restored when the agenda exits:
org-agenda-window-setup
and
org-agenda-restore-windows-after-quit
.
• Agenda files: | Files being searched for agenda information | |
• Agenda dispatcher: | Keyboard access to agenda views | |
• Built-in agenda views: | What is available out of the box? | |
• Presentation and sorting: | How agenda items are prepared for display | |
• Agenda commands: | Remote editing of Org trees | |
• Custom agenda views: | Defining special searches and views | |
• Exporting agenda views: | Writing a view to a file | |
• Agenda column view: | Using column view for collected entries |
Next: Agenda dispatcher, Up: Agenda views [Contents][Index]
The information to be shown is normally collected from all agenda
files, the files listed in the variable
org-agenda-files
95. If a directory is part of this list,
all files with the extension .org in this directory will be part
of the list.
Thus, even if you only work with a single Org file, that file should
be put into the list96. You can customize org-agenda-files
, but
the easiest way to maintain it is through the following commands
org-agenda-file-to-front
)Add current file to the list of agenda files. The file is added to the front of the list. If it was already in the list, it is moved to the front. With a prefix argument, file is added/moved to the end.
org-remove-file
)org-cycle-agenda-files
)Cycle through agenda file list, visiting one file after the other.
Command to use an iswitchb
-like interface to switch to and between Org
buffers.
The Org menu contains the current list of files and can be used to visit any of them.
If you would like to focus the agenda temporarily on a file not in this list, or on just one file in the list, or even on only a subtree in a file, then this can be done in different ways. For a single agenda command, you may press < once or several times in the dispatcher (see Agenda dispatcher). To restrict the agenda scope for an extended period, use the following commands:
org-agenda-set-restriction-lock
)Permanently restrict the agenda to the current subtree. When with a prefix argument, or with the cursor before the first headline in a file, the agenda scope is set to the entire file. This restriction remains in effect until removed with C-c C-x >, or by typing either < or > in the agenda dispatcher. If there is a window displaying an agenda view, the new restriction takes effect immediately.
org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock
)Remove the permanent restriction created by C-c C-x <.
When working with speedbar.el, you can use the following commands in the Speedbar frame:
org-speedbar-set-agenda-restriction
)Permanently restrict the agenda to the item—either an Org file or a subtree in such a file—at the cursor in the Speedbar frame. If there is a window displaying an agenda view, the new restriction takes effect immediately.
org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock
)Lift the restriction.
Next: Built-in agenda views, Previous: Agenda files, Up: Agenda views [Contents][Index]
The views are created through a dispatcher, which should be bound to a global key—for example C-c a (see Activation). In the following we will assume that C-c a is indeed how the dispatcher is accessed and list keyboard access to commands accordingly. After pressing C-c a, an additional letter is required to execute a command. The dispatcher offers the following default commands:
Create the calendar-like agenda (see Weekly/daily agenda).
Create a list of all TODO items (see Global TODO list).
Create a list of headlines matching a TAGS expression (see Matching tags and properties).
Create a list of entries selected by a boolean expression of keywords and/or regular expressions that must or must not occur in the entry.
Search for a regular expression in all agenda files and additionally in
the files listed in org-agenda-text-search-extra-files
. This
uses the Emacs command multi-occur
. A prefix argument can be
used to specify the number of context lines for each match, default is
1.
Create a list of stuck projects (see Stuck projects).
Restrict an agenda command to the current buffer97. After pressing <, you still need to press the character selecting the command.
If there is an active region, restrict the following agenda command to the region. Otherwise, restrict it to the current subtree98. After pressing < <, you still need to press the character selecting the command.
Toggle sticky agenda views. By default, Org maintains only a single agenda
buffer and rebuilds it each time you change the view, to make sure everything
is always up to date. If you often switch between agenda views and the build
time bothers you, you can turn on sticky agenda buffers or make this the
default by customizing the variable org-agenda-sticky
. With sticky
agendas, the agenda dispatcher will not recreate agenda views from scratch,
it will only switch to the selected one, and you need to update the agenda by
hand with r or g when needed. You can toggle sticky agenda view
any time with org-toggle-sticky-agenda
.
You can also define custom commands that will be accessible through the dispatcher, just like the default commands. This includes the possibility to create extended agenda buffers that contain several blocks together, for example the weekly agenda, the global TODO list and a number of special tags matches. See Custom agenda views.
Next: Presentation and sorting, Previous: Agenda dispatcher, Up: Agenda views [Contents][Index]
In this section we describe the built-in views.
• Weekly/daily agenda: | The calendar page with current tasks | |
• Global TODO list: | All unfinished action items | |
• Matching tags and properties: | Structured information with fine-tuned search | |
• Search view: | Find entries by searching for text | |
• Stuck projects: | Find projects you need to review |
Next: Global TODO list, Up: Built-in agenda views [Contents][Index]
The purpose of the weekly/daily agenda is to act like a page of a paper agenda, showing all the tasks for the current week or day.
org-agenda-list
)Compile an agenda for the current week from a list of Org files. The agenda shows the entries for each day. With a numeric prefix99 (like C-u 2 1 C-c a a) you may set the number of days to be displayed.
The default number of days displayed in the agenda is set by the variable
org-agenda-span
(or the obsolete org-agenda-ndays
). This
variable can be set to any number of days you want to see by default in the
agenda, or to a span name, such as day
, week
, month
or
year
. For weekly agendas, the default is to start on the previous
monday (see org-agenda-start-on-weekday
). You can also set the start
date using a date shift: (setq org-agenda-start-day "+10d")
will
start the agenda ten days from today in the future.
Remote editing from the agenda buffer means, for example, that you can change the dates of deadlines and appointments from the agenda buffer. The commands available in the Agenda buffer are listed in Agenda commands.
Emacs contains the calendar and diary by Edward M. Reingold. The calendar displays a three-month calendar with holidays from different countries and cultures. The diary allows you to keep track of anniversaries, lunar phases, sunrise/set, recurrent appointments (weekly, monthly) and more. In this way, it is quite complementary to Org. It can be very useful to combine output from Org with the diary.
In order to include entries from the Emacs diary into Org mode’s agenda, you only need to customize the variable
(setq org-agenda-include-diary t)
After that, everything will happen automatically. All diary entries including holidays, anniversaries, etc., will be included in the agenda buffer created by Org mode. SPC, TAB, and RET can be used from the agenda buffer to jump to the diary file in order to edit existing diary entries. The i command to insert new entries for the current date works in the agenda buffer, as well as the commands S, M, and C to display Sunrise/Sunset times, show lunar phases and to convert to other calendars, respectively. c can be used to switch back and forth between calendar and agenda.
If you are using the diary only for sexp entries and holidays, it is faster to not use the above setting, but instead to copy or even move the entries into an Org file. Org mode evaluates diary-style sexp entries, and does it faster because there is no overhead for first creating the diary display. Note that the sexp entries must start at the left margin, no whitespace is allowed before them. For example, the following segment of an Org file will be processed and entries will be made in the agenda:
* Holidays :PROPERTIES: :CATEGORY: Holiday :END: %%(org-calendar-holiday) ; special function for holiday names * Birthdays :PROPERTIES: :CATEGORY: Ann :END: %%(org-anniversary 1956 5 14)(100) Arthur Dent is %d years old %%(org-anniversary 1869 10 2) Mahatma Gandhi would be %d years old
If you are using the Big Brothers Database to store your contacts, you will very likely prefer to store anniversaries in BBDB rather than in a separate Org or diary file. Org supports this and will show BBDB anniversaries as part of the agenda. All you need to do is to add the following to one of your agenda files:
* Anniversaries :PROPERTIES: :CATEGORY: Anniv :END: %%(org-bbdb-anniversaries)
You can then go ahead and define anniversaries for a BBDB record. Basically,
you need to press C-o anniversary RET with the cursor in a BBDB
record and then add the date in the format YYYY-MM-DD
or MM-DD
,
followed by a space and the class of the anniversary (‘birthday’ or
‘wedding’, or a format string). If you omit the class, it will default to
‘birthday’. Here are a few examples, the header for the file
org-bbdb.el contains more detailed information.
1973-06-22 06-22 1955-08-02 wedding 2008-04-14 %s released version 6.01 of org mode, %d years ago
After a change to BBDB, or for the first agenda display during an Emacs session, the agenda display will suffer a short delay as Org updates its hash with anniversaries. However, from then on things will be very fast—much faster in fact than a long list of ‘%%(diary-anniversary)’ entries in an Org or Diary file.
If you would like to see upcoming anniversaries with a bit of forewarning, you can use the following instead:
* Anniversaries :PROPERTIES: :CATEGORY: Anniv :END: %%(org-bbdb-anniversaries-future 3)
That will give you three days’ warning: on the anniversary date itself and the two days prior. The argument is optional: if omitted, it defaults to 7.
Org can interact with Emacs appointments notification facility. To add the
appointments of your agenda files, use the command org-agenda-to-appt
.
This command lets you filter through the list of your appointments and add
only those belonging to a specific category or matching a regular expression.
It also reads a APPT_WARNTIME
property which will then override the
value of appt-message-warning-time
for this appointment. See the
docstring for details.
Next: Matching tags and properties, Previous: Weekly/daily agenda, Up: Built-in agenda views [Contents][Index]
The global TODO list contains all unfinished TODO items formatted and collected into a single place.
org-todo-list
)Show the global TODO list. This collects the TODO items from all agenda
files (see Agenda views) into a single buffer. By default, this lists
items with a state the is not a DONE state. The buffer is in
agenda-mode
, so there are commands to examine and manipulate the TODO
entries directly from that buffer (see Agenda commands).
org-todo-list
)Like the above, but allows selection of a specific TODO keyword. You can
also do this by specifying a prefix argument to C-c a t. You are
prompted for a keyword, and you may also specify several keywords by
separating them with ‘|’ as the boolean OR operator. With a numeric
prefix, the Nth keyword in org-todo-keywords
is selected.
The r key in the agenda buffer regenerates it, and you can give
a prefix argument to this command to change the selected TODO keyword,
for example 3 r. If you often need a search for a specific
keyword, define a custom command for it (see Agenda dispatcher).
Matching specific TODO keywords can also be done as part of a tags
search (see Tag searches).
Remote editing of TODO items means that you can change the state of a TODO entry with a single key press. The commands available in the TODO list are described in Agenda commands.
Normally the global TODO list simply shows all headlines with TODO keywords. This list can become very long. There are two ways to keep it more compact:
org-agenda-todo-ignore-scheduled
,
org-agenda-todo-ignore-deadlines
,
org-agenda-todo-ignore-timestamp
and/or
org-agenda-todo-ignore-with-date
to exclude such items from the global
TODO list.
org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels
to get this behavior.
Next: Search view, Previous: Global TODO list, Up: Built-in agenda views [Contents][Index]
If headlines in the agenda files are marked with tags (see Tags), or have properties (see Properties and columns), you can select headlines based on this metadata and collect them into an agenda buffer. The match syntax described here also applies when creating sparse trees with C-c / m.
org-tags-view
)Produce a list of all headlines that match a given set of tags. The command prompts for a selection criterion, which is a boolean logic expression with tags, like ‘+work+urgent-withboss’ or ‘work|home’ (see Tags). If you often need a specific search, define a custom command for it (see Agenda dispatcher).
org-tags-view
)Like C-c a m, but only select headlines that are also TODO items in a
not-DONE state and force checking subitems (see variable
org-tags-match-list-sublevels
). To exclude scheduled/deadline items,
see the variable org-agenda-tags-todo-honor-ignore-options
. Matching
specific TODO keywords together with a tags match is also possible, see
Tag searches.
The commands available in the tags list are described in Agenda commands.
A search string can use Boolean operators ‘&’ for AND
and
‘|’ for OR
. ‘&’ binds more strongly than ‘|’.
Parentheses are not implemented. Each element in the search is either a
tag, a regular expression matching tags, or an expression like
PROPERTY OPERATOR VALUE
with a comparison operator, accessing a
property value. Each element may be preceded by ‘-’, to select
against it, and ‘+’ is syntactic sugar for positive selection. The
AND
operator ‘&’ is optional when ‘+’ or ‘-’ is
present. Here are some examples, using only tags.
Select headlines tagged ‘:work:’.
Select headlines tagged ‘:work:’ and ‘:boss:’.
Select headlines tagged ‘:work:’, but discard those also tagged ‘:boss:’.
Selects lines tagged ‘:work:’ or ‘:laptop:’.
Like before, but require the ‘:laptop:’ lines to be tagged also ‘:night:’.
Instead of a tag, you may also specify a regular expression enclosed in curly braces. For example, ‘work+{^boss.*}’ matches headlines that contain the tag ‘:work:’ and any tag starting with ‘boss’.
Group tags (see Tag hierarchy) are expanded as regular expressions. E.g., if ‘:work:’ is a group tag for the group ‘:work:lab:conf:’, then searching for ‘work’ will search for ‘{\(?:work\|lab\|conf\)}’ and searching for ‘-work’ will search for all headlines but those with one of the tags in the group (i.e., ‘-{\(?:work\|lab\|conf\)}’).
You may also test for properties (see Properties and columns) at the same
time as matching tags. The properties may be real properties, or special
properties that represent other metadata (see Special properties). For
example, the “property” TODO
represents the TODO keyword of the
entry and the “property” PRIORITY
represents the PRIORITY keyword of
the entry.
In addition to the properties mentioned above, LEVEL
represents the
level of an entry. So a search ‘+LEVEL=3+boss-TODO="DONE"’ lists all
level three headlines that have the tag ‘boss’ and are not marked
with the TODO keyword DONE. In buffers with org-odd-levels-only
set,
‘LEVEL’ does not count the number of stars, but ‘LEVEL=2’ will
correspond to 3 stars etc.
Here are more examples:
Select ‘:work:’-tagged TODO lines with the specific TODO keyword ‘WAITING’.
Waiting tasks both at work and at home.
When matching properties, a number of different operators can be used to test the value of a property. Here is a complex example:
+work-boss+PRIORITY="A"+Coffee="unlimited"+Effort<2 \ +With={Sarah\|Denny}+SCHEDULED>="<2008-10-11>"
The type of comparison will depend on how the comparison value is written:
"<now>"
for now (including time), and "<today>"
, and
"<tomorrow>"
for these days at 00:00 hours, i.e., without a time
specification. Also strings like "<+5d>"
or "<-2m>"
with units
d
, w
, m
, and y
for day, week, month, and year,
respectively, can be used.
So the search string in the example finds entries tagged ‘:work:’ but not ‘:boss:’, which also have a priority value ‘A’, a ‘:Coffee:’ property with the value ‘unlimited’, an ‘Effort’ property that is numerically smaller than 2, a ‘:With:’ property that is matched by the regular expression ‘Sarah\|Denny’, and that are scheduled on or after October 11, 2008.
You can configure Org mode to use property inheritance during a search, but beware that this can slow down searches considerably. See Property inheritance, for details.
For backward compatibility, and also for typing speed, there is also a different way to test TODO states in a search. For this, terminate the tags/property part of the search string (which may include several terms connected with ‘|’) with a ‘/’ and then specify a Boolean expression just for TODO keywords. The syntax is then similar to that for tags, but should be applied with care: for example, a positive selection on several TODO keywords cannot meaningfully be combined with boolean AND. However, negative selection combined with AND can be meaningful. To make sure that only lines are checked that actually have any TODO keyword (resulting in a speed-up), use C-c a M, or equivalently start the TODO part after the slash with ‘!’. Using C-c a M or ‘/!’ will not match TODO keywords in a DONE state. Examples:
Same as ‘work+TODO="WAITING"’
Select ‘:work:’-tagged TODO lines that are neither ‘WAITING’ nor ‘NEXT’
Select ‘:work:’-tagged TODO lines that are either ‘WAITING’ or ‘NEXT’.
Next: Stuck projects, Previous: Matching tags and properties, Up: Built-in agenda views [Contents][Index]
This agenda view is a general text search facility for Org mode entries. It is particularly useful to find notes.
org-search-view
)This is a special search that lets you select entries by matching a substring or specific words using a boolean logic.
For example, the search string ‘computer equipment’ will find entries
that contain ‘computer equipment’ as a substring. If the two words are
separated by more space or a line break, the search will still match.
Search view can also search for specific keywords in the entry, using Boolean
logic. The search string ‘+computer +wifi -ethernet -{8\.11[bg]}’
will search for note entries that contain the keywords computer
and wifi
, but not the keyword ethernet
, and which are also
not matched by the regular expression 8\.11[bg]
, meaning to
exclude both 8.11b and 8.11g. The first ‘+’ is necessary to turn on
word search, other ‘+’ characters are optional. For more details, see
the docstring of the command org-search-view
.
Note that in addition to the agenda files, this command will also search
the files listed in org-agenda-text-search-extra-files
.
Previous: Search view, Up: Built-in agenda views [Contents][Index]
If you are following a system like David Allen’s GTD to organize your work, one of the “duties” you have is a regular review to make sure that all projects move along. A stuck project is a project that has no defined next actions, so it will never show up in the TODO lists Org mode produces. During the review, you need to identify such projects and define next actions for them.
org-agenda-list-stuck-projects
)Customize the variable org-stuck-projects
to define what a stuck
project is and how to find it.
You almost certainly will have to configure this view before it will work for you. The built-in default assumes that all your projects are level-2 headlines, and that a project is not stuck if it has at least one entry marked with a TODO keyword TODO or NEXT or NEXTACTION.
Let’s assume that you, in your own way of using Org mode, identify projects with a tag PROJECT, and that you use a TODO keyword MAYBE to indicate a project that should not be considered yet. Let’s further assume that the TODO keyword DONE marks finished projects, and that NEXT and TODO indicate next actions. The tag @SHOP indicates shopping and is a next action even without the NEXT tag. Finally, if the project contains the special word IGNORE anywhere, it should not be listed either. In this case you would start by identifying eligible projects with a tags/todo match101 ‘+PROJECT/-MAYBE-DONE’, and then check for TODO, NEXT, @SHOP, and IGNORE in the subtree to identify projects that are not stuck. The correct customization for this is
(setq org-stuck-projects '("+PROJECT/-MAYBE-DONE" ("NEXT" "TODO") ("@SHOP") "\\<IGNORE\\>"))
Note that if a project is identified as non-stuck, the subtree of this entry will still be searched for stuck projects.
Next: Agenda commands, Previous: Built-in agenda views, Up: Agenda views [Contents][Index]
Before displaying items in an agenda view, Org mode visually prepares the
items and sorts them. Each item occupies a single line. The line starts
with a prefix that contains the category (see Categories)
of the item and other important information. You can customize in which
column tags will be displayed through org-agenda-tags-column
. You can
also customize the prefix using the option org-agenda-prefix-format
.
This prefix is followed by a cleaned-up version of the outline headline
associated with the item.
• Categories: | Not all tasks are equal | |
• Time-of-day specifications: | How the agenda knows the time | |
• Sorting agenda items: | The order of things | |
• Filtering/limiting agenda items: | Dynamically narrow the agenda |
Next: Time-of-day specifications, Up: Presentation and sorting [Contents][Index]
The category is a broad label assigned to each agenda item. By default, the category is simply derived from the file name, but you can also specify it with a special line in the buffer, like this:
#+CATEGORY: Thesis
If you would like to have a special CATEGORY
for a single entry or a
(sub)tree, give the entry a :CATEGORY:
property with the
special category you want to apply as the value.
The display in the agenda buffer looks best if the category is not longer than 10 characters.
You can set up icons for category by customizing the
org-agenda-category-icon-alist
variable.
Next: Sorting agenda items, Previous: Categories, Up: Presentation and sorting [Contents][Index]
Org mode checks each agenda item for a time-of-day specification. The time can be part of the timestamp that triggered inclusion into the agenda, for example as in ‘<2005-05-10 Tue 19:00>’. Time ranges can be specified with two timestamps, like ‘<2005-05-10 Tue 20:30>--<2005-05-10 Tue 22:15>’.
In the headline of the entry itself, a time(range) may also appear as plain text (like ‘12:45’ or a ‘8:30-1pm’)102.
If the agenda integrates the Emacs diary (see Weekly/daily agenda), time specifications in diary entries are recognized as well.
For agenda display, Org mode extracts the time and displays it in a standard 24 hour format as part of the prefix. The example times in the previous paragraphs would end up in the agenda like this:
8:30-13:00 Arthur Dent lies in front of the bulldozer 12:45...... Ford Prefect arrives and takes Arthur to the pub 19:00...... The Vogon reads his poem 20:30-22:15 Marvin escorts the Hitchhikers to the bridge
If the agenda is in single-day mode, or for the display of today, the timed entries are embedded in a time grid, like
8:00...... ------------------ 8:30-13:00 Arthur Dent lies in front of the bulldozer 10:00...... ------------------ 12:00...... ------------------ 12:45...... Ford Prefect arrives and takes Arthur to the pub 14:00...... ------------------ 16:00...... ------------------ 18:00...... ------------------ 19:00...... The Vogon reads his poem 20:00...... ------------------ 20:30-22:15 Marvin escorts the Hitchhikers to the bridge
The time grid can be turned on and off with the variable
org-agenda-use-time-grid
, and can be configured with
org-agenda-time-grid
.
Next: Filtering/limiting agenda items, Previous: Time-of-day specifications, Up: Presentation and sorting [Contents][Index]
Before being inserted into a view, the items are sorted. How this is done depends on the type of view.
org-agenda-files
.
Within each category, items are sorted by priority (see Priorities),
which is composed of the base priority (2000 for priority ‘A’, 1000
for ‘B’, and 0 for ‘C’), plus additional increments for
overdue scheduled or deadline items.
Sorting can be customized using the variable
org-agenda-sorting-strategy
, and may also include criteria based on
the estimated effort of an entry (see Effort estimates).
Previous: Sorting agenda items, Up: Presentation and sorting [Contents][Index]
Agenda built-in or customized commands are statically defined. Agenda filters and limits provide two ways of dynamically narrowing down the list of agenda entries: filters and limits. Filters only act on the display of the items, while limits take effect before the list of agenda entries is built. Filters are more often used interactively, while limits are mostly useful when defined as local variables within custom agenda commands.
org-agenda-filter-by-tag
)Filter the agenda view with respect to a tag and/or effort estimates. The difference between this and a custom agenda command is that filtering is very fast, so that you can switch quickly between different filters without having to recreate the agenda.103
You will be prompted for a tag selection letter; SPC will mean any tag at all. Pressing TAB at that prompt will offer use completion to select a tag (including any tags that do not have a selection character). The command then hides all entries that do not contain or inherit this tag. When called with prefix arg, remove the entries that do have the tag. A second / at the prompt will turn off the filter and unhide any hidden entries. Pressing + or - switches between filtering and excluding the next tag.
Org also supports automatic, context-aware tag filtering. If the variable
org-agenda-auto-exclude-function
is set to a user-defined function,
that function can decide which tags should be excluded from the agenda
automatically. Once this is set, the / command then accepts
RET as a sub-option key and runs the auto exclusion logic. For
example, let’s say you use a Net
tag to identify tasks which need
network access, an Errand
tag for errands in town, and a Call
tag for making phone calls. You could auto-exclude these tags based on the
availability of the Internet, and outside of business hours, with something
like this:
(defun org-my-auto-exclude-function (tag) (and (cond ((string= tag "Net") (/= 0 (call-process "/sbin/ping" nil nil nil "-c1" "-q" "-t1" "mail.gnu.org"))) ((or (string= tag "Errand") (string= tag "Call")) (let ((hour (nth 2 (decode-time)))) (or (< hour 8) (> hour 21))))) (concat "-" tag))) (setq org-agenda-auto-exclude-function 'org-my-auto-exclude-function)
add new search words ([ and ]) or new regular expressions ({ and }) to the query string. The opening bracket/brace will add a positive search term prefixed by ‘+’, indicating that this search term must occur/match in the entry. The closing bracket/brace will add a negative search term which must not occur/match in the entry for it to be selected.
org-agenda-filter-by-category
)Filter the current agenda view with respect to the category of the item at
point. Pressing <
another time will remove this filter. When called
with a prefix argument exclude the category of the item at point from the
agenda.
You can add a filter preset in custom agenda commands through the option
org-agenda-category-filter-preset
. See Setting options.
org-agenda-filter-by-top-headline
)Filter the current agenda view and only display the siblings and the parent headline of the one at point.
org-agenda-filter-by-regexp
)Filter the agenda view by a regular expression: only show agenda entries matching the regular expression the user entered. When called with a prefix argument, it will filter out entries matching the regexp. With two universal prefix arguments, it will remove all the regexp filters, which can be accumulated.
You can add a filter preset in custom agenda commands through the option
org-agenda-regexp-filter-preset
. See Setting options.
org-agenda-filter-by-effort
)Filter the agenda view with respect to effort estimates. You first need to set up allowed efforts globally, for example
(setq org-global-properties '(("Effort_ALL". "0 0:10 0:30 1:00 2:00 3:00 4:00")))
You can then filter for an effort by first typing an operator, one of
<, >, and =, and then the one-digit index of an effort
estimate in your array of allowed values, where 0 means the 10th value.
The filter will then restrict to entries with effort smaller-or-equal, equal,
or larger-or-equal than the selected value. For application of the operator,
entries without a defined effort will be treated according to the value of
org-sort-agenda-noeffort-is-high
.
When called with a prefix argument, it will remove entries matching the condition. With two universal prefix arguments, it will clear effort filters, which can be accumulated.
You can add a filter preset in custom agenda commands through the option
org-agenda-effort-filter-preset
. See Setting options.
org-agenda-filter-remove-all
)Remove all filters in the current agenda view.
Here is a list of options that you can set, either globally, or locally in your custom agenda views (see Custom agenda views).
org-agenda-max-entries
Limit the number of entries.
org-agenda-max-effort
Limit the duration of accumulated efforts (as minutes).
org-agenda-max-todos
Limit the number of entries with TODO keywords.
org-agenda-max-tags
Limit the number of tagged entries.
When set to a positive integer, each option will exclude entries from other
categories: for example, (setq org-agenda-max-effort 100)
will limit
the agenda to 100 minutes of effort and exclude any entry that has no effort
property. If you want to include entries with no effort property, use a
negative value for org-agenda-max-effort
.
One useful setup is to use org-agenda-max-entries
locally in a custom
command. For example, this custom command will display the next five entries
with a NEXT
TODO keyword.
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("n" todo "NEXT" ((org-agenda-max-entries 5)))))
Once you mark one of these five entry as DONE
, rebuilding the agenda
will again the next five entries again, including the first entry that was
excluded so far.
You can also dynamically set temporary limits, which will be lost when rebuilding the agenda:
org-agenda-limit-interactively
)This prompts for the type of limit to apply and its value.
Next: Custom agenda views, Previous: Presentation and sorting, Up: Agenda views [Contents][Index]
Entries in the agenda buffer are linked back to the Org file or diary file where they originate. You are not allowed to edit the agenda buffer itself, but commands are provided to show and jump to the original entry location, and to edit the Org files “remotely” from the agenda buffer. In this way, all information is stored only once, removing the risk that your agenda and note files may diverge.
Some commands can be executed with mouse clicks on agenda lines. For the other commands, the cursor needs to be in the desired line.
org-agenda-next-line
)org-agenda-previous-line
)org-agenda-next-item
)org-agenda-previous-item
)Previous item: same as previous line, but only consider items.
org-agenda-show-and-scroll-up
)Display the original location of the item in another window. With prefix arg, make sure that drawers stay folded.
org-agenda-recenter
)org-agenda-goto
)org-agenda-switch-to
)Go to the original location of the item and delete other windows.
org-agenda-follow-mode
)Toggle Follow mode. In Follow mode, as you move the cursor through
the agenda buffer, the other window always shows the corresponding
location in the Org file. The initial setting for this mode in new
agenda buffers can be set with the variable
org-agenda-start-with-follow-mode
.
org-agenda-tree-to-indirect-buffer
)Display the entire subtree of the current item in an indirect buffer. With a numeric prefix argument N, go up to level N and then take that tree. If N is negative, go up that many levels. With a C-u prefix, do not remove the previously used indirect buffer.
org-agenda-open-link
)Follow a link in the entry. This will offer a selection of any links in the text belonging to the referenced Org node. If there is only one link, it will be followed without a selection prompt.
Interactively select another agenda view and append it to the current view.
org-agenda-day-view
)org-agenda-week-view
)org-agenda-fortnight-view
)org-agenda-month-view
)org-agenda-year-view
)org-agenda-reset-view
)Switch to day/week/month/year view. When switching to day or week view, this
setting becomes the default for subsequent agenda refreshes. Since month and
year views are slow to create, they do not become the default. A numeric
prefix argument may be used to jump directly to a specific day of the year,
ISO week, month, or year, respectively. For example, 32 d jumps to
February 1st, 9 w to ISO week number 9. When setting day, week, or
month view, a year may be encoded in the prefix argument as well. For
example, 200712 w will jump to week 12 in 2007. If such a year
specification has only one or two digits, it will be mapped to the interval
1938–2037. v SPC will reset to what is set in
org-agenda-span
.
org-agenda-later
)Go forward in time to display the following org-agenda-current-span
days.
For example, if the display covers a week, switch to the following week.
With prefix arg, go forward that many times org-agenda-current-span
days.
org-agenda-earlier
)org-agenda-goto-today
)org-agenda-goto-date
)org-agenda-clock-goto
)org-agenda-toggle-diary
)Toggle the inclusion of diary entries. See Weekly/daily agenda.
org-agenda-log-mode
)Toggle Logbook mode. In Logbook mode, entries that were marked DONE while
logging was on (variable org-log-done
) are shown in the agenda, as are
entries that have been clocked on that day. You can configure the entry
types that should be included in log mode using the variable
org-agenda-log-mode-items
. When called with a C-u prefix, show
all possible logbook entries, including state changes. When called with two
prefix arguments C-u C-u, show only logging information, nothing else.
v L is equivalent to C-u v l.
org-agenda-manipulate-query-add
)Include inactive timestamps into the current view. Only for weekly/daily agenda.
org-agenda-archives-mode
)org-agenda-archives-mode 'files
)Toggle Archives mode. In Archives mode, trees that are marked
ARCHIVED
are also scanned when producing the agenda. When you use the
capital A, even all archive files are included. To exit archives mode,
press v a again.
org-agenda-clockreport-mode
)Toggle Clockreport mode. In Clockreport mode, the daily/weekly agenda will
always show a table with the clocked times for the time span and file scope
covered by the current agenda view. The initial setting for this mode in new
agenda buffers can be set with the variable
org-agenda-start-with-clockreport-mode
. By using a prefix argument
when toggling this mode (i.e., C-u R), the clock table will not show
contributions from entries that are hidden by agenda filtering104. See
also the variable org-clock-report-include-clocking-task
.
Show overlapping clock entries, clocking gaps, and other clocking problems in
the current agenda range. You can then visit clocking lines and fix them
manually. See the variable org-agenda-clock-consistency-checks
for
information on how to customize the definition of what constituted a clocking
problem. To return to normal agenda display, press l to exit Logbook
mode.
org-agenda-entry-text-mode
)Toggle entry text mode. In entry text mode, a number of lines from the Org
outline node referenced by an agenda line will be displayed below the line.
The maximum number of lines is given by the variable
org-agenda-entry-text-maxlines
. Calling this command with a numeric
prefix argument will temporarily modify that number to the prefix value.
org-agenda-toggle-time-grid
)Toggle the time grid on and off. See also the variables
org-agenda-use-time-grid
and org-agenda-time-grid
.
org-agenda-redo
)Recreate the agenda buffer, for example to reflect the changes after modification of the timestamps of items with S-LEFT and S-RIGHT. When the buffer is the global TODO list, a prefix argument is interpreted to create a selective list for a specific TODO keyword.
org-agenda-redo
)org-save-all-org-buffers
)Save all Org buffers in the current Emacs session, and also the locations of IDs.
org-agenda-columns
)Invoke column view (see Column view) in the agenda buffer. The column
view format is taken from the entry at point, or (if there is no entry at
point), from the first entry in the agenda view. So whatever the format for
that entry would be in the original buffer (taken from a property, from a
#+COLUMNS
line, or from the default variable
org-columns-default-format
), will be used in the agenda.
org-agenda-remove-restriction-lock
)Remove the restriction lock on the agenda, if it is currently restricted to a file or subtree (see Agenda files).
For a detailed description of these commands, see Filtering/limiting agenda items.
org-agenda-filter-by-tag
)Filter the agenda view with respect to a tag and/or effort estimates.
org-agenda-filter-by-category
)Filter the current agenda view with respect to the category of the item at point.
org-agenda-filter-by-top-headline
)Filter the current agenda view and only display the siblings and the parent headline of the one at point.
org-agenda-filter-by-regexp
)Filter the agenda view by a regular expression.
org-agenda-filter-by-effort
)Filter the agenda view with respect to effort estimates.
org-agenda-filter-remove-all
)Remove all filters in the current agenda view.
org-agenda-undo
)Undo a change due to a remote editing command. The change is undone both in the agenda buffer and in the remote buffer.
org-agenda-todo
)Change the TODO state of the item, both in the agenda and in the original org file.
org-agenda-todo-nextset
)org-agenda-todo-previousset
)org-agenda-kill
)Delete the current agenda item along with the entire subtree belonging
to it in the original Org file. If the text to be deleted remotely
is longer than one line, the kill needs to be confirmed by the user. See
variable org-agenda-confirm-kill
.
org-agenda-refile
)org-agenda-archive-default-with-confirmation
)Archive the subtree corresponding to the entry at point using the default
archiving command set in org-archive-default-command
. When using the
a
key, confirmation will be required.
org-agenda-toggle-archive-tag
)org-agenda-archive-to-archive-sibling
)Move the subtree corresponding to the current entry to its archive sibling.
org-agenda-archive
)Archive the subtree corresponding to the current headline. This means the entry will be moved to the configured archive location, most likely a different file.
org-agenda-show-tags
)Show all tags associated with the current item. This is useful if you have
turned off org-agenda-show-inherited-tags
, but still want to see all
tags of a headline occasionally.
org-agenda-set-tags
)Set tags for the current headline. If there is an active region in the agenda, change a tag for all headings in the region.
Set the priority for the current item (org-agenda-priority
).
Org mode prompts for the priority character. If you reply with SPC,
the priority cookie is removed from the entry.
org-agenda-show-priority
)org-agenda-priority-up
)Increase the priority of the current item. The priority is changed in the original buffer, but the agenda is not resorted. Use the r key for this.
org-agenda-priority-down
)org-agenda-add-note
)Add a note to the entry. This note will be recorded, and then filed to the
same location where state change notes are put. Depending on
org-log-into-drawer
, this may be inside a drawer.
org-attach
)org-agenda-schedule
)Schedule this item. With prefix arg remove the scheduling timestamp
org-agenda-deadline
)Set a deadline for this item. With prefix arg remove the deadline.
org-agenda-do-date-later
)Change the timestamp associated with the current line by one day into the
future. If the date is in the past, the first call to this command will move
it to today.
With a numeric prefix argument, change it by that many days. For example,
3 6 5 S-RIGHT will change it by a year. With a C-u prefix,
change the time by one hour. If you immediately repeat the command, it will
continue to change hours even without the prefix arg. With a double C-u
C-u prefix, do the same for changing minutes.
The stamp is changed in the original Org file, but the change is not directly
reflected in the agenda buffer. Use r or g to update the buffer.
org-agenda-do-date-earlier
)Change the timestamp associated with the current line by one day into the past.
org-agenda-date-prompt
)Change the timestamp associated with the current line. The key > has been chosen, because it is the same as S-. on my keyboard.
org-agenda-clock-in
)Start the clock on the current item. If a clock is running already, it is stopped first.
org-agenda-clock-out
)org-agenda-clock-cancel
)org-agenda-clock-goto
)org-agenda-capture
)Like org-capture
, but use the date at point as the default date for
the capture template. See org-capture-use-agenda-date
to make this
the default behavior of org-capture
.
org-agenda-drag-line-backward
)Drag the line at point backward one line105. With a numeric prefix argument, drag backward by that many lines.
org-agenda-drag-line-forward
)Drag the line at point forward one line. With a numeric prefix argument, drag forward by that many lines.
org-agenda-bulk-mark
)Mark the entry at point for bulk action. With numeric prefix argument, mark that many successive entries.
org-agenda-bulk-mark-all
)org-agenda-bulk-unmark
)org-agenda-bulk-remove-all-marks
)org-agenda-bulk-toggle
)org-agenda-bulk-toggle-all
)org-agenda-bulk-mark-regexp
)org-agenda-bulk-action
)Bulk action: act on all marked entries in the agenda. This will prompt for
another key to select the action to be applied. The prefix arg to B
will be passed through to the s and d commands, to bulk-remove
these special timestamps. By default, marks are removed after the bulk. If
you want them to persist, set org-agenda-persistent-marks
to t
or hit p at the prompt.
Toggle persistent marks.
Archive all selected entries.
Archive entries by moving them to their respective archive siblings.
Change TODO state. This prompts for a single TODO keyword and changes the state of all selected entries, bypassing blocking and suppressing logging notes (but not timestamps).
Add a tag to all selected entries.
Remove a tag from all selected entries.
Schedule all items to a new date. To shift existing schedule dates by a fixed number of days, use something starting with double plus at the prompt, for example ‘++8d’ or ‘++2w’.
Set deadline to a specific date.
Prompt for a single refile target and move all entries. The entries will no longer be in the agenda; refresh (g) to bring them back.
Reschedule randomly into the coming N days. N will be prompted for. With prefix arg (C-u B S), scatter only across weekdays.
Apply a function106 to marked entries. For example, the function below sets the CATEGORY property of the entries to web.
(defun set-category () (interactive "P") (let* ((marker (or (org-get-at-bol 'org-hd-marker) (org-agenda-error))) (buffer (marker-buffer marker))) (with-current-buffer buffer (save-excursion (save-restriction (widen) (goto-char marker) (org-back-to-heading t) (org-set-property "CATEGORY" "web"))))))
org-agenda-goto-calendar
)Open the Emacs calendar and move to the date at the agenda cursor.
org-calendar-goto-agenda
)When in the calendar, compute and show the Org mode agenda for the date at the cursor.
org-agenda-diary-entry
)Insert a new entry into the diary, using the date at the cursor and (for block entries) the date at the mark. This will add to the Emacs diary file107, in a way similar to the i command in the calendar. The diary file will pop up in another window, where you can add the entry.
If you configure org-agenda-diary-file
to point to an Org mode file,
Org will create entries (in Org mode syntax) in that file instead. Most
entries will be stored in a date-based outline tree that will later make it
easy to archive appointments from previous months/years. The tree will be
built under an entry with a DATE_TREE
property, or else with years as
top-level entries. Emacs will prompt you for the entry text—if you specify
it, the entry will be created in org-agenda-diary-file
without further
interaction. If you directly press RET at the prompt without typing
text, the target file will be shown in another window for you to finish the
entry there. See also the k r command.
org-agenda-phases-of-moon
)Show the phases of the moon for the three months around current date.
org-agenda-sunrise-sunset
)Show sunrise and sunset times. The geographical location must be set with calendar variables, see the documentation for the Emacs calendar.
org-agenda-convert-date
)Convert the date at cursor into many other cultural and historic calendars.
org-agenda-holidays
)Show holidays for three months around the cursor date.
Export a single iCalendar file containing entries from all agenda files. This is a globally available command, and also available in the agenda menu.
org-agenda-write
)Write the agenda view to a file. Depending on the extension of the selected
file name, the view will be exported as HTML (.html or .htm),
Postscript (.ps), PDF (.pdf), Org (.org) and plain text
(any other extension). When exporting to Org, only the body of original
headlines are exported, not subtrees or inherited tags. When called with a
C-u prefix argument, immediately open the newly created file. Use the
variable org-agenda-exporter-settings
to set options for
ps-print and for htmlize to be used during export.
org-agenda-quit
)org-agenda-exit
)Exit agenda, remove the agenda buffer and all buffers loaded by Emacs for the compilation of the agenda. Buffers created by the user to visit Org files will not be removed.
Next: Exporting agenda views, Previous: Agenda commands, Up: Agenda views [Contents][Index]
Custom agenda commands serve two purposes: to store and quickly access frequently used TODO and tags searches, and to create special composite agenda buffers. Custom agenda commands will be accessible through the dispatcher (see Agenda dispatcher), just like the default commands.
• Storing searches: | Type once, use often | |
• Block agenda: | All the stuff you need in a single buffer | |
• Setting options: | Changing the rules |
Next: Block agenda, Up: Custom agenda views [Contents][Index]
The first application of custom searches is the definition of keyboard shortcuts for frequently used searches, either creating an agenda buffer, or a sparse tree (the latter covering of course only the current buffer).
Custom commands are configured in the variable
org-agenda-custom-commands
. You can customize this variable, for
example by pressing C-c a C. You can also directly set it with Emacs
Lisp in the Emacs init file. The following example contains all valid agenda
views:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("x" agenda) ("y" agenda*) ("w" todo "WAITING") ("W" todo-tree "WAITING") ("u" tags "+boss-urgent") ("v" tags-todo "+boss-urgent") ("U" tags-tree "+boss-urgent") ("f" occur-tree "\\<FIXME\\>") ("h" . "HOME+Name tags searches") ; description for "h" prefix ("hl" tags "+home+Lisa") ("hp" tags "+home+Peter") ("hk" tags "+home+Kim")))
The initial string in each entry defines the keys you have to press after the dispatcher command C-c a in order to access the command. Usually this will be just a single character, but if you have many similar commands, you can also define two-letter combinations where the first character is the same in several combinations and serves as a prefix key108. The second parameter is the search type, followed by the string or regular expression to be used for the matching. The example above will therefore define:
as a global search for agenda entries planned109 this week/day.
as a global search for agenda entries planned this week/day, but only those
with an hour specification like [h]h:mm
—think of them as appointments.
as a global search for TODO entries with ‘WAITING’ as the TODO keyword
as the same search, but only in the current buffer and displaying the results as a sparse tree
as a global tags search for headlines marked ‘:boss:’ but not ‘:urgent:’
as the same search as C-c a u, but limiting the search to headlines that are also TODO items
as the same search as C-c a u, but only in the current buffer and displaying the result as a sparse tree
to create a sparse tree (again: current buffer only) with all entries containing the word ‘FIXME’
as a prefix command for a HOME tags search where you have to press an additional key (l, p or k) to select a name (Lisa, Peter, or Kim) as additional tag to match.
Note that the *-tree
agenda views need to be called from an
Org buffer as they operate on the current buffer only.
Next: Setting options, Previous: Storing searches, Up: Custom agenda views [Contents][Index]
Another possibility is the construction of agenda views that comprise
the results of several commands, each of which creates a block in
the agenda buffer. The available commands include agenda
for the
daily or weekly agenda (as created with C-c a a), alltodo
for the global TODO list (as constructed with C-c a t), and the
matching commands discussed above: todo
, tags
, and
tags-todo
. Here are two examples:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks" ((agenda "") (tags-todo "home") (tags "garden"))) ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks" ((agenda "") (tags-todo "work") (tags "office")))))
This will define C-c a h to create a multi-block view for stuff you need to attend to at home. The resulting agenda buffer will contain your agenda for the current week, all TODO items that carry the tag ‘home’, and also all lines tagged with ‘garden’. Finally the command C-c a o provides a similar view for office tasks.
Previous: Block agenda, Up: Custom agenda views [Contents][Index]
Org mode contains a number of variables regulating agenda construction
and display. The global variables define the behavior for all agenda
commands, including the custom commands. However, if you want to change
some settings just for a single custom view, you can do so. Setting
options requires inserting a list of variable names and values at the
right spot in org-agenda-custom-commands
. For example:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("w" todo "WAITING" ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-down)) (org-agenda-prefix-format " Mixed: "))) ("U" tags-tree "+boss-urgent" ((org-show-context-detail 'minimal))) ("N" search "" ((org-agenda-files '("~org/notes.org")) (org-agenda-text-search-extra-files nil)))))
Now the C-c a w command will sort the collected entries only by priority, and the prefix format is modified to just say ‘ Mixed: ’ instead of giving the category of the entry. The sparse tags tree of C-c a U will now turn out ultra-compact, because neither the headline hierarchy above the match, nor the headline following the match will be shown. The command C-c a N will do a text search limited to only a single file.
For command sets creating a block agenda,
org-agenda-custom-commands
has two separate spots for setting
options. You can add options that should be valid for just a single
command in the set, and options that should be valid for all commands in
the set. The former are just added to the command entry; the latter
must come after the list of command entries. Going back to the block
agenda example (see Block agenda), let’s change the sorting strategy
for the C-c a h commands to priority-down
, but let’s sort
the results for GARDEN tags query in the opposite order,
priority-up
. This would look like this:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks" ((agenda) (tags-todo "home") (tags "garden" ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-up))))) ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-down)))) ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks" ((agenda) (tags-todo "work") (tags "office")))))
As you see, the values and parentheses setting is a little complex. When in doubt, use the customize interface to set this variable—it fully supports its structure. Just one caveat: when setting options in this interface, the values are just Lisp expressions. So if the value is a string, you need to add the double-quotes around the value yourself.
To control whether an agenda command should be accessible from a specific
context, you can customize org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts
. Let’s
say for example that you have an agenda command "o"
displaying a view
that you only need when reading emails. Then you would configure this option
like this:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts '(("o" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))
You can also tell that the command key "o"
should refer to another
command key "r"
. In that case, add this command key like this:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands-contexts '(("o" "r" (in-mode . "message-mode"))))
See the docstring of the variable for more information.
Next: Agenda column view, Previous: Custom agenda views, Up: Agenda views [Contents][Index]
If you are away from your computer, it can be very useful to have a printed version of some agenda views to carry around. Org mode can export custom agenda views as plain text, HTML110, Postscript, PDF111, and iCalendar files. If you want to do this only occasionally, use the command
org-agenda-write
)Write the agenda view to a file. Depending on the extension of the selected
file name, the view will be exported as HTML (extension .html or
.htm), Postscript (extension .ps), iCalendar (extension
.ics), or plain text (any other extension). Use the variable
org-agenda-exporter-settings
to set options for ps-print and
for htmlize to be used during export, for example
(setq org-agenda-exporter-settings '((ps-number-of-columns 2) (ps-landscape-mode t) (org-agenda-add-entry-text-maxlines 5) (htmlize-output-type 'css)))
If you need to export certain agenda views frequently, you can associate any custom agenda command with a list of output file names 112. Here is an example that first defines custom commands for the agenda and the global TODO list, together with a number of files to which to export them. Then we define two block agenda commands and specify file names for them as well. File names can be relative to the current working directory, or absolute.
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("X" agenda "" nil ("agenda.html" "agenda.ps")) ("Y" alltodo "" nil ("todo.html" "todo.txt" "todo.ps")) ("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks" ((agenda "") (tags-todo "home") (tags "garden")) nil ("~/views/home.html")) ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks" ((agenda) (tags-todo "work") (tags "office")) nil ("~/views/office.ps" "~/calendars/office.ics"))))
The extension of the file name determines the type of export. If it is
.html, Org mode will try to use the htmlize.el package to
convert the buffer to HTML and save it to this file name. If the extension
is .ps, ps-print-buffer-with-faces
is used to produce
Postscript output. If the extension is .ics, iCalendar export is run
export over all files that were used to construct the agenda, and limit the
export to entries listed in the agenda. Any other extension produces a plain
ASCII file.
The export files are not created when you use one of those commands interactively because this might use too much overhead. Instead, there is a special command to produce all specified files in one step:
org-store-agenda-views
)Export all agenda views that have export file names associated with them.
You can use the options section of the custom agenda commands to also set options for the export commands. For example:
(setq org-agenda-custom-commands '(("X" agenda "" ((ps-number-of-columns 2) (ps-landscape-mode t) (org-agenda-prefix-format " [ ] ") (org-agenda-with-colors nil) (org-agenda-remove-tags t)) ("theagenda.ps"))))
This command sets two options for the Postscript exporter, to make it
print in two columns in landscape format—the resulting page can be cut
in two and then used in a paper agenda. The remaining settings modify
the agenda prefix to omit category and scheduling information, and
instead include a checkbox to check off items. We also remove the tags
to make the lines compact, and we don’t want to use colors for the
black-and-white printer. Settings specified in
org-agenda-exporter-settings
will also apply, but the settings
in org-agenda-custom-commands
take precedence.
From the command line you may also use
emacs -eval (org-batch-store-agenda-views) -kill
or, if you need to modify some parameters113
emacs -eval '(org-batch-store-agenda-views \ org-agenda-span (quote month) \ org-agenda-start-day "2007-11-01" \ org-agenda-include-diary nil \ org-agenda-files (quote ("~/org/project.org")))' \ -kill
which will create the agenda views restricted to the file ~/org/project.org, without diary entries and with a 30-day extent.
You can also extract agenda information in a way that allows further processing by other programs. See Extracting agenda information, for more information.
Previous: Exporting agenda views, Up: Agenda views [Contents][Index]
Column view (see Column view) is normally used to view and edit properties embedded in the hierarchical structure of an Org file. It can be quite useful to use column view also from the agenda, where entries are collected by certain criteria.
org-agenda-columns
)Turn on column view in the agenda.
To understand how to use this properly, it is important to realize that the entries in the agenda are no longer in their proper outline environment. This causes the following issues:
COLUMNS
format to use. Since the
entries in the agenda are collected from different files, and different files
may have different COLUMNS
formats, this is a non-trivial problem.
Org first checks if the variable org-agenda-overriding-columns-format
is currently set, and if so, takes the format from there. Otherwise it takes
the format associated with the first item in the agenda, or, if that item
does not have a specific format—defined in a property, or in its file—it
uses org-columns-default-format
.
CLOCKSUM
property. Org will then sum the
values displayed in the agenda. In the daily/weekly agenda, the sums will
cover a single day; in all other views they cover the entire block. It is
vital to realize that the agenda may show the same entry twice—for
example as scheduled and as a deadline—and it may show two entries from the
same hierarchy—for example a parent and its child. In these
cases, the summation in the agenda will lead to incorrect results because
some values will count double.
CLOCKSUM
, that is always
the entire clocked time for this item. So even in the daily/weekly agenda,
the clocksum listed in column view may originate from times outside the
current view. This has the advantage that you can compare these values with
a column listing the planned total effort for a task—one of the major
applications for column view in the agenda. If you want information about
clocked time in the displayed period use clock table mode (press R in
the agenda).
CLOCKSUM_T
, that is
always today’s clocked time for this item. So even in the weekly agenda, the
clocksum listed in column view only originates from today. This lets you
compare the time you spent on a task for today, with the time already
spent —via CLOCKSUM
—and with the planned total effort for it.
Next: Exporting, Previous: Agenda views, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
When exporting Org mode documents, the exporter tries to reflect the structure of the document as accurately as possible in the back-end. Since export targets like HTML and LaTeX allow much richer formatting, Org mode has rules on how to prepare text for rich export. This section summarizes the markup rules used in an Org mode buffer.
• Paragraphs: | The basic unit of text | |
• Emphasis and monospace: | Bold, italic, etc. | |
• Horizontal rules: | Make a line | |
• Images and tables: | Images, tables and caption mechanism | |
• Literal examples: | Source code examples with special formatting | |
• Special symbols: | Greek letters and other symbols | |
• Subscripts and superscripts: | Simple syntax for raising/lowering text | |
• Embedded LaTeX: | LaTeX can be freely used inside Org documents |
Next: Emphasis and monospace, Up: Markup [Contents][Index]
Paragraphs are separated by at least one empty line. If you need to enforce a line break within a paragraph, use ‘\\’ at the end of a line.
To preserve the line breaks, indentation and blank lines in a region, but otherwise use normal formatting, you can use this construct, which can also be used to format poetry.
#+BEGIN_VERSE Great clouds overhead Tiny black birds rise and fall Snow covers Emacs -- AlexSchroeder #+END_VERSE
When quoting a passage from another document, it is customary to format this as a paragraph that is indented on both the left and the right margin. You can include quotations in Org mode documents like this:
#+BEGIN_QUOTE Everything should be made as simple as possible, but not any simpler -- Albert Einstein #+END_QUOTE
If you would like to center some text, do it like this:
#+BEGIN_CENTER Everything should be made as simple as possible, \\ but not any simpler #+END_CENTER
Next: Horizontal rules, Previous: Paragraphs, Up: Markup [Contents][Index]
You can make words *bold*, /italic/, _underlined_, =verbatim=
and ~code~
, and, if you must, ‘+strike-through+’. Text
in the code and verbatim string is not processed for Org mode specific
syntax, it is exported verbatim.
To turn off fontification for marked up text, you can set
org-fontify-emphasized-text
to nil
. To narrow down the list of
available markup syntax, you can customize org-emphasis-alist
. To fine
tune what characters are allowed before and after the markup characters, you
can tweak org-emphasis-regexp-components
. Beware that changing one of
the above variables will not take effect until you reload Org, for which you
may need to restart Emacs.
Next: Images and tables, Previous: Emphasis and monospace, Up: Markup [Contents][Index]
A line consisting of only dashes, and at least 5 of them, will be exported as a horizontal line.
Next: Literal examples, Previous: Horizontal rules, Up: Markup [Contents][Index]
Both the native Org mode tables (see Tables) and tables formatted with
the table.el package will be exported properly. For Org mode tables,
the lines before the first horizontal separator line will become table header
lines. You can use the following lines somewhere before the table to assign
a caption and a label for cross references, and in the text you can refer to
the object with [[tab:basic-data]]
(see Internal links):
#+CAPTION: This is the caption for the next table (or link) #+NAME: tab:basic-data | ... | ...| |-----|----|
Optionally, the caption can take the form:
#+CAPTION[Caption for list of tables]: Caption for table.
Some back-ends allow you to directly include images into the exported
document. Org does this, if a link to an image files does not have
a description part, for example [[./img/a.jpg]]
. If you wish to
define a caption for the image and maybe a label for internal cross
references, make sure that the link is on a line by itself and precede it
with #+CAPTION
and #+NAME
as follows:
#+CAPTION: This is the caption for the next figure link (or table) #+NAME: fig:SED-HR4049 [[./img/a.jpg]]
Such images can be displayed within the buffer. See the discussion of image links.
Even though images and tables are prominent examples of captioned structures, the same caption mechanism can apply to many others (e.g., LaTeX equations, source code blocks). Depending on the export back-end, those may or may not be handled.
Next: Special symbols, Previous: Images and tables, Up: Markup [Contents][Index]
You can include literal examples that should not be subjected to markup. Such examples will be typeset in monospace, so this is well suited for source code and similar examples.
#+BEGIN_EXAMPLE Some example from a text file. #+END_EXAMPLE
Note that such blocks may be indented in order to align nicely with indented text and in particular with plain list structure (see Plain lists). For simplicity when using small examples, you can also start the example lines with a colon followed by a space. There may also be additional whitespace before the colon:
Here is an example : Some example from a text file.
If the example is source code from a programming language, or any other text that can be marked up by font-lock in Emacs, you can ask for the example to look like the fontified Emacs buffer114. This is done with the ‘src’ block, where you also need to specify the name of the major mode that should be used to fontify the example115, see Easy templates for shortcuts to easily insert code blocks.
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (defun org-xor (a b) "Exclusive or." (if a (not b) b)) #+END_SRC
Both in example
and in src
snippets, you can add a -n
switch to the end of the BEGIN
line, to get the lines of the example
numbered. The -n
takes an optional numeric argument specifying the
starting line number of the block. If you use a +n
switch, the
numbering from the previous numbered snippet will be continued in the current
one. The +n
can also take a numeric argument. The value of the
argument will be added to the last line of the previous block to determine
the starting line number.
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp -n 20 ;; this will export with line number 20 (message "This is line 21") #+END_SRC #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp +n 10 ;; This will be listed as line 31 (message "This is line 32") #+END_SRC
In literal examples, Org will interpret strings like ‘(ref:name)’ as
labels, and use them as targets for special hyperlinks like [[(name)]]
(i.e., the reference name enclosed in single parenthesis). In HTML, hovering
the mouse over such a link will remote-highlight the corresponding code line,
which is kind of cool.
You can also add a -r
switch which removes the labels from the
source code116. With the -n
switch, links to these references will be labeled by the line numbers from
the code listing, otherwise links will use the labels with no parentheses.
Here is an example:
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp -n -r (save-excursion (ref:sc) (goto-char (point-min))) (ref:jump) #+END_SRC In line [[(sc)]] we remember the current position. [[(jump)][Line (jump)]] jumps to point-min.
Finally, you can use -i
to preserve the indentation of a specific code
block (see Editing source code).
If the syntax for the label format conflicts with the language syntax, use a
-l
switch to change the format, for example ‘#+BEGIN_SRC pascal
-n -r -l "((%s))"’. See also the variable org-coderef-label-format
.
HTML export also allows examples to be published as text areas (see Text areas in HTML export).
Because the #+BEGIN_...
and #+END_...
patterns need to be added
so often, shortcuts are provided using the Easy templates facility
(see Easy templates).
Edit the source code example at point in its native mode. This works by
switching to a temporary buffer with the source code. You need to exit by
pressing C-c ' again117.
The edited version will then replace the old version in the Org buffer.
Fixed-width regions (where each line starts with a colon followed by a space)
will be edited using artist-mode
118
to allow creating ASCII drawings easily. Using this command in an empty line
will create a new fixed-width region.
Calling org-store-link
while editing a source code example in a
temporary buffer created with C-c ' will prompt for a label. Make sure
that it is unique in the current buffer, and insert it with the proper
formatting like ‘(ref:label)’ at the end of the current line. Then the
label is stored as a link ‘(label)’, for retrieval with C-c C-l.
Next: Subscripts and superscripts, Previous: Literal examples, Up: Markup [Contents][Index]
You can use LaTeX-like syntax to insert special symbols—named entities—like ‘\alpha’ to indicate the Greek letter, or ‘\to’ to indicate an arrow. Completion for these symbols is available, just type ‘\’ and maybe a few letters, and press M-TAB to see possible completions. If you need such a symbol inside a word, terminate it with a pair of curly brackets. For example
Pro tip: Given a circle \Gamma of diameter d, the length of its circumference is \pi{}d.
A large number of entities is provided, with names taken from both HTML and
LaTeX; you can comfortably browse the complete list from a dedicated
buffer using the command org-entities-help
. It is also possible to
provide your own special symbols in the variable org-entities-user
.
During export, these symbols are transformed into the native format of the
exporter back-end. Strings like \alpha
are exported as α
in the HTML output, and as \(\alpha\)
in the LaTeX output.
Similarly, \nbsp
becomes
in HTML and ~
in
LaTeX.
Entities may also be used as a may to escape markup in an Org document, e.g., ‘\under{}not underlined\under’ exports as ‘_not underlined_’.
If you would like to see entities displayed as UTF-8 characters, use the following command119:
Toggle display of entities as UTF-8 characters. This does not change the buffer content which remains plain ASCII, but it overlays the UTF-8 character for display purposes only.
In addition to regular entities defined above, Org exports in a special way120 the following commonly used character combinations: ‘\-’ is treated as a shy hyphen, ‘--’ and ‘---’ are converted into dashes, and ‘...’ becomes a compact set of dots.
Next: Embedded LaTeX, Previous: Special symbols, Up: Markup [Contents][Index]
‘^’ and ‘_’ are used to indicate super- and subscripts. To increase the readability of ASCII text, it is not necessary—but OK—to surround multi-character sub- and superscripts with curly braces. Those are, however, mandatory, when more than one word is involved. For example
The radius of the sun is R_sun = 6.96 x 10^8 m. On the other hand, the radius of Alpha Centauri is R_{Alpha Centauri} = 1.28 x R_{sun}.
If you write a text where the underscore is often used in a different
context, Org’s convention to always interpret these as subscripts can get in
your way. Configure the variable org-use-sub-superscripts
to change
this convention. For example, when setting this variable to {}
,
‘a_b’ will not be interpreted as a subscript, but ‘a_{b}’ will.
In addition to showing entities as UTF-8 characters, this command will also format sub- and superscripts in a WYSIWYM way.
Previous: Subscripts and superscripts, Up: Markup [Contents][Index]
Plain ASCII is normally sufficient for almost all note taking. Exceptions include scientific notes, which often require mathematical symbols and the occasional formula. LaTeX121 is widely used to typeset scientific documents. Org mode supports embedding LaTeX code into its files, because many academics are used to writing and reading LaTeX source code, and because it can be readily processed to produce pretty output for a number of export back-ends.
• LaTeX fragments: | Complex formulas made easy | |
• Previewing LaTeX fragments: | What will this snippet look like? | |
• CDLaTeX mode: | Speed up entering of formulas |
Next: Previewing LaTeX fragments, Up: Embedded LaTeX [Contents][Index]
Org mode can contain LaTeX math fragments, and it supports ways to process these for several export back-ends. When exporting to LaTeX, the code is left as it is. When exporting to HTML, Org can use either MathJax (see Math formatting in HTML export) or transcode the math into images (see see Previewing LaTeX fragments).
LaTeX fragments don’t need any special marking at all. The following snippets will be identified as LaTeX source code:
\begin
statement appears on a new line, at the
beginning of the line or after whitespaces only.
For example:
\begin{equation} x=\sqrt{b} \end{equation} If $a^2=b$ and \( b=2 \), then the solution must be either $$ a=+\sqrt{2} $$ or \[ a=-\sqrt{2} \].
LaTeX processing can be configured with the variable
org-export-with-latex
. The default setting is t
which means
MathJax for HTML, and no processing for ASCII and LaTeX back-ends.
You can also set this variable on a per-file basis using one of these
lines:
#+OPTIONS: tex:t Do the right thing automatically (MathJax) #+OPTIONS: tex:nil Do not process LaTeX fragments at all #+OPTIONS: tex:verbatim Verbatim export, for jsMath or so
Next: CDLaTeX mode, Previous: LaTeX fragments, Up: Embedded LaTeX [Contents][Index]
If you have a working LaTeX installation and dvipng, dvisvgm or convert installed123, LaTeX fragments can be processed to produce images of the typeset expressions to be used for inclusion while exporting to HTML (see see LaTeX fragments), or for inline previewing within Org mode.
You can customize the variables org-format-latex-options
and
org-format-latex-header
to influence some aspects of the preview. In
particular, the :scale
(and for HTML export, :html-scale
)
property of the former can be used to adjust the size of the preview images.
Produce a preview image of the LaTeX fragment at point and overlay it over the source code. If there is no fragment at point, process all fragments in the current entry (between two headlines). When called with a prefix argument, process the entire subtree. When called with two prefix arguments, or when the cursor is before the first headline, process the entire buffer.
Remove the overlay preview images.
You can turn on the previewing of all LaTeX fragments in a file with
#+STARTUP: latexpreview
To disable it, simply use
#+STARTUP: nolatexpreview
Previous: Previewing LaTeX fragments, Up: Embedded LaTeX [Contents][Index]
CDLaTeX mode is a minor mode that is normally used in combination with a
major LaTeX mode like AUCTeX in order to speed-up insertion of
environments and math templates. Inside Org mode, you can make use of some
of the features of CDLaTeX mode. You need to install cdlatex.el
and texmathp.el (the latter comes also with AUCTeX) from
https://staff.fnwi.uva.nl/c.dominik/Tools/cdlatex. Don’t use
CDLaTeX mode itself under Org mode, but use the light version
org-cdlatex-mode
that comes as part of Org mode. Turn it on for the
current buffer with M-x org-cdlatex-mode RET, or for all Org
files with
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-on-org-cdlatex)
When this mode is enabled, the following features are present (for more details see the documentation of CDLaTeX mode):
fr
to \frac{}{}
and position the cursor
correctly inside the first brace. Another TAB will get you into
the second brace. Even outside fragments, TAB will expand
environment abbreviations at the beginning of a line. For example, if
you write ‘equ’ at the beginning of a line and press TAB,
this abbreviation will be expanded to an equation
environment.
To get a list of all abbreviations, type M-x cdlatex-command-help
RET.
cdlatex-simplify-sub-super-scripts
).
Next: Publishing, Previous: Markup, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Sometimes, you may want to pretty print your notes, publish them on the web or even share them with people not using Org. In these cases, the Org export facilities can be used to convert your documents to a variety of other formats, while retaining as much structure (see Document structure) and markup (see Markup) as possible.
Libraries responsible for such translation are called back-ends. Org ships with the following ones
Org also uses additional libraries located in contrib/
directory (see Installation). Users can install additional export
libraries for additional formats from the Emacs packaging system. For easy
discovery, these packages have a common naming scheme: ox-NAME, where
NAME is one of the formats. For example, ox-koma-letter for
koma-letter
back-end.
Org loads back-ends for the following formats by default: ascii
,
html
, icalendar
, latex
and odt
.
Org can load additional back-ends either of two ways: through the
org-export-backends
variable configuration; or, by requiring the
library in the Emacs init file like this:
(require 'ox-md)
• The export dispatcher: | The main interface | |
• Export settings: | Common export settings | |
• Table of contents: | The if and where of the table of contents | |
• Include files: | Include additional files into a document | |
• Macro replacement: | Use macros to create templates | |
• Comment lines: | What will not be exported | |
• ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export: | Exporting to flat files with encoding | |
• Beamer export: | Exporting as a Beamer presentation | |
• HTML export: | Exporting to HTML | |
• LaTeX export: | Exporting to LaTeX, and processing to PDF | |
• Markdown export: | Exporting to Markdown | |
• OpenDocument Text export: | Exporting to OpenDocument Text | |
• Org export: | Exporting to Org | |
• Texinfo export: | Exporting to Texinfo | |
• iCalendar export: | Exporting to iCalendar | |
• Other built-in back-ends: | Exporting to a man page | |
• Advanced configuration: | Fine-tuning the export output | |
• Export in foreign buffers: | Author tables and lists in Org syntax |
Next: Export settings, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
The export dispatcher is the main interface for Org’s exports. A hierarchical menu presents the currently configured export formats. Options are shown as easy toggle switches on the same screen.
Org also has a minimal prompt interface for the export dispatcher. When the
variable org-export-dispatch-use-expert-ui
is set to a non-nil
value, Org prompts in the minibuffer. To switch back to the hierarchical
menu, press ?.
org-export-dispatch
)Invokes the export dispatcher interface. The options show default settings. The C-u prefix argument preserves options from the previous export, including any sub-tree selections.
Org exports the entire buffer by default. If the Org buffer has an active region, then Org exports just that region.
These are the export options, the key combinations that toggle them (see Export settings):
Toggles asynchronous export. Asynchronous export uses an external Emacs process with a specially configured initialization file to complete the exporting process in the background thereby releasing the current interface. This is particularly useful when exporting long documents.
Output from an asynchronous export is saved on the “the export stack”. To view this stack, call the export dispatcher with a double C-u prefix argument. If already in the export dispatcher menu, & displays the stack.
To make the background export process the default, customize the variable,
org-export-in-background
.
Toggle body-only export. Useful for excluding headers and footers in the
export. Affects only those back-end formats that have such sections—like
<head>...</head>
in HTML.
Toggle sub-tree export. When turned on, Org exports only the sub-tree starting from the cursor position at the time the export dispatcher was invoked. Org uses the top heading of this sub-tree as the document’s title. If the cursor is not on a heading, Org uses the nearest enclosing header. If the cursor is in the document preamble, Org signals an error and aborts export.
To make the sub-tree export the default, customize the variable,
org-export-initial-scope
.
Toggle visible-only export. Useful for exporting only visible parts of an Org document by adjusting outline visibility settings.
Next: Table of contents, Previous: The export dispatcher, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
Export options can be set: globally with variables; for an individual file by
making variables buffer-local with in-buffer settings (see In-buffer settings), by setting individual keywords, or by specifying them in a
compact form with the #+OPTIONS
keyword; or for a tree by setting
properties (see Properties and columns). Options set at a specific level
override options set at a more general level.
In-buffer settings may appear anywhere in the file, either directly or
indirectly through a file included using ‘#+SETUPFILE: filename or URL’
syntax. Option keyword sets tailored to a particular back-end can be
inserted from the export dispatcher (see The export dispatcher) using the
Insert template
command by pressing #. To insert keywords
individually, a good way to make sure the keyword is correct is to type
#+
and then to use M-TAB125 for completion.
The export keywords available for every back-end, and their equivalent global variables, include:
The document author (user-full-name
).
Entity responsible for output generation (org-export-creator-string
).
A date or a time-stamp126.
The email address (user-mail-address
).
Language to use for translating certain strings
(org-export-default-language
). With ‘#+LANGUAGE: fr’, for
example, Org translates Table of contents to the French Table
des matières.
The default value is :export:
. When a tree is tagged with
:export:
(org-export-select-tags
), Org selects that tree and
its sub-trees for export. Org excludes trees with :noexport:
tags,
see below. When selectively exporting files with :export:
tags set,
Org does not export any text that appears before the first headline.
The default value is :noexport:
. When a tree is tagged with
:noexport:
(org-export-exclude-tags
), Org excludes that tree
and its sub-trees from export. Entries tagged with :noexport:
will be
unconditionally excluded from the export, even if they have an
:export:
tag. Even if a sub-tree is not exported, Org will execute any
code blocks contained in them.
Org displays this title. For long titles, use multiple #+TITLE
lines.
The name of the output file to be generated. Otherwise, Org generates the file name based on the buffer name and the extension based on the back-end format.
The #+OPTIONS
keyword is a compact form. To configure multiple
options, use several #+OPTIONS
lines. #+OPTIONS
recognizes the
following arguments.
':
Toggle smart quotes (org-export-with-smart-quotes
). Depending on the
language used, when activated, Org treats pairs of double quotes as primary
quotes, pairs of single quotes as secondary quotes, and single quote marks as
apostrophes.
*:
Toggle emphasized text (org-export-with-emphasize
).
-:
Toggle conversion of special strings
(org-export-with-special-strings
).
::
Toggle fixed-width sections
(org-export-with-fixed-width
).
<:
Toggle inclusion of time/date active/inactive stamps
(org-export-with-timestamps
).
\n:
Toggles whether to preserve line breaks (org-export-preserve-breaks
).
^:
Toggle TeX-like syntax for sub- and superscripts. If you write "^:{}",
‘a_{b}’ will be interpreted, but the simple ‘a_b’ will be left as
it is (org-export-with-sub-superscripts
).
arch:
Configure how archived trees are exported. When set to headline
, the
export process skips the contents and processes only the headlines
(org-export-with-archived-trees
).
author:
Toggle inclusion of author name into exported file
(org-export-with-author
).
broken-links:
Toggles if Org should continue exporting upon finding a broken internal link.
When set to mark
, Org clearly marks the problem link in the output
(org-export-with-broken-links
).
c:
Toggle inclusion of CLOCK keywords (org-export-with-clocks
).
creator:
Toggle inclusion of creator information in the exported file
(org-export-with-creator
).
d:
Toggles inclusion of drawers, or list of drawers to include, or list of
drawers to exclude (org-export-with-drawers
).
date:
Toggle inclusion of a date into exported file (org-export-with-date
).
e:
Toggle inclusion of entities (org-export-with-entities
).
email:
Toggle inclusion of the author’s e-mail into exported file
(org-export-with-email
).
f:
Toggle the inclusion of footnotes (org-export-with-footnotes
).
H:
Set the number of headline levels for export
(org-export-headline-levels
). Below that level, headlines are treated
differently. In most back-ends, they become list items.
inline:
Toggle inclusion of inlinetasks (org-export-with-inlinetasks
).
num:
Toggle section-numbers (org-export-with-section-numbers
). When set to
number ‘n’, Org numbers only those headlines at level ‘n’ or above.
Setting UNNUMBERED
property to non-nil
disables numbering of
a heading. Since subheadings inherit from this property, it affects their
numbering, too.
p:
Toggle export of planning information (org-export-with-planning
).
“Planning information” comes from lines located right after the headline
and contain any combination of these cookies: SCHEDULED:
,
DEADLINE:
, or CLOSED:
.
pri:
Toggle inclusion of priority cookies (org-export-with-priority
).
prop:
Toggle inclusion of property drawers, or list the properties to include
(org-export-with-properties
).
stat:
Toggle inclusion of statistics cookies
(org-export-with-statistics-cookies
).
tags:
Toggle inclusion of tags, may also be not-in-toc
(org-export-with-tags
).
tasks:
Toggle inclusion of tasks (TODO items); or nil
to remove all tasks; or
todo
to remove DONE tasks; or list the keywords to keep
(org-export-with-tasks
).
tex:
nil
does not export; t
exports; verbatim
keeps
everything in verbatim (org-export-with-latex
).
timestamp:
Toggle inclusion of the creation time in the exported file
(org-export-time-stamp-file
).
title:
Toggle inclusion of title (org-export-with-title
).
toc:
Toggle inclusion of the table of contents, or set the level limit
(org-export-with-toc
).
todo:
Toggle inclusion of TODO keywords into exported text
(org-export-with-todo-keywords
).
|:
Toggle inclusion of tables (org-export-with-tables
).
When exporting sub-trees, special node properties in them can override the above keywords. They are special because they have an ‘EXPORT_’ prefix. For example, ‘DATE’ and ‘EXPORT_FILE_NAME’ keywords become, respectively, ‘EXPORT_DATE’ and ‘EXPORT_FILE_NAME’. Except for ‘SETUPFILE’, all other keywords listed above have an ‘EXPORT_’ equivalent.
If org-export-allow-bind-keywords
is non-nil
, Emacs variables
can become buffer-local during export by using the BIND keyword. Its syntax
is ‘#+BIND: variable value’. This is particularly useful for in-buffer
settings that cannot be changed using keywords.
Next: Include files, Previous: Export settings, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
Org normally inserts the table of contents directly before the first headline
of the file. Org sets the TOC depth the same as the headline levels in the
file. Use a lower number for lower TOC depth. To turn off TOC entirely, use
nil
. This is configured in the org-export-with-toc
variable or
as keywords in an Org file as:
#+OPTIONS: toc:2 only include two levels in TOC #+OPTIONS: toc:nil no default TOC at all
To move the table of contents to a different location, first turn off the
default with org-export-with-toc
variable or with #+OPTIONS:
toc:nil
. Then insert #+TOC: headlines N
at the desired location(s).
#+OPTIONS: toc:nil no default TOC ... #+TOC: headlines 2 insert TOC here, with two headline levels
To adjust the TOC depth for a specific section of the Org document, append an additional ‘local’ parameter. This parameter becomes a relative depth for the current level.
Note that for this feature to work properly in LaTeX export, the Org file
requires the inclusion of the titletoc
package. Because of
compatibility issues, titletoc
has to be loaded before
hyperref
. Customize the org-latex-default-packages-alist
variable.
* Section #+TOC: headlines 1 local insert local TOC, with direct children
only
Use the TOC
keyword to generate list of tables (resp. all listings)
with captions.
#+TOC: listings build a list of listings #+TOC: tables build a list of tables
Normally Org uses the headline for its entry in the table of contents. But
with ALT_TITLE
property, a different entry can be specified for the
table of contents.
Next: Macro replacement, Previous: Table of contents, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
Include other files during export. For example, to include your .emacs file, you could use:
#+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" src emacs-lisp
The first parameter is the file name to include. The optional second parameter specifies the block type: ‘example’, ‘export’ or ‘src’. The optional third parameter specifies the source code language to use for formatting the contents. This is relevant to both ‘export’ and ‘src’ block types.
If an include file is specified as having a markup language, Org neither checks for valid syntax nor changes the contents in any way. For ‘example’ and ‘src’ blocks, Org code-escapes the contents before inclusion.
If an include file is not specified as having any markup language, Org
assumes it be in Org format and proceeds as usual with a few exceptions. Org
makes the footnote labels (see Footnotes) in the included file local to
that file. The contents of the included file will belong to the same
structure—headline, item—containing the INCLUDE
keyword. In
particular, headlines within the file will become children of the current
section. That behavior can be changed by providing an additional keyword
parameter, :minlevel
. It shifts the headlines in the included file to
become the lowest level. For example, this syntax makes the included file
a sibling of the current top-level headline:
#+INCLUDE: "~/my-book/chapter2.org" :minlevel 1
Inclusion of only portions of files are specified using ranges parameter with
:lines
keyword. The line at the upper end of the range will not be
included. The start and/or the end of the range may be omitted to use the
obvious defaults.
#+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "5-10" Include lines 5 to 10, 10 excluded #+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "-10" Include lines 1 to 10, 10 excluded #+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" :lines "10-" Include lines from 10 to EOF
Inclusions may specify a file-link to extract an object matched by
org-link-search
127 (see Search options).
To extract only the contents of the matched object, set :only-contents
property to non-nil
. This will omit any planning lines or property
drawers. The ranges for :lines
keyword are relative to the requested
element. Some examples:
#+INCLUDE: "./paper.org::#theory" :only-contents t Include the body of the heading with the custom id ‘theory’ #+INCLUDE: "./paper.org::mytable" Include named element. #+INCLUDE: "./paper.org::*conclusion" :lines 1-20 Include the first 20 lines of the headline named ‘conclusion’.
Visit the include file at point.
Next: Comment lines, Previous: Include files, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
Macros replace text snippets during export. Macros are defined globally in
org-export-global-macros
, or document-wise with the following syntax:
#+MACRO: name replacement text $1, $2 are arguments
which can be referenced using
{{{name(arg1, arg2)}}}
128.
Org recognizes macro references in following Org markup areas: paragraphs,
headlines, verse blocks, tables cells and lists. Org also recognizes macro
references in keywords, such as #+CAPTION
, #+TITLE
,
#+AUTHOR
, #+DATE
, and for some back-end specific export
options.
Org comes with following pre-defined macros:
{{{title}}}
{{{author}}}
{{{email}}}
Org replaces these macro references with available information at the time of export.
{{{date}}}
{{{date(FORMAT)}}}
This macro refers to the #+DATE
keyword. FORMAT is an optional
argument to the {{{date}}}
macro that will be used only if
#+DATE
is a single timestamp. FORMAT should be a format string
understood by format-time-string
.
{{{time(FORMAT)}}}
{{{modification-time(FORMAT, VC)}}}
These macros refer to the document’s date and time of export and date and
time of modification. FORMAT is a string understood by
format-time-string
. If the second argument to the
modification-time
macro is non-nil
, Org uses vc.el to
retrieve the document’s modification time from the version control
system. Otherwise Org reads the file attributes.
{{{input-file}}}
This macro refers to the filename of the exported file.
{{{property(PROPERTY-NAME)}}}
{{{property(PROPERTY-NAME,SEARCH-OPTION)}}}
This macro returns the value of property PROPERTY-NAME in the current entry. If SEARCH-OPTION (see Search options) refers to a remote entry, that will be used instead.
{{{n}}}
{{{n(NAME)}}}
{{{n(NAME,ACTION)}}}
This macro implements custom counters by returning the number of times the
macro has been expanded so far while exporting the buffer. You can create
more than one counter using different NAME values. If ACTION is
-
, previous value of the counter is held, i.e. the specified counter
is not incremented. If the value is a number, the specified counter is set
to that value. If it is any other non-empty string, the specified counter is
reset to 1. You may leave NAME empty to reset the default counter.
The surrounding brackets can be made invisible by setting
org-hide-macro-markers
non-nil
.
Org expands macros at the very beginning of the export process.
Next: ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export, Previous: Macro replacement, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
Lines starting with zero or more whitespace characters followed by one ‘#’ and a whitespace are treated as comments and, as such, are not exported.
Likewise, regions surrounded by #+BEGIN_COMMENT
... #+END_COMMENT
are not exported.
Finally, a ‘COMMENT’ keyword at the beginning of an entry, but after any other keyword or priority cookie, comments out the entire subtree. In this case, the subtree is not exported and no code block within it is executed either129. The command below helps changing the comment status of a headline.
Toggle the ‘COMMENT’ keyword at the beginning of an entry.
Next: Beamer export, Previous: Comment lines, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
ASCII export produces an output file containing only plain ASCII characters. This is the most simplest and direct text output. It does not contain any Org markup either. Latin-1 and UTF-8 export use additional characters and symbols available in these encoding standards. All three of these export formats offer the most basic of text output for maximum portability.
On export, Org fills and justifies text according to the text width set in
org-ascii-text-width
.
Org exports links using a footnote-like style where the descriptive part is
in the text and the link is in a note before the next heading. See the
variable org-ascii-links-to-notes
for details.
org-ascii-export-to-ascii
)Export as an ASCII file with a .txt extension. For myfile.org, Org exports to myfile.txt, overwriting without warning. For myfile.txt, Org exports to myfile.txt.txt in order to prevent data loss.
org-ascii-export-as-ascii
)Export to a temporary buffer. Does not create a file.
The ASCII export back-end has one extra keyword for customizing ASCII output. Setting this keyword works similar to the general options (see Export settings).
The document subtitle. For long subtitles, use multiple #+SUBTITLE
lines in the Org file. Org prints them on one continuous line, wrapping into
multiple lines if necessary.
Org converts the first three outline levels into headlines for ASCII export. The remaining levels are turned into lists. To change this cut-off point where levels become lists, see Export settings.
To insert text within the Org file by the ASCII back-end, use one the following constructs, inline, keyword, or export block:
Inline text @@ascii:and additional text@@ within a paragraph. #+ASCII: Some text #+BEGIN_EXPORT ascii Org exports text in this block only when using ASCII back-end. #+END_EXPORT
ASCII back-end recognizes only one attribute, :width
, which specifies
the width of a horizontal rule in number of characters. The keyword and
syntax for specifying widths is:
#+ATTR_ASCII: :width 10 -----
Besides #+BEGIN_CENTER
blocks (see Paragraphs), ASCII back-end has
these two left and right justification blocks:
#+BEGIN_JUSTIFYLEFT It's just a jump to the left... #+END_JUSTIFYLEFT #+BEGIN_JUSTIFYRIGHT ...and then a step to the right. #+END_JUSTIFYRIGHT
Next: HTML export, Previous: ASCII/Latin-1/UTF-8 export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
Org uses Beamer export to convert an Org file tree structure into a high-quality interactive slides for presentations. Beamer is a LaTeX document class for creating presentations in PDF, HTML, and other popular display formats.
• Beamer export commands: | For creating Beamer documents. | |
• Beamer specific export settings: | For customizing Beamer export. | |
• Sectioning Frames and Blocks in Beamer: | For composing Beamer slides. | |
• Beamer specific syntax: | For using in Org documents. | |
• Editing support: | For using helper functions. | |
• A Beamer example: | A complete presentation. |
Next: Beamer specific export settings, Up: Beamer export [Contents][Index]
org-beamer-export-to-latex
)Export as LaTeX file with a .tex extension. For myfile.org, Org exports to myfile.tex, overwriting without warning.
org-beamer-export-as-latex
)org-beamer-export-to-pdf
)Export as LaTeX file and then convert it to PDF format.
Export as LaTeX file, convert it to PDF format, and then open the PDF file.
Next: Sectioning Frames and Blocks in Beamer, Previous: Beamer export commands, Up: Beamer export [Contents][Index]
Beamer export back-end has several additional keywords for customizing Beamer output. These keywords work similar to the general options settings (see Export settings).
The Beamer layout theme (org-beamer-theme
). Use square brackets for
options. For example:
#+BEAMER_THEME: Rochester [height=20pt]
The Beamer font theme.
The Beamer inner theme.
The Beamer outer theme.
Arbitrary lines inserted in the preamble, just before the ‘hyperref’ settings.
The document description. For long descriptions, use multiple
#+DESCRIPTION
keywords. By default, ‘hyperref’ inserts
#+DESCRIPTION
as metadata. Use org-latex-hyperref-template
to
configure document metadata. Use org-latex-title-command
to configure
typesetting of description as part of front matter.
The keywords for defining the contents of the document. Use multiple
#+KEYWORDS
lines if necessary. By default, ‘hyperref’ inserts
#+KEYWORDS
as metadata. Use org-latex-hyperref-template
to
configure document metadata. Use org-latex-title-command
to configure
typesetting of keywords as part of front matter.
Document’s subtitle. For typesetting, use org-beamer-subtitle-format
string. Use org-latex-hyperref-template
to configure document
metadata. Use org-latex-title-command
to configure typesetting of
subtitle as part of front matter.
Next: Beamer specific syntax, Previous: Beamer specific export settings, Up: Beamer export [Contents][Index]
Org transforms heading levels into Beamer’s sectioning elements, frames and blocks. Any Org tree with a not-too-deep-level nesting should in principle be exportable as a Beamer presentation.
org-beamer-frame-level
or H
value in an OPTIONS
line
(see Export settings).
Org overrides headlines to frames conversion for the current tree of an Org
file if it encounters the BEAMER_ENV
property set to frame
or
fullframe
. Org ignores whatever org-beamer-frame-level
happens
to be for that headline level in the Org tree. In Beamer terminology, a
fullframe
is a frame without its title.
block
environments. Org can
enforce wrapping in special block types when BEAMER_ENV
property is
set130. For valid values see
org-beamer-environments-default
. To add more values, see
org-beamer-environments-extra
.
BEAMER_ENV
is set to appendix
, Org exports the entry as an
appendix. When set to note
, Org exports the entry as a note within
the frame or between frames, depending on the entry’s heading level. When
set to noteNH
, Org exports the entry as a note without its title.
When set to againframe
, Org exports the entry with \againframe
command, which makes setting the BEAMER_REF
property mandatory because
\againframe
needs frame to resume.
When ignoreheading
is set, Org export ignores the entry’s headline but
not its content. This is useful for inserting content between frames. It is
also useful for properly closing a column
environment.
When BEAMER_ACT
is set for a headline, Org export translates that
headline as an overlay or action specification. When enclosed in square
brackets, Org export makes the overlay specification a default. Use
BEAMER_OPT
to set any options applicable to the current Beamer frame
or block. The Beamer export back-end wraps with appropriate angular or
square brackets. It also adds the fragile
option for any code that may
require a verbatim block.
To create a column on the Beamer slide, use the BEAMER_COL
property
for its headline in the Org file. Set the value of BEAMER_COL
to a
decimal number representing the fraction of the total text width. Beamer
export uses this value to set the column’s width and fills the column with
the contents of the Org entry. If the Org entry has no specific environment
defined, Beamer export ignores the heading. If the Org entry has a defined
environment, Beamer export uses the heading as title. Behind the scenes,
Beamer export automatically handles LaTeX column separations for
contiguous headlines. To manually adjust them for any unique configurations
needs, use the BEAMER_ENV
property.
Next: Editing support, Previous: Sectioning Frames and Blocks in Beamer, Up: Beamer export [Contents][Index]
Since Org’s Beamer export back-end is an extension of the LaTeX back-end,
it recognizes other LaTeX specific syntax—for example, #+LATEX:
or #+ATTR_LATEX:
. See LaTeX export, for details.
Beamer export wraps the table of contents generated with toc:t
OPTION
keyword in a frame
environment. Beamer export does not
wrap the table of contents generated with TOC
keyword (see Table of contents). Use square brackets for specifying options.
#+TOC: headlines [currentsection]
Insert Beamer-specific code using the following constructs:
#+BEAMER: \pause #+BEGIN_EXPORT beamer Only Beamer export back-end will export this line. #+END_BEAMER Text @@beamer:some code@@ within a paragraph.
Inline constructs, such as the last one above, are useful for adding overlay
specifications to objects with bold
, item
, link
,
radio-target
and target
types. Enclose the value in angular
brackets and place the specification at the beginning the object as shown in
this example:
A *@@beamer:<2->@@useful* feature
Beamer export recognizes the ATTR_BEAMER
keyword with the following
attributes from Beamer configurations: :environment
for changing local
Beamer environment, :overlay
for specifying Beamer overlays in angular
or square brackets, and :options
for inserting optional arguments.
#+ATTR_BEAMER: :environment nonindentlist - item 1, not indented - item 2, not indented - item 3, not indented
#+ATTR_BEAMER: :overlay <+-> - item 1 - item 2
#+ATTR_BEAMER: :options [Lagrange] Let $G$ be a finite group, and let $H$ be a subgroup of $G$. Then the order of $H$ divides the order of $G$.
Next: A Beamer example, Previous: Beamer specific syntax, Up: Beamer export [Contents][Index]
The org-beamer-mode
is a special minor mode for faster editing of
Beamer documents.
#+STARTUP: beamer
org-beamer-select-environment
)The org-beamer-mode
provides this key for quicker selections in Beamer
normal environments, and for selecting the BEAMER_COL
property.
Previous: Editing support, Up: Beamer export [Contents][Index]
Here is an example of an Org document ready for Beamer export.
#+TITLE: Example Presentation #+AUTHOR: Carsten Dominik #+OPTIONS: H:2 toc:t num:t #+LATEX_CLASS: beamer #+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS: [presentation] #+BEAMER_THEME: Madrid #+COLUMNS: %45ITEM %10BEAMER_ENV(Env) %10BEAMER_ACT(Act) %4BEAMER_COL(Col) %8BEAMER_OPT(Opt) * This is the first structural section ** Frame 1 *** Thanks to Eric Fraga :B_block: :PROPERTIES: :BEAMER_COL: 0.48 :BEAMER_ENV: block :END: for the first viable Beamer setup in Org *** Thanks to everyone else :B_block: :PROPERTIES: :BEAMER_COL: 0.48 :BEAMER_ACT: <2-> :BEAMER_ENV: block :END: for contributing to the discussion **** This will be formatted as a beamer note :B_note: :PROPERTIES: :BEAMER_env: note :END: ** Frame 2 (where we will not use columns) *** Request Please test this stuff!
Next: LaTeX export, Previous: Beamer export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
Org mode contains an HTML exporter with extensive HTML formatting compatible with XHTML 1.0 strict standard.
• HTML Export commands: | Invoking HTML export | |
• HTML Specific export settings: | Settings for HTML export | |
• HTML doctypes: | Exporting various (X)HTML flavors | |
• HTML preamble and postamble: | Inserting preamble and postamble | |
• Quoting HTML tags: | Using direct HTML in Org files | |
• Links in HTML export: | Interpreting and formatting links | |
• Tables in HTML export: | Formatting and modifying tables | |
• Images in HTML export: | Inserting figures with HTML output | |
• Math formatting in HTML export: | Handling math equations | |
• Text areas in HTML export: | Showing an alternate approach, an example | |
• CSS support: | Styling HTML output | |
• JavaScript support: | Folding scripting in the web browser |
Next: HTML Specific export settings, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
org-html-export-to-html
)Export as HTML file with a .html extension. For myfile.org, Org exports to myfile.html, overwriting without warning. C-c C-e h o Exports to HTML and opens it in a web browser.
org-html-export-as-html
)Exports to a temporary buffer. Does not create a file.
Next: HTML doctypes, Previous: HTML Export commands, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
HTML export has a number of keywords, similar to the general options settings described in Export settings.
This is the document’s description, which the HTML exporter inserts it as a
HTML meta tag in the HTML file. For long descriptions, use multiple
#+DESCRIPTION
lines. The exporter takes care of wrapping the lines
properly.
Specify the document type, for example: HTML5 (org-html-doctype
).
Specify the HTML container, such as ‘div’, for wrapping sections and
elements (org-html-container-element
).
The URL for home link (org-html-link-home
).
The URL for the up link of exported HTML pages (org-html-link-up
).
Options for MathJax (org-html-mathjax-options
). MathJax is used to
typeset LaTeX math in HTML documents. See Math formatting in HTML export, for an example.
Arbitrary lines for appending to the HTML document’s head
(org-html-head
).
More arbitrary lines for appending to the HTML document’s head
(org-html-head-extra
).
Keywords to describe the document’s content. HTML exporter inserts these
keywords as HTML meta tags. For long keywords, use multiple
#+KEYWORDS
lines.
Arbitrary lines for appending to the preamble; HTML exporter appends when transcoding LaTeX fragments to images (see Math formatting in HTML export).
The document’s subtitle. HTML exporter formats subtitle if document type is ‘HTML5’ and the CSS has a ‘subtitle’ class.
Some of these keywords are explained in more detail in the following sections of the manual.
Next: HTML preamble and postamble, Previous: HTML Specific export settings, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
Org can export to various (X)HTML flavors.
Set the org-html-doctype
variable for different (X)HTML variants.
Depending on the variant, the HTML exporter adjusts the syntax of HTML
conversion accordingly. Org includes the following ready-made variants:
See the variable org-html-doctype-alist
for details.
The default is “xhtml-strict”.
Org’s HTML exporter does not by default enable new block elements introduced
with the HTML5 standard. To enable them, set org-html-html5-fancy
to
non-nil
. Or use an OPTIONS
line in the file to set
html5-fancy
. HTML5 documents can now have arbitrary #+BEGIN
and #+END
blocks. For example:
#+BEGIN_aside Lorem ipsum #+END_aside
Will export to:
<aside> <p>Lorem ipsum</p> </aside>
While this:
#+ATTR_HTML: :controls controls :width 350 #+BEGIN_video #+HTML: <source src="movie.mp4" type="video/mp4"> #+HTML: <source src="movie.ogg" type="video/ogg"> Your browser does not support the video tag. #+END_video
Exports to:
<video controls="controls" width="350"> <source src="movie.mp4" type="video/mp4"> <source src="movie.ogg" type="video/ogg"> <p>Your browser does not support the video tag.</p> </video>
When special blocks do not have a corresponding HTML5 element, the HTML
exporter reverts to standard translation (see
org-html-html5-elements
). For example, #+BEGIN_lederhosen
exports to ‘<div class="lederhosen">’.
Special blocks cannot have headlines. For the HTML exporter to wrap the
headline and its contents in ‘<section>’ or ‘<article>’ tags, set
the HTML_CONTAINER
property for the headline.
Next: Quoting HTML tags, Previous: HTML doctypes, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
The HTML exporter has delineations for preamble and postamble. The default
value for org-html-preamble
is t
, which makes the HTML exporter
insert the preamble. See the variable org-html-preamble-format
for
the format string.
Set org-html-preamble
to a string to override the default format
string. If the string is a function, the HTML exporter expects the function
to return a string upon execution. The HTML exporter inserts this string in
the preamble. The HTML exporter will not insert a preamble if
org-html-preamble
is set nil
.
The default value for org-html-postamble
is auto
, which makes
the HTML exporter build a postamble from looking up author’s name, email
address, creator’s name, and date. Set org-html-postamble
to t
to insert the postamble in the format specified in the
org-html-postamble-format
variable. The HTML exporter will not insert
a postamble if org-html-postamble
is set to nil
.
Next: Links in HTML export, Previous: HTML preamble and postamble, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
The HTML export back-end transforms ‘<’ and ‘>’ to ‘<’ and ‘>’. To include raw HTML code in the Org file so the HTML export back-end can insert that HTML code in the output, use this inline syntax: ‘@@html:’. For example: ‘@@html:<b>@@bold text@@html:</b>@@’. For larger raw HTML code blocks, use these HTML export code blocks:
#+HTML: Literal HTML code for export
#+BEGIN_EXPORT html All lines between these markers are exported literally #+END_EXPORT
Next: Tables in HTML export, Previous: Quoting HTML tags, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
The HTML export back-end transforms Org’s internal links (see Internal links) to equivalent HTML links in the output. The back-end similarly handles Org’s automatic links created by radio targets (see Radio targets) similarly. For Org links to external files, the back-end transforms the links to relative paths.
For Org links to other .org files, the back-end automatically changes
the file extension to .html and makes file paths relative. If the
.org files have an equivalent .html version at the same
location, then the converted links should work without any further manual
intervention. However, to disable this automatic path translation, set
org-html-link-org-files-as-html
to nil
. When disabled, the
HTML export back-end substitutes the ‘id:’-based links in the HTML
output. For more about linking files when publishing to a directory,
see Publishing links.
Org files can also have special directives to the HTML export back-end. For
example, by using #+ATTR_HTML
lines to specify new format attributes
to <a>
or <img>
tags. This example shows changing the link’s
title
and style
:
#+ATTR_HTML: :title The Org mode homepage :style color:red; [[https://orgmode.org]]
Next: Images in HTML export, Previous: Links in HTML export, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
The HTML export back-end uses org-html-table-default-attributes
when
exporting Org tables to HTML. By default, the exporter does not draw frames
and cell borders. To change for this for a table, use the following lines
before the table in the Org file:
#+CAPTION: This is a table with lines around and between cells #+ATTR_HTML: :border 2 :rules all :frame border
The HTML export back-end preserves column groupings in Org tables (see Column groups) when exporting to HTML.
Additional options for customizing tables for HTML export.
org-html-table-align-individual-fields
Non-nil
attaches style attributes for alignment to each table field.
org-html-table-caption-above
Non-nil
places caption string at the beginning of the table.
org-html-table-data-tags
Opening and ending tags for table data fields.
org-html-table-default-attributes
Default attributes and values for table tags.
org-html-table-header-tags
Opening and ending tags for table’s header fields.
org-html-table-row-tags
Opening and ending tags for table rows.
org-html-table-use-header-tags-for-first-column
Non-nil
formats column one in tables with header tags.
Next: Math formatting in HTML export, Previous: Tables in HTML export, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
The HTML export back-end has features to convert Org image links to HTML inline images and HTML clickable image links.
When the link in the Org file has no description, the HTML export back-end by default in-lines that image. For example: ‘[[file:myimg.jpg]]’ is in-lined, while ‘[[file:myimg.jpg][the image]]’ links to the text, ‘the image’.
For more details, see the variable org-html-inline-images
.
On the other hand, if the description part of the Org link is itself another
link, such as file:
or http:
URL pointing to an image, the HTML
export back-end in-lines this image and links to the main image. This Org
syntax enables the back-end to link low-resolution thumbnail to the
high-resolution version of the image, as shown in this example:
[[file:highres.jpg][file:thumb.jpg]]
To change attributes of in-lined images, use #+ATTR_HTML
lines in the
Org file. This example shows realignment to right, and adds alt
and
title
attributes in support of text viewers and modern web accessibility
standards.
#+CAPTION: A black cat stalking a spider #+ATTR_HTML: :alt cat/spider image :title Action! :align right [[./img/a.jpg]]
The HTML export back-end copies the http
links from the Org file as
is.
Next: Text areas in HTML export, Previous: Images in HTML export, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
LaTeX math snippets (see LaTeX fragments) can be displayed in two
different ways on HTML pages. The default is to use
MathJax which should work out of the box with
Org131. Some MathJax display
options can be configured via org-html-mathjax-options
, or in the
buffer. For example, with the following settings,
#+HTML_MATHJAX: align: left indent: 5em tagside: left font: Neo-Euler
equation labels will be displayed on the left margin and equations will be five ems from the left margin.
See the docstring of
org-html-mathjax-options
for all supported variables. The MathJax
template can be configure via org-html-mathjax-template
.
If you prefer, you can also request that LaTeX fragments are processed into small images that will be inserted into the browser page. Before the availability of MathJax, this was the default method for Org files. This method requires that the dvipng program, dvisvgm or imagemagick suite is available on your system. You can still get this processing with
#+OPTIONS: tex:dvipng
#+OPTIONS: tex:dvisvgm
or:
#+OPTIONS: tex:imagemagick
Next: CSS support, Previous: Math formatting in HTML export, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
Before Org mode’s Babel, one popular approach to publishing code in HTML was
by using :textarea
. The advantage of this approach was that copying
and pasting was built into browsers with simple JavaScript commands. Even
editing before pasting was made simple.
The HTML export back-end can create such text areas. It requires an
#+ATTR_HTML:
line as shown in the example below with the
:textarea
option. This must be followed by either an
example
or a src
code block. Other Org block types will not
honor the :textarea
option.
By default, the HTML export back-end creates a text area 80 characters wide
and height just enough to fit the content. Override these defaults with
:width
and :height
options on the #+ATTR_HTML:
line.
#+ATTR_HTML: :textarea t :width 40 #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE (defun org-xor (a b) "Exclusive or." (if a (not b) b)) #+END_EXAMPLE
Next: JavaScript support, Previous: Text areas in HTML export, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
You can modify the CSS style definitions for the exported file. The HTML exporter assigns the following special CSS classes132 to appropriate parts of the document—your style specifications may change these, in addition to any of the standard classes like for headlines, tables, etc.
p.author author information, including email
p.date publishing date
p.creator creator info, about org mode version
.title document title
.subtitle document subtitle
.todo TODO keywords, all not-done states
.done the DONE keywords, all states that count as done
.WAITING each TODO keyword also uses a class named after itself
.timestamp timestamp
.timestamp-kwd keyword associated with a timestamp, like SCHEDULED
.timestamp-wrapper span around keyword plus timestamp
.tag tag in a headline
._HOME each tag uses itself as a class, "@" replaced by "_"
.target target for links
.linenr the line number in a code example
.code-highlighted for highlighting referenced code lines
div.outline-N div for outline level N (headline plus text))
div.outline-text-N extra div for text at outline level N
.section-number-N section number in headlines, different for each level
.figure-number label like "Figure 1:"
.table-number label like "Table 1:"
.listing-number label like "Listing 1:"
div.figure how to format an in-lined image
pre.src formatted source code
pre.example normal example
p.verse verse paragraph
div.footnotes footnote section headline
p.footnote footnote definition paragraph, containing a footnote
.footref a footnote reference number (always a <sup>)
.footnum footnote number in footnote definition (always <sup>)
.org-svg default class for a linked .svg image
The HTML export back-end includes a compact default style in each exported HTML file. To override the default style with another style, use these keywords in the Org file. They will replace the global defaults the HTML exporter uses.
#+HTML_HEAD: <link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="style1.css" /> #+HTML_HEAD_EXTRA: <link rel="alternate stylesheet" type="text/css" href="style2.css" />
To just turn off the default style, customize
org-html-head-include-default-style
variable, or use this option line in
the Org file.
#+OPTIONS: html-style:nil
For longer style definitions, either use several #+HTML_HEAD
and
#+HTML_HEAD_EXTRA
lines, or use <style>
</style>
blocks
around them. Both of these approaches can avoid referring to an external
file.
In order to add styles to a sub-tree, use the :HTML_CONTAINER_CLASS:
property to assign a class to the tree. In order to specify CSS styles for a
particular headline, you can use the id specified in a :CUSTOM_ID:
property.
Never change the org-html-style-default
constant. Instead use other
simpler ways of customizing as described above.
Previous: CSS support, Up: HTML export [Contents][Index]
Sebastian Rose has written a JavaScript program especially designed to enhance the web viewing experience of HTML files created with Org. This program enhances large files in two different ways of viewing. One is an Info-like mode where each section is displayed separately and navigation can be done with the n and p keys (and some other keys as well, press ? for an overview of the available keys). The second one has a folding view, much like Org provides inside Emacs. The script is available at https://orgmode.org/org-info.js and the documentation at https://orgmode.org/worg/code/org-info-js/. The script is hosted on https://orgmode.org, but for reliability, prefer installing it on your own web server.
To use this program, just add this line to the Org file:
#+INFOJS_OPT: view:info toc:nil
The HTML header now has the code needed to automatically invoke the script. For setting options, use the syntax from the above line for options described below:
path: The path to the script. The default grabs the script from https://orgmode.org/org-info.js, but you might want to have a local copy and use a path like ‘../scripts/org-info.js’. view: Initial view when the website is first shown. Possible values are: info Info-like interface with one section per page. overview Folding interface, initially showing only top-level. content Folding interface, starting with all headlines visible. showall Folding interface, all headlines and text visible. sdepth: Maximum headline level that will still become an independent section for info and folding modes. The default is taken fromorg-export-headline-levels
(= theH
switch in#+OPTIONS
). If this is smaller than inorg-export-headline-levels
, each info/folding section can still contain child headlines. toc: Should the table of contents initially be visible? Even whennil
, you can always get to the "toc" with i. tdepth: The depth of the table of contents. The defaults are taken from the variablesorg-export-headline-levels
andorg-export-with-toc
. ftoc: Does the CSS of the page specify a fixed position for the "toc"? If yes, the toc will never be displayed as a section. ltoc: Should there be short contents (children) in each section? Make thisabove
if the section should be above initial text. mouse: Headings are highlighted when the mouse is over them. Should be ‘underline’ (default) or a background color like ‘#cccccc’. buttons: Should view-toggle buttons be everywhere? Whennil
(the default), only one such button will be present.
You can choose default values for these options by customizing the variable
org-html-infojs-options
. If you want the script to always apply to
your pages, configure the variable org-html-use-infojs
.
Next: Markdown export, Previous: HTML export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end can handle complex documents, incorporate standard or custom LaTeX document classes, generate documents using alternate LaTeX engines, and produce fully linked PDF files with indexes, bibliographies, and tables of contents, destined for interactive online viewing or high-quality print publication.
While the details are covered in-depth in this section, here are some quick
references to variables for the impatient: for engines, see
org-latex-compiler
; for build sequences, see
org-latex-pdf-process
; for packages, see
org-latex-default-packages-alist
and org-latex-packages-alist
.
An important note about the LaTeX export back-end: it is sensitive to blank lines in the Org document. That’s because LaTeX itself depends on blank lines to tell apart syntactical elements, such as paragraphs.
• LaTeX export commands: | For producing LaTeX and PDF documents. | |
• LaTeX specific export settings: | Unique to this LaTeX back-end. | |
• LaTeX header and sectioning: | For file structure. | |
• Quoting LaTeX code: | Directly in the Org document. | |
• Tables in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to tables. | |
• Images in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to images. | |
• Plain lists in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to lists. | |
• Source blocks in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to source code blocks. | |
• Example blocks in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to example blocks. | |
• Special blocks in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to special blocks. | |
• Horizontal rules in LaTeX export: | Attributes specific to horizontal rules. |
Next: LaTeX specific export settings, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
org-latex-export-to-latex
)Export as LaTeX file with a .tex extension. For myfile.org, Org exports to myfile.tex, overwriting without warning. C-c C-e l l Exports to LaTeX file.
org-latex-export-as-latex
)org-latex-export-to-pdf
)Export as LaTeX file and convert it to PDF file.
Export as LaTeX file and convert it to PDF, then open the PDF using the default viewer.
The LaTeX export back-end can use any of these LaTeX engines:
‘pdflatex’, ‘xelatex’, and ‘lualatex’. These engines compile
LaTeX files with different compilers, packages, and output options. The
LaTeX export back-end finds the compiler version to use from
org-latex-compiler
variable or the #+LATEX_COMPILER
keyword in
the Org file. See the docstring for the
org-latex-default-packages-alist
for loading packages with certain
compilers. Also see org-latex-bibtex-compiler
to set the bibliography
compiler133.
Next: LaTeX header and sectioning, Previous: LaTeX export commands, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end has several additional keywords for customizing LaTeX output. Setting these keywords works similar to the general options (see Export settings).
The document’s description. The description along with author name,
keywords, and related file metadata are inserted in the output file by the
‘hyperref’ package. See org-latex-hyperref-template
for
customizing metadata items. See org-latex-title-command
for
typesetting description into the document’s front matter. Use multiple
#+DESCRIPTION
lines for long descriptions.
This is LaTeX document class, such as article
, report
,
book
, and so on, which contain predefined preamble and headline level
mapping that the LaTeX export back-end needs. The back-end reads the
default class name from the org-latex-default-class
variable. Org has
article
as the default class. A valid default class must be an
element of org-latex-classes
.
Options the LaTeX export back-end uses when calling the LaTeX document class.
The compiler, such as ‘pdflatex’, ‘xelatex’, ‘lualatex’, for
producing the PDF (org-latex-compiler
).
Arbitrary lines to add to the document’s preamble, before the ‘hyperref’
settings. See org-latex-classes
for adjusting the structure and order
of the LaTeX headers.
Arbitrary lines to add to the document’s preamble, before the ‘hyperref’
settings. See org-latex-classes
for adjusting the structure and order
of the LaTeX headers.
The keywords for the document. The description along with author name,
keywords, and related file metadata are inserted in the output file by the
‘hyperref’ package. See org-latex-hyperref-template
for
customizing metadata items. See org-latex-title-command
for
typesetting description into the document’s front matter. Use multiple
#+KEYWORDS
lines if necessary.
The document’s subtitle. It is typeset as per
org-latex-subtitle-format
. If org-latex-subtitle-separate
is
non-nil
, it is typed as part of the ‘\title’-macro. See
org-latex-hyperref-template
for customizing metadata items. See
org-latex-title-command
for typesetting description into the
document’s front matter.
The following sections have further details.
Next: Quoting LaTeX code, Previous: LaTeX specific export settings, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end converts the first three of Org’s outline levels
into LaTeX headlines. The remaining Org levels are exported as
itemize
or enumerate
lists. To change this globally for the
cut-off point between levels and lists, (see Export settings).
By default, the LaTeX export back-end uses the article
class.
To change the default class globally, edit org-latex-default-class
.
To change the default class locally in an Org file, add option lines
#+LATEX_CLASS: myclass
. To change the default class for just a part
of the Org file, set a sub-tree property, EXPORT_LATEX_CLASS
. The
class name entered here must be valid member of org-latex-classes
.
This variable defines a header template for each class into which the
exporter splices the values of org-latex-default-packages-alist
and
org-latex-packages-alist
. Use the same three variables to define
custom sectioning or custom classes.
The LaTeX export back-end sends the LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS
keyword and
EXPORT_LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS
property as options to the LaTeX
\documentclass
macro. The options and the syntax for specifying them,
including enclosing them in square brackets, follow LaTeX conventions.
#+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS: [a4paper,11pt,twoside,twocolumn]
The LaTeX export back-end appends values from LATEX_HEADER
and
LATEX_HEADER_EXTRA
keywords to the LaTeX header. The docstring for
org-latex-classes
explains in more detail. Also note that LaTeX
export back-end does not append LATEX_HEADER_EXTRA
to the header when
previewing LaTeX snippets (see Previewing LaTeX fragments).
A sample Org file with the above headers:
#+LATEX_CLASS: article #+LATEX_CLASS_OPTIONS: [a4paper] #+LATEX_HEADER: \usepackage{xyz} * Headline 1 some text * Headline 2 some more text
Next: Tables in LaTeX export, Previous: LaTeX header and sectioning, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end can insert any arbitrary LaTeX code, see Embedded LaTeX. There are three ways to embed such code in the Org file and they all use different quoting syntax.
Inserting in-line quoted with symbols:
Code embedded in-line @@latex:any arbitrary LaTeX code@@ in a paragraph.
Inserting as one or more keyword lines in the Org file:
#+LATEX: any arbitrary LaTeX code
Inserting as an export block in the Org file, where the back-end exports any code between begin and end markers:
#+BEGIN_EXPORT latex any arbitrary LaTeX code #+END_EXPORT
Next: Images in LaTeX export, Previous: Quoting LaTeX code, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end can pass several LaTeX attributes for table contents and layout. Besides specifying label and caption (see Images and tables), the other valid LaTeX attributes include:
:mode
The LaTeX export back-end wraps the table differently depending on the
mode for accurate rendering of math symbols. Mode is either table
,
math
, inline-math
or verbatim
. For math
or
inline-math
mode, LaTeX export back-end wraps the table in a math
environment, but every cell in it is exported as-is. The LaTeX export
back-end determines the default mode from
org-latex-default-table-mode
. For , The LaTeX export back-end
merges contiguous tables in the same mode into a single environment.
:environment
Set the default LaTeX table environment for the LaTeX export back-end
to use when exporting Org tables. Common LaTeX table environments are
provided by these packages: tabularx
, longtable
, array
,
tabu
, and bmatrix
. For packages, such as tabularx
and
tabu
, or any newer replacements, include them in the
org-latex-packages-alist
variable so the LaTeX export back-end can
insert the appropriate load package headers in the converted LaTeX file.
Look in the docstring for the org-latex-packages-alist
variable for
configuring these packages for LaTeX snippet previews, if any.
:caption
Use #+CAPTION
keyword to set a simple caption for a table
(see Images and tables). For custom captions, use :caption
attribute, which accepts raw LaTeX code. :caption
value overrides
#+CAPTION
value.
:float
:placement
The table environments by default are not floats in LaTeX. To make them
floating objects use :float
with one of the following options:
sideways
, multicolumn
, t
, and nil
. Note that
sidewaystable
has been deprecated since Org 8.3. LaTeX floats can
also have additional layout :placement
attributes. These are the
usual [h t b p ! H]
permissions specified in square brackets. Note
that for :float sideways
tables, the LaTeX export back-end ignores
:placement
attributes.
:align
:font
:width
The LaTeX export back-end uses these attributes for regular tables to set their alignments, fonts, and widths.
:spread
When :spread
is non-nil
, the LaTeX export back-end spreads
or shrinks the table by the :width
for tabu
and longtabu
environments. :spread
has no effect if :width
is not set.
:booktabs
:center
:rmlines
All three commands are toggles. :booktabs
brings in modern
typesetting enhancements to regular tables. The booktabs
package has
to be loaded through org-latex-packages-alist
. :center
is for
centering the table. :rmlines
removes all but the very first
horizontal line made of ASCII characters from "table.el" tables only.
:math-prefix
:math-suffix
:math-arguments
The LaTeX export back-end inserts :math-prefix
string value in a
math environment before the table. The LaTeX export back-end inserts
:math-suffix
string value in a math environment after the table. The
LaTeX export back-end inserts :math-arguments
string value between
the macro name and the table’s contents. :math-arguments
comes in use
for matrix macros that require more than one argument, such as
qbordermatrix
.
LaTeX table attributes help formatting tables for a wide range of situations, such as matrix product or spanning multiple pages:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :environment longtable :align l|lp{3cm}r|l | ..... | ..... | | ..... | ..... | #+ATTR_LATEX: :mode math :environment bmatrix :math-suffix \times | a | b | | c | d | #+ATTR_LATEX: :mode math :environment bmatrix | 1 | 2 | | 3 | 4 |
Set the caption with the LaTeX command
\bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB}
:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB} | ..... | ..... | | ..... | ..... |
Next: Plain lists in LaTeX export, Previous: Tables in LaTeX export, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end processes image links in Org files that do not
have descriptions, such as these links ‘[[file:img.jpg]]’ or
‘[[./img.jpg]]’, as direct image insertions in the final PDF output. In
the PDF, they are no longer links but actual images embedded on the page.
The LaTeX export back-end uses \includegraphics
macro to insert the
image. But for TikZ134
images, the back-end uses an \input
macro wrapped within
a tikzpicture
environment.
For specifying image :width
, :height
, and other
:options
, use this syntax:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :width 5cm :options angle=90 [[./img/sed-hr4049.pdf]]
For custom commands for captions, use the :caption
attribute. It will
override the default #+CAPTION
value:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \bicaption{HeadingA}{HeadingB} [[./img/sed-hr4049.pdf]]
When captions follow the method as described in Images and tables, the
LaTeX export back-end wraps the picture in a floating figure
environment. To float an image without specifying a caption, set the
:float
attribute to one of the following:
t
: for a standard ‘figure’ environment; used by default whenever
an image has a caption.
multicolumn
: to span the image across multiple columns of a page; the
back-end wraps the image in a figure*
environment.
wrap
: for text to flow around the image on the right; the figure
occupies the left half of the page.
sideways
: for a new page with the image sideways, rotated ninety
degrees, in a sidewaysfigure
environment; overrides :placement
setting.
nil
: to avoid a :float
even if using a caption.
Use the placement
attribute to modify a floating environment’s placement.
#+ATTR_LATEX: :float wrap :width 0.38\textwidth :placement {r}{0.4\textwidth} [[./img/hst.png]]
The LaTeX export back-end centers all images by default. Setting
:center
attribute to nil
disables centering. To disable
centering globally, set org-latex-images-centered
to t
.
Set the :comment-include
attribute to non-nil
value for the
LaTeX export back-end to comment out the \includegraphics
macro.
Next: Source blocks in LaTeX export, Previous: Images in LaTeX export, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end accepts the :environment
and
:options
attributes for plain lists. Both attributes work together
for customizing lists, as shown in the examples:
#+LATEX_HEADER: \usepackage[inline]{enumitem} Some ways to say "Hello": #+ATTR_LATEX: :environment itemize* #+ATTR_LATEX: :options [label={}, itemjoin={,}, itemjoin*={, and}] - Hola - Bonjour - Guten Tag.
Since LaTeX supports only four levels of nesting for lists, use an external package, such as ‘enumitem’ in LaTeX, for levels deeper than four:
#+LATEX_HEADER: \usepackage{enumitem} #+LATEX_HEADER: \renewlist{itemize}{itemize}{9} #+LATEX_HEADER: \setlist[itemize]{label=$\circ$} - One - Two - Three - Four - Five
Next: Example blocks in LaTeX export, Previous: Plain lists in LaTeX export, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end can make source code blocks into floating
objects through the attributes :float
and :options
. For
:float
:
t
: makes a source block float; by default floats any source block with
a caption.
multicolumn
: spans the source block across multiple columns of a page.
nil
: avoids a :float
even if using a caption; useful for
source code blocks that may not fit on a page.
#+ATTR_LATEX: :float nil #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp Lisp code that may not fit in a single page. #+END_SRC
The LaTeX export back-end passes string values in :options
to
LaTeX packages for customization of that specific source block. In the
example below, the :options
are set for Minted. Minted is a source
code highlighting LaTeXpackage with many configurable options.
#+ATTR_LATEX: :options commentstyle=\bfseries #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (defun Fib (n) (if (< n 2) n (+ (Fib (- n 1)) (Fib (- n 2))))) #+END_SRC
To apply similar configuration options for all source blocks in a file, use
the org-latex-listings-options
and org-latex-minted-options
variables.
Next: Special blocks in LaTeX export, Previous: Source blocks in LaTeX export, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end wraps the contents of example blocks in a
‘verbatim’ environment. To change this behavior to use another
environment globally, specify an appropriate export filter (see Advanced configuration). To change this behavior to use another environment for each
block, use the :environment
parameter to specify a custom environment.
#+ATTR_LATEX: :environment myverbatim #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE This sentence is false. #+END_EXAMPLE
Next: Horizontal rules in LaTeX export, Previous: Example blocks in LaTeX export, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
For other special blocks in the Org file, the LaTeX export back-end makes
a special environment of the same name. The back-end also takes
:options
, if any, and appends as-is to that environment’s opening
string. For example:
#+BEGIN_abstract We demonstrate how to solve the Syracuse problem. #+END_abstract #+ATTR_LATEX: :options [Proof of important theorem] #+BEGIN_proof ... Therefore, any even number greater than 2 is the sum of two primes. #+END_proof
exports to
\begin{abstract} We demonstrate how to solve the Syracuse problem. \end{abstract} \begin{proof}[Proof of important theorem] ... Therefore, any even number greater than 2 is the sum of two primes. \end{proof}
If you need to insert a specific caption command, use :caption
attribute. It will override standard #+CAPTION
value, if any. For
example:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :caption \MyCaption{HeadingA} #+BEGIN_proof ... #+END_proof
Previous: Special blocks in LaTeX export, Up: LaTeX export [Contents][Index]
The LaTeX export back-end converts horizontal rules by the specified
:width
and :thickness
attributes. For example:
#+ATTR_LATEX: :width .6\textwidth :thickness 0.8pt -----
Next: OpenDocument Text export, Previous: LaTeX export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
The Markdown export back-end, md
, converts an Org file to Markdown
format, as defined at http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/.
The md
back-end is built on top of the HTML back-end (see HTML export). As a consequence, it converts every Org construct not supported by
Markdown syntax, such as tables, to HTML.
org-md-export-to-markdown
)Export to a text file with Markdown syntax. For myfile.org, Org exports to myfile.md, overwritten without warning.
org-md-export-as-markdown
)Export to a temporary buffer. Does not create a file.
Export as a text file with Markdown syntax, then open it.
Based on org-md-headline-style
, markdown export can generate headlines
of both atx
and setext
types. atx
limits headline
levels to two. setext
limits headline levels to six. Beyond these
limits, the export back-end converts headlines to lists. To set a limit to a
level before the absolute limit (see Export settings).
Next: Org export, Previous: Markdown export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end handles creating of OpenDocument Text (ODT) format files. The format complies with OpenDocument-v1.2 specification135 and is compatible with LibreOffice 3.4.
• Pre-requisites for ODT export: | Required packages. | |
• ODT export commands: | Invoking export. | |
• ODT specific export settings: | Configuration options. | |
• Extending ODT export: | Producing .doc, .pdf files. | |
• Applying custom styles: | Styling the output. | |
• Links in ODT export: | Handling and formatting links. | |
• Tables in ODT export: | Org table conversions. | |
• Images in ODT export: | Inserting images. | |
• Math formatting in ODT export: | Formatting LaTeX fragments. | |
• Labels and captions in ODT export: | Rendering objects. | |
• Literal examples in ODT export: | For source code and example blocks. | |
• Advanced topics in ODT export: | For power users. |
Next: ODT export commands, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end relies on the zip program to create the final compressed ODT output. Check if zip is locally available and executable. Without zip, export cannot finish.
Next: ODT specific export settings, Previous: Pre-requisites for ODT export, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
org-odt-export-to-odt
)Export as OpenDocument Text file.
If org-odt-preferred-output-format
is specified, the ODT export
back-end automatically converts the exported file to that format.
See Automatically exporting to other formats.
For myfile.org, Org exports to myfile.odt, overwriting without
warning. The ODT export back-end exports a region only if a region was
active. Note for exporting active regions, the transient-mark-mode
has to be turned on.
If the selected region is a single tree, the ODT export back-end makes the
tree head the document title. Incidentally, C-c @ selects the current
sub-tree. If the tree head entry has, or inherits, an
EXPORT_FILE_NAME
property, the ODT export back-end uses that for file
name.
C-c C-e o O Export to an OpenDocument Text file format and open it.
When org-odt-preferred-output-format
is specified, open the converted
file instead. See Automatically exporting to
other formats.
Next: Extending ODT export, Previous: ODT export commands, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end has several additional keywords for customizing ODT output. Setting these keywords works similar to the general options (see Export settings).
This is the document’s description, which the ODT export back-end inserts as
document metadata. For long descriptions, use multiple #+DESCRIPTION
lines.
The keywords for the document. The ODT export back-end inserts the
description along with author name, keywords, and related file metadata as
metadata in the output file. Use multiple #+KEYWORDS
lines if
necessary.
The ODT export back-end uses the org-odt-styles-file
by default. See
Applying custom styles for details.
The document subtitle.
Next: Applying custom styles, Previous: ODT specific export settings, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end can produce documents in other formats besides ODT using a specialized ODT converter process. Its common interface works with popular converters to produce formats such as ‘doc’, or convert a document from one format, say ‘csv’, to another format, say ‘xls’.
Customize org-odt-convert-process
variable to point to unoconv
,
which is the ODT’s preferred converter. Working installations of LibreOffice
would already have unoconv
installed. Alternatively, other converters
may be substituted here. See Configuring a document converter.
If ODT format is just an intermediate step to get to other formats, such as
‘doc’, ‘docx’, ‘rtf’, or ‘pdf’, etc., then extend the ODT
export back-end to directly produce that format. Specify the final format in
the org-odt-preferred-output-format
variable. This is one way to
extend (see Exporting to ODT).
The Org export back-end is made to be inter-operable with a wide range of text document format converters. Newer generation converters, such as LibreOffice and Pandoc, can handle hundreds of formats at once. Org provides a consistent interaction with whatever converter is installed. Here are some generic commands:
Convert an existing document from one format to another. With a prefix argument, opens the newly produced file.
Next: Links in ODT export, Previous: Extending ODT export, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end comes with many OpenDocument styles (see Working with OpenDocument style files). To expand or further customize these built-in style sheets, either edit the style sheets directly or generate them using an application such as LibreOffice. The example here shows creating a style using LibreOffice.
#+OPTIONS: H:10 num:t
org-odt-styles-file
and point it to the
newly created file. For additional configuration options
see Overriding factory styles.
To apply and ODT style to a particular file, use the #+ODT_STYLES_FILE
option as shown in the example below:
#+ODT_STYLES_FILE: "/path/to/example.ott"
or
#+ODT_STYLES_FILE: ("/path/to/file.ott" ("styles.xml" "image/hdr.png"))
The ODT export back-end relies on many templates and style names. Using third-party styles and templates can lead to mismatches. Templates derived from built in ODT templates and styles seem to have fewer problems.
Next: Tables in ODT export, Previous: Applying custom styles, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
ODT export back-end creates native cross-references for internal links and Internet-style links for all other link types.
A link with no description and pointing to a regular—un-itemized—outline heading is replaced with a cross-reference and section number of the heading.
A ‘\ref{label}’-style reference to an image, table etc. is replaced with a cross-reference and sequence number of the labeled entity. See Labels and captions in ODT export.
Next: Images in ODT export, Previous: Links in ODT export, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end handles native Org mode tables (see Tables) and simple table.el tables. Complex table.el tables having column or row spans are not supported. Such tables are stripped from the exported document.
By default, the ODT export back-end exports a table with top and bottom frames and with ruled lines separating row and column groups (see Column groups). All tables are typeset to occupy the same width. The ODT export back-end honors any table alignments and relative widths for columns (see Column width and alignment).
Note that the ODT export back-end interprets column widths as weighted ratios, the default weight being 1.
Specifying :rel-width
property on an #+ATTR_ODT
line controls
the width of the table. For example:
#+ATTR_ODT: :rel-width 50 | Area/Month | Jan | Feb | Mar | Sum | |---------------+-------+-------+-------+-------| | / | < | | | < | | <l13> | <r5> | <r5> | <r5> | <r6> | | North America | 1 | 21 | 926 | 948 | | Middle East | 6 | 75 | 844 | 925 | | Asia Pacific | 9 | 27 | 790 | 826 | |---------------+-------+-------+-------+-------| | Sum | 16 | 123 | 2560 | 2699 |
On export, the above table takes 50% of text width area. The exporter sizes the columns in the ratio: 13:5:5:5:6. The first column is left-aligned and rest of the columns, right-aligned. Vertical rules separate the header and the last column. Horizontal rules separate the header and the last row.
For even more customization, create custom table styles and associate them
with a table using the #+ATTR_ODT
line. See Customizing tables in ODT export.
Next: Math formatting in ODT export, Previous: Tables in ODT export, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end processes image links in Org files that do not have descriptions, such as these links ‘[[file:img.jpg]]’ or ‘[[./img.jpg]]’, as direct image insertions in the final output. Either of these examples works:
[[file:img.png]]
[[./img.png]]
For clickable images, provide a link whose description is another link to an image file. For example, to embed an image org-mode-unicorn.png which when clicked jumps to https://orgmode.org website, do the following
[[https://orgmode.org][./org-mode-unicorn.png]]
Control the size and scale of the embedded images with the #+ATTR_ODT
attribute.
The ODT export back-end starts with establishing the size of the image in the
final document. The dimensions of this size is measured in centimeters. The
back-end then queries the image file for its dimensions measured in pixels.
For this measurement, the back-end relies on ImageMagick’s identify
program or Emacs create-image
and image-size
API. ImageMagick
is the preferred choice for large file sizes or frequent batch operations.
The back-end then converts the pixel dimensions using
org-odt-pixels-per-inch
into the familiar 72 dpi or 96 dpi. The
default value for this is in display-pixels-per-inch
, which can be
tweaked for better results based on the capabilities of the output device.
Here are some common image scaling operations:
To embed img.png as a 10 cm x 10 cm image, do the following:
#+ATTR_ODT: :width 10 :height 10 [[./img.png]]
To embed img.png at half its size, do the following:
#+ATTR_ODT: :scale 0.5 [[./img.png]]
To embed img.png with a width of 10 cm while retaining the original height:width ratio, do the following:
#+ATTR_ODT: :width 10 [[./img.png]]
To embed img.png with a height of 10 cm while retaining the original height:width ratio, do the following
#+ATTR_ODT: :height 10 [[./img.png]]
The ODT export back-end can anchor images to ‘"as-char"’,
‘"paragraph"’, or ‘"page"’. Set the preferred anchor using the
:anchor
property of the #+ATTR_ODT
line.
To create an image that is anchored to a page:
#+ATTR_ODT: :anchor "page" [[./img.png]]
Next: Labels and captions in ODT export, Previous: Images in ODT export, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end has special support built-in for handling math.
• Working with LaTeX math snippets: | Embedding in LaTeX format. | |
• Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files: | Embedding in native format. |
Next: Working with MathML or OpenDocument formula files, Up: Math formatting in ODT export [Contents][Index]
LaTeX math snippets (see LaTeX fragments) can be embedded in an ODT document in one of the following ways:
Add this line to the Org file. This option is activated on a per-file basis.
#+OPTIONS: LaTeX:t
With this option, LaTeX fragments are first converted into MathML fragments using an external LaTeX-to-MathML converter program. The resulting MathML fragments are then embedded as an OpenDocument Formula in the exported document.
To specify the LaTeX-to-MathML converter, customize the variables
org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command
and
org-latex-to-mathml-jar-file
.
To use MathToWeb136 as the preferred converter, configure the above variables as
(setq org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command "java -jar %j -unicode -force -df %o %I" org-latex-to-mathml-jar-file "/path/to/mathtoweb.jar")
To use LaTeXML137 use
(setq org-latex-to-mathml-convert-command "latexmlmath \"%i\" --presentationmathml=%o")
To quickly verify the reliability of the LaTeX-to-MathML converter, use the following commands:
Convert a LaTeX math snippet to an OpenDocument formula (.odf) file.
Convert a LaTeX math snippet to an OpenDocument formula (.odf) file and open the formula file with the system-registered application.
Add this line to the Org file. This option is activated on a per-file basis.
#+OPTIONS: tex:dvipng
#+OPTIONS: tex:dvisvgm
or:
#+OPTIONS: tex:imagemagick
Under this option, LaTeX fragments are processed into PNG or SVG images and the resulting images are embedded in the exported document. This method requires dvipng program, dvisvgm or imagemagick programs.
Previous: Working with LaTeX math snippets, Up: Math formatting in ODT export [Contents][Index]
When embedding LaTeX math snippets in ODT documents is not reliable, there is one more option to try. Embed an equation by linking to its MathML (.mml) source or its OpenDocument formula (.odf) file as shown below:
[[./equation.mml]]
or
[[./equation.odf]]
Next: Literal examples in ODT export, Previous: Math formatting in ODT export, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
ODT format handles labeling and captioning of objects based on their types. Inline images, tables, LaTeX fragments, and Math formulas are numbered and captioned separately. Each object also gets a unique sequence number based on its order of first appearance in the Org file. Each category has its own sequence. A caption is just a label applied to these objects.
#+CAPTION: Bell curve #+LABEL: fig:SED-HR4049 [[./img/a.png]]
When rendered, it may show as follows in the exported document:
Figure 2: Bell curve
To modify the category component of the caption, customize the option
org-odt-category-map-alist
. For example, to tag embedded images with
the string ‘Illustration’ instead of the default string ‘Figure’,
use the following setting:
(setq org-odt-category-map-alist '(("__Figure__" "Illustration" "value" "Figure" org-odt--enumerable-image-p)))
With the above modification, the previous example changes to:
Illustration 2: Bell curve
Next: Advanced topics in ODT export, Previous: Labels and captions in ODT export, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end supports literal examples (see Literal examples)
with full fontification. Internally, the ODT export back-end relies on
htmlfontify.el to generate the style definitions needed for fancy
listings. The auto-generated styles get ‘OrgSrc’ prefix and inherit
colors from the faces used by Emacs font-lock
library for that source
language.
For custom fontification styles, customize the
org-odt-create-custom-styles-for-srcblocks
option.
To turn off fontification of literal examples, customize the
org-odt-fontify-srcblocks
option.
Previous: Literal examples in ODT export, Up: OpenDocument Text export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end has extensive features useful for power users and frequent uses of ODT formats.
• Configuring a document converter: | Registering a document converter. | |
• Working with OpenDocument style files: | Exploring internals. | |
• Creating one-off styles: | Customizing styles, highlighting. | |
• Customizing tables in ODT export: | Defining table templates. | |
• Validating OpenDocument XML: | Debugging corrupted OpenDocument files. |
The ODT export back-end works with popular converters with little or no extra configuration. See Extending ODT export. The following is for unsupported converters or tweaking existing defaults.
Add the name of the converter to the org-odt-convert-processes
variable. Note that it also requires how the converter is invoked on the
command line. See the variable’s docstring for details.
Specify which formats the converter can
handle by customizing the variable org-odt-convert-capabilities
. Use
the entry for the default values in this variable for configuring the new
converter. Also see its docstring for details.
Select the newly added converter as the preferred one by customizing the
option org-odt-convert-process
.
Next: Creating one-off styles, Previous: Configuring a document converter, Up: Advanced topics in ODT export [Contents][Index]
This section explores the internals of the ODT exporter; the means by which it produces styled documents; the use of automatic and custom OpenDocument styles.
The ODT exporter relies on two files for generating its output.
These files are bundled with the distribution under the directory pointed to
by the variable org-odt-styles-dir
. The two files are:
This file contributes to the styles.xml file of the final ‘ODT’ document. This file gets modified for the following purposes:
This file contributes to the content.xml file of the final ‘ODT’ document. The contents of the Org outline are inserted between the ‘<office:text>’…‘</office:text>’ elements of this file.
Apart from serving as a template file for the final content.xml, the file serves the following purposes:
The following two variables control the location from where the ODT exporter picks up the custom styles and content template files. Customize these variables to override the factory styles used by the exporter.
org-odt-styles-file
The ODT export back-end uses the file pointed to by this variable, such as styles.xml, for the final output. It can take one of the following values:
Use this file instead of the default styles.xml
Use the styles.xml contained in the specified OpenDocument Text or Template file
Use the styles.xml contained in the specified OpenDocument Text or Template file. Additionally extract the specified member files and embed those within the final ‘ODT’ document.
Use this option if the styles.xml file references additional files like header and footer images.
nil
Use the default styles.xml
org-odt-content-template-file
Use this variable to specify the blank content.xml that will be used in the final output.
Next: Customizing tables in ODT export, Previous: Working with OpenDocument style files, Up: Advanced topics in ODT export [Contents][Index]
The ODT export back-end can read embedded raw OpenDocument XML from the Org file. Such direct formatting are useful for one-off instances.
Enclose OpenDocument syntax in ‘@@odt:...@@’ for inline markup. For example, to highlight a region of text do the following:
@@odt:<text:span text:style-name="Highlight">This is highlighted text</text:span>@@. But this is regular text.
Hint: To see the above example in action, edit the styles.xml (see Factory styles) and add a custom ‘Highlight’ style as shown below:
<style:style style:name="Highlight" style:family="text"> <style:text-properties fo:background-color="#ff0000"/> </style:style>
The ODT export back-end can read one-liner options with #+ODT:
in the Org file. For example, to force a page break:
#+ODT: <text:p text:style-name="PageBreak"/>
Hint: To see the above example in action, edit your styles.xml (see Factory styles) and add a custom ‘PageBreak’ style as shown below.
<style:style style:name="PageBreak" style:family="paragraph" style:parent-style-name="Text_20_body"> <style:paragraph-properties fo:break-before="page"/> </style:style>
The ODT export back-end can also read ODT export blocks for OpenDocument XML.
Such blocks use the #+BEGIN_EXPORT odt
…#+END_EXPORT
constructs.
For example, to create a one-off paragraph that uses bold text, do the following:
#+BEGIN_EXPORT odt <text:p text:style-name="Text_20_body_20_bold"> This paragraph is specially formatted and uses bold text. </text:p> #+END_EXPORT
Next: Validating OpenDocument XML, Previous: Creating one-off styles, Up: Advanced topics in ODT export [Contents][Index]
Override the default table format by specifying a custom table style with the
#+ATTR_ODT
line. For a discussion on default formatting of tables
see Tables in ODT export.
This feature closely mimics the way table templates are defined in the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification.138
For quick preview of this feature, install the settings below and export the table that follows:
(setq org-odt-table-styles (append org-odt-table-styles '(("TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn" "Custom" ((use-first-row-styles . t) (use-first-column-styles . t))) ("TableWithFirstRowandLastRow" "Custom" ((use-first-row-styles . t) (use-last-row-styles . t))))))
#+ATTR_ODT: :style TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn | Name | Phone | Age | | Peter | 1234 | 17 | | Anna | 4321 | 25 |
The example above used ‘Custom’ template and installed two table styles ‘TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn’ and ‘TableWithFirstRowandLastRow’. Important: The OpenDocument styles needed for producing the above template were pre-defined. They are available in the section marked ‘Custom Table Template’ in OrgOdtContentTemplate.xml (see Factory styles. For adding new templates, define new styles here.
To use this feature proceed as follows:
A table template is set of ‘table-cell’ and ‘paragraph’ styles for each of the following table cell categories:
The names for the above styles must be chosen based on the name of the table template using a well-defined convention.
The naming convention is better illustrated with an example. For a table template with the name ‘Custom’, the needed style names are listed in the following table.
Table cell type | table-cell style | paragraph style |
---|---|---|
Body | ‘CustomTableCell’ | ‘CustomTableParagraph’ |
First column | ‘CustomFirstColumnTableCell’ | ‘CustomFirstColumnTableParagraph’ |
Last column | ‘CustomLastColumnTableCell’ | ‘CustomLastColumnTableParagraph’ |
First row | ‘CustomFirstRowTableCell’ | ‘CustomFirstRowTableParagraph’ |
Last row | ‘CustomLastRowTableCell’ | ‘CustomLastRowTableParagraph’ |
Even row | ‘CustomEvenRowTableCell’ | ‘CustomEvenRowTableParagraph’ |
Odd row | ‘CustomOddRowTableCell’ | ‘CustomOddRowTableParagraph’ |
Even column | ‘CustomEvenColumnTableCell’ | ‘CustomEvenColumnTableParagraph’ |
Odd column | ‘CustomOddColumnTableCell’ | ‘CustomOddColumnTableParagraph’ |
To create a table template with the name ‘Custom’, define the above
styles in the
<office:automatic-styles>
...</office:automatic-styles>
element
of the content template file (see Factory
styles).
To define a table style, create an entry for the style in the variable
org-odt-table-styles
and specify the following:
For example, the entry below defines two different table styles ‘TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn’ and ‘TableWithFirstRowandLastRow’ based on the same template ‘Custom’. The styles achieve their intended effect by selectively activating the individual cell styles in that template.
(setq org-odt-table-styles (append org-odt-table-styles '(("TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn" "Custom" ((use-first-row-styles . t) (use-first-column-styles . t))) ("TableWithFirstRowandLastRow" "Custom" ((use-first-row-styles . t) (use-last-row-styles . t))))))
To do this, specify the table style created in step (2) as part of
the ATTR_ODT
line as shown below.
#+ATTR_ODT: :style "TableWithHeaderRowAndColumn" | Name | Phone | Age | | Peter | 1234 | 17 | | Anna | 4321 | 25 |
Previous: Customizing tables in ODT export, Up: Advanced topics in ODT export [Contents][Index]
Sometimes ODT format files may not open due to .odt file corruption. To verify if the .odt file is corrupt, validate it against the OpenDocument RELAX NG Compact Syntax—RNC—schema. But first the .odt files have to be decompressed using ‘zip’. Note that .odt files are ‘zip’ archives: See (emacs)File Archives. The contents of .odt files are in .xml. For general help with validation—and schema-sensitive editing—of XML files: See (nxml-mode)Introduction.
Customize org-odt-schema-dir
to point to a directory with OpenDocument
.rnc files and the needed schema-locating rules. The ODT export
back-end takes care of updating the rng-schema-locating-files
.
Next: Texinfo export, Previous: OpenDocument Text export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
org
export back-end creates a normalized version of the Org document
in current buffer. The exporter evaluates Babel code (see Evaluating code blocks) and removes content specific to other back-ends.
org-org-export-to-org
)Export as an Org file with a .org extension. For myfile.org, Org exports to myfile.org.org, overwriting without warning.
org-org-export-as-org
)Export to a temporary buffer. Does not create a file.
Export to an Org file, then open it.
Next: iCalendar export, Previous: Org export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
The ‘texinfo’ export back-end generates documents with Texinfo code that can compile to Info format.
• Texinfo export commands: | Invoking commands. | |
• Texinfo specific export settings: | Setting the environment. | |
• Texinfo file header: | Generating the header. | |
• Texinfo title and copyright page: | Creating preamble pages. | |
• Info directory file: | Installing a manual in Info file hierarchy. | |
• Headings and sectioning structure: | Building document structure. | |
• Indices: | Creating indices. | |
• Quoting Texinfo code: | Incorporating literal Texinfo code. | |
• Plain lists in Texinfo export: | List attributes. | |
• Tables in Texinfo export: | Table attributes. | |
• Images in Texinfo export: | Image attributes. | |
• Special blocks in Texinfo export: | Special block attributes. | |
• A Texinfo example: | Processing Org to Texinfo. |
Next: Texinfo specific export settings, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
org-texinfo-export-to-texinfo
)Export as a Texinfo file with .texi extension. For myfile.org, Org exports to myfile.texi, overwriting without warning.
org-texinfo-export-to-info
)Export to Texinfo format first and then process it to make an Info file. To
generate other formats, such as DocBook, customize the
org-texinfo-info-process
variable.
Next: Texinfo file header, Previous: Texinfo export commands, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
The Texinfo export back-end has several additional keywords for customizing Texinfo output. Setting these keywords works similar to the general options (see Export settings).
The document subtitle.
The document subauthor.
The Texinfo filename.
The default document class (org-texinfo-default-class
), which must be
a member of org-texinfo-classes
.
Arbitrary lines inserted at the end of the header.
Arbitrary lines inserted after the end of the header.
The directory category of the document.
The directory title of the document.
The directory description of the document.
The printed title of the document.
Next: Texinfo title and copyright page, Previous: Texinfo specific export settings, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
After creating the header for a Texinfo file, the Texinfo back-end
automatically generates a name and destination path for the Info file. To
override this default with a more sensible path and name, specify the
#+TEXINFO_FILENAME
keyword.
Along with the output’s file name, the Texinfo header also contains language
details (see Export settings) and encoding system as set in the
org-texinfo-coding-system
variable. Insert #+TEXINFO_HEADER
keywords for each additional command in the header, for example:
@code{@synindex}.
Instead of repeatedly installing the same set of commands, define a class in
org-texinfo-classes
once, and then activate it in the document by
setting the #+TEXINFO_CLASS
keyword to that class.
Next: Info directory file, Previous: Texinfo file header, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
The default template for hard copy output has a title page with
#+TITLE
and #+AUTHOR
(see Export settings). To replace the
regular #+TITLE
with something different for the printed version, use
the #+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE
and #+SUBTITLE
keywords. Both
expect raw Texinfo code for setting their values.
If one #+AUTHOR
is not sufficient, add multiple #+SUBAUTHOR
keywords. They have to be set in raw Texinfo code.
#+AUTHOR: Jane Smith #+SUBAUTHOR: John Doe #+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE: This Long Title@inlinefmt{tex,@*} Is Broken in @TeX{}
Copying material is defined in a dedicated headline with a non-nil
:COPYING:
property. The back-end inserts the contents within a
@copying
command at the beginning of the document. The heading
itself does not appear in the structure of the document.
Copyright information is printed on the back of the title page.
* Legalese :PROPERTIES: :COPYING: t :END: This is a short example of a complete Texinfo file, version 1.0. Copyright \copy 2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Next: Headings and sectioning structure, Previous: Texinfo title and copyright page, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
The end result of the Texinfo export process is the creation of an Info file.
This Info file’s metadata has variables for category, title, and description:
#+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY
, #+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE
, and
#+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC
that establish where in the Info hierarchy the file
fits.
Here is an example that writes to the Info directory file:
#+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY: Emacs #+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE: Org Mode: (org) #+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC: Outline-based notes management and organizer
Next: Indices, Previous: Info directory file, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
The Texinfo export back-end uses a pre-defined scheme to convert Org
headlines to an equivalent Texinfo structuring commands. A scheme like this
maps top-level headlines to numbered chapters tagged as @chapter
and
lower-level headlines to unnumbered chapters tagged as @unnumbered
.
To override such mappings to introduce @part
or other Texinfo
structuring commands, define a new class in org-texinfo-classes
.
Activate the new class with the #+TEXINFO_CLASS
keyword. When no new
class is defined and activated, the Texinfo export back-end defaults to the
org-texinfo-default-class
.
If an Org headline’s level has no associated Texinfo structuring command, or is below a certain threshold (see Export settings), then the Texinfo export back-end makes it into a list item.
The Texinfo export back-end makes any headline with a non-nil
:APPENDIX:
property into an appendix. This happens independent of the
Org headline level or the #+TEXINFO_CLASS
.
The Texinfo export back-end creates a menu entry after the Org headline for
each regular sectioning structure. To override this with a shorter menu
entry, use the :ALT_TITLE:
property (see Table of contents).
Texinfo menu entries also have an option for a longer :DESCRIPTION:
property. Here’s an example that uses both to override the default menu
entry:
* Controlling Screen Display :PROPERTIES: :ALT_TITLE: Display :DESCRIPTION: Controlling Screen Display :END:
The text before the first headline belongs to the ‘Top’ node, i.e., the node in which a reader enters an Info manual. As such, it is expected not to appear in printed output generated from the .texi file. See (texinfo)The Top Node, for more information.
Next: Quoting Texinfo code, Previous: Headings and sectioning structure, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
The Texinfo export back-end recognizes these indexing keywords if used in the
Org file: #+CINDEX
, #+FINDEX
, #+KINDEX
, #+PINDEX
,
#+TINDEX
, and #+VINDEX
. Write their value as verbatim Texinfo
code; in particular, ‘{’, ‘}’ and ‘@’ characters need to be
escaped with ‘@’ if they not belong to a Texinfo command.
#+CINDEX: Defining indexing entries
For the back-end to generate an index entry for a headline, set the
:INDEX:
property to ‘cp’ or ‘vr’. These abbreviations come
from Texinfo that stand for concept index and variable index. The Texinfo
manual has abbreviations for all other kinds of indexes. The back-end
exports the headline as an unnumbered chapter or section command, and then
inserts the index after its contents.
* Concept Index :PROPERTIES: :INDEX: cp :END:
Next: Plain lists in Texinfo export, Previous: Indices, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
Use any of the following three methods to insert or escape raw Texinfo code:
Richard @@texinfo:@sc{@@Stallman@@texinfo:}@@ commence' GNU. #+TEXINFO: @need800 This paragraph is preceded by... #+BEGIN_EXPORT texinfo @auindex Johnson, Mark @auindex Lakoff, George #+END_EXPORT
Next: Tables in Texinfo export, Previous: Quoting Texinfo code, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
The Texinfo export back-end by default converts description lists in the Org
file using the default command @table
, which results in a table with
two columns. To change this behavior, specify :table-type
with
ftable
or vtable
attributes. For more information,
See (texinfo)Two-column Tables.
The Texinfo export back-end by default also applies a text highlight based on
the defaults stored in org-texinfo-table-default-markup
. To override
the default highlight command, specify another one with the :indic
attribute.
Org syntax is limited to one entry per list item. Nevertheless, the Texinfo
export back-end can split that entry according to any text provided through
the :sep
attribute. Each part then becomes a new entry in the first
column of the table.
The following example illustrates all the attributes above:
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :table-type vtable :sep , :indic asis - foo, bar :: This is the common text for variables foo and bar.
becomes
@vtable @asis @item foo @itemx bar This is the common text for variables foo and bar. @end table
Next: Images in Texinfo export, Previous: Plain lists in Texinfo export, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
When exporting tables, the Texinfo export back-end uses the widest cell width
in each column. To override this and instead specify as fractions of line
length, use the :columns
attribute. See example below.
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :columns .5 .5 | a cell | another cell |
Next: Special blocks in Texinfo export, Previous: Tables in Texinfo export, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
Insert a file link to the image in the Org file, and the Texinfo export
back-end inserts the image. These links must have the usual supported image
extensions and no descriptions. To scale the image, use :width
and
:height
attributes. For alternate text, use :alt
and specify
the text using Texinfo code, as shown in the example:
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :width 1in :alt Alternate @i{text} [[ridt.pdf]]
Next: A Texinfo example, Previous: Images in Texinfo export, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
The Texinfo export back-end converts special blocks to commands with the same
name. It also adds any :options
attributes to the end of the command,
as shown in this example:
#+ATTR_TEXINFO: :options org-org-export-to-org ... #+begin_defun A somewhat obsessive function. #+end_defun
becomes
@defun org-org-export-to-org ... A somewhat obsessive function. @end defun
Previous: Special blocks in Texinfo export, Up: Texinfo export [Contents][Index]
Here is a more detailed example Org file. See GNU Sample Texts in GNU Texinfo Manual for an equivalent example using Texinfo code.
#+TITLE: GNU Sample {{{version}}} #+SUBTITLE: for version {{{version}}}, {{{updated}}} #+AUTHOR: A.U. Thor #+EMAIL: bug-sample@gnu.org #+OPTIONS: ':t toc:t author:t email:t #+LANGUAGE: en #+MACRO: version 2.0 #+MACRO: updated last updated 4 March 2014 #+TEXINFO_FILENAME: sample.info #+TEXINFO_HEADER: @syncodeindex pg cp #+TEXINFO_DIR_CATEGORY: Texinfo documentation system #+TEXINFO_DIR_TITLE: sample: (sample) #+TEXINFO_DIR_DESC: Invoking sample #+TEXINFO_PRINTED_TITLE: GNU Sample This manual is for GNU Sample (version {{{version}}}, {{{updated}}}). * Copying :PROPERTIES: :COPYING: t :END: This manual is for GNU Sample (version {{{version}}}, {{{updated}}}), which is an example in the Texinfo documentation. Copyright \copy 2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc. #+BEGIN_QUOTE Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License". #+END_QUOTE * Invoking sample #+PINDEX: sample #+CINDEX: invoking @command{sample} This is a sample manual. There is no sample program to invoke, but if there were, you could see its basic usage and command line options here. * GNU Free Documentation License :PROPERTIES: :APPENDIX: t :END: #+TEXINFO: @include fdl.texi * Index :PROPERTIES: :INDEX: cp :END:
Next: Other built-in back-ends, Previous: Texinfo export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
A large part of Org mode’s inter-operability success is its ability to easily export to or import from external applications. The iCalendar export back-end takes calendar data from Org files and exports to the standard iCalendar format.
The iCalendar export back-end can also incorporate TODO entries based on the
configuration of the org-icalendar-include-todo
variable. The
back-end exports plain timestamps as VEVENT, TODO items as VTODO, and also
create events from deadlines that are in non-TODO items. The back-end uses
the deadlines and scheduling dates in Org TODO items for setting the start
and due dates for the iCalendar TODO entry. Consult the
org-icalendar-use-deadline
and org-icalendar-use-scheduled
variables for more details.
For tags on the headline, the iCalendar export back-end makes them into
iCalendar categories. To tweak the inheritance of tags and TODO states,
configure the variable org-icalendar-categories
. To assign clock
alarms based on time, configure the org-icalendar-alarm-time
variable.
The iCalendar format standard requires globally unique identifier—UID—for
each entry. The iCalendar export back-end creates UIDs during export. To
save a copy of the UID in the Org file set the variable
org-icalendar-store-UID
. The back-end looks for the :ID:
property of the entry for re-using the same UID for subsequent exports.
Since a single Org entry can result in multiple iCalendar entries—as timestamp, deadline, scheduled item, or TODO item—Org adds prefixes to the UID, depending on which part of the Org entry triggered the creation of the iCalendar entry. Prefixing ensures UIDs remains unique, yet enable synchronization programs trace the connections.
org-icalendar-export-to-ics
)Create iCalendar entries from the current Org buffer and store them in the same directory, using a file extension .ics.
org-icalendar-export-agenda-files
)Create iCalendar entries from Org files in org-agenda-files
and store
in a separate iCalendar file for each Org file.
org-icalendar-combine-agenda-files
)Create a combined iCalendar file from Org files in org-agenda-files
and write it to org-icalendar-combined-agenda-file
file name.
The iCalendar export back-end includes SUMMARY
, DESCRIPTION
,
LOCATION
and TIMEZONE
properties from the Org entries when
exporting. To force the back-end to inherit the LOCATION
and
TIMEZONE
properties, configure the org-use-property-inheritance
variable.
When Org entries do not have SUMMARY
, DESCRIPTION
and
LOCATION
properties, the iCalendar export back-end derives the summary
from the headline, and derives the description from the body of the Org item.
The org-icalendar-include-body
variable limits the maximum number of
characters of the content are turned into its description.
The TIMEZONE
property can be used to specify a per-entry time zone,
and will be applied to any entry with timestamp information. Time zones
should be specified as per the IANA time zone database format, e.g.
“Asia/Almaty”. Alternately, the property value can be “UTC”, to force
UTC time for this entry only.
Exporting to iCalendar format depends in large part on the capabilities of the destination application. Some are more lenient than others. Consult the Org mode FAQ for advice on specific applications.
Next: Advanced configuration, Previous: iCalendar export, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
Other export back-ends included with Org are:
To activate such back-ends, either customize org-export-backends
or
load directly with (require 'ox-man)
. On successful load, the
back-end adds new keys in the export dispatcher (see The export dispatcher).
Follow the comment section of such files, for example, ox-man.el, for usage and configuration details.
Next: Export in foreign buffers, Previous: Other built-in back-ends, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
The export process executes two hooks before the actual exporting begins.
The first hook, org-export-before-processing-hook
, runs before any
expansions of macros, Babel code, and include keywords in the buffer. The
second hook, org-export-before-parsing-hook
, runs before the buffer is
parsed. Both hooks are specified as functions, see example below. Their main
use is for heavy duty structural modifications of the Org content. For
example, removing every headline in the buffer during export:
(defun my-headline-removal (backend) "Remove all headlines in the current buffer. BACKEND is the export back-end being used, as a symbol." (org-map-entries (lambda () (delete-region (point) (progn (forward-line) (point)))))) (add-hook 'org-export-before-parsing-hook 'my-headline-removal)
Note that the hook function must have a mandatory argument that is a symbol for the back-end.
The Org export process relies on filters to process specific parts of conversion process. Filters are just lists of functions to be applied to certain parts for a given back-end. The output from the first function in the filter is passed on to the next function in the filter. The final output is the output from the final function in the filter.
The Org export process has many filter sets applicable to different types of
objects, plain text, parse trees, export options, and final output formats.
The filters are named after the element type or object type:
org-export-filter-TYPE-functions
, where TYPE
is the type
targeted by the filter. Valid types are:
body | bold | babel-call |
center-block | clock | code |
diary-sexp | drawer | dynamic-block |
entity | example-block | export-block |
export-snippet | final-output | fixed-width |
footnote-definition | footnote-reference | headline |
horizontal-rule | inline-babel-call | inline-src-block |
inlinetask | italic | item |
keyword | latex-environment | latex-fragment |
line-break | link | node-property |
options | paragraph | parse-tree |
plain-list | plain-text | planning |
property-drawer | quote-block | radio-target |
section | special-block | src-block |
statistics-cookie | strike-through | subscript |
superscript | table | table-cell |
table-row | target | timestamp |
underline | verbatim | verse-block |
Here is an example filter that replaces non-breaking spaces ~
in the
Org buffer with _
for the LaTeX back-end.
(defun my-latex-filter-nobreaks (text backend info) "Ensure \"_\" are properly handled in LaTeX export." (when (org-export-derived-backend-p backend 'latex) (replace-regexp-in-string "_" "~" text))) (add-to-list 'org-export-filter-plain-text-functions 'my-latex-filter-nobreaks)
A filter requires three arguments: the code to be transformed, the name of
the back-end, and some optional information about the export process. The
third argument can be safely ignored. Note the use of
org-export-derived-backend-p
predicate that tests for latex
back-end or any other back-end, such as beamer
, derived from
latex
.
The Org export can filter not just for back-ends, but also for specific files
through the #+BIND
keyword. Here is an example with two filters; one
removes brackets from time stamps, and the other removes strike-through text.
The filter functions are defined in a ‘src’ code block in the same Org
file, which is a handy location for debugging.
#+BIND: org-export-filter-timestamp-functions (tmp-f-timestamp) #+BIND: org-export-filter-strike-through-functions (tmp-f-strike-through) #+begin_src emacs-lisp :exports results :results none (defun tmp-f-timestamp (s backend info) (replace-regexp-in-string "&[lg]t;\\|[][]" "" s)) (defun tmp-f-strike-through (s backend info) "") #+end_src
Some parts of the conversion process can be extended for certain elements so as to introduce a new or revised translation. That is how the HTML export back-end was extended to handle Markdown format. The extensions work seamlessly so any aspect of filtering not done by the extended back-end is handled by the original back-end. Of all the export customization in Org, extending is very powerful as it operates at the parser level.
For this example, make the ascii
back-end display the language used in
a source code block. Also make it display only when some attribute is
non-nil
, like the following:
#+ATTR_ASCII: :language t
Then extend ascii
back-end with a custom my-ascii
back-end.
(defun my-ascii-src-block (src-block contents info) "Transcode a SRC-BLOCK element from Org to ASCII. CONTENTS is nil. INFO is a plist used as a communication channel." (if (not (org-export-read-attribute :attr_ascii src-block :language)) (org-export-with-backend 'ascii src-block contents info) (concat (format ",--[ %s ]--\n%s`----" (org-element-property :language src-block) (replace-regexp-in-string "^" "| " (org-element-normalize-string (org-export-format-code-default src-block info))))))) (org-export-define-derived-backend 'my-ascii 'ascii :translate-alist '((src-block . my-ascii-src-block)))
The my-ascii-src-block
function looks at the attribute above the
current element. If not true, hands over to ascii
back-end. If true,
which it is in this example, it creates a box around the code and leaves room
for the inserting a string for language. The last form creates the new
back-end that springs to action only when translating src-block
type
elements.
To use the newly defined back-end, call the following from an Org buffer:
(org-export-to-buffer 'my-ascii "*Org MY-ASCII Export*")
Further steps to consider would be an interactive function, self-installing an item in the export dispatcher menu, and other user-friendly improvements.
Previous: Advanced configuration, Up: Exporting [Contents][Index]
The export back-ends in Org often include commands to convert selected regions. A convenient feature of this in-place conversion is that the exported output replaces the original source. Here are such functions:
org-html-convert-region-to-html
Convert the selected region into HTML.
org-latex-convert-region-to-latex
Convert the selected region into LaTeX.
org-texinfo-convert-region-to-texinfo
Convert the selected region into Texinfo
.
org-md-convert-region-to-md
Convert the selected region into MarkDown
.
In-place conversions are particularly handy for quick conversion of tables
and lists in foreign buffers. For example, turn on the minor mode M-x
orgstruct-mode
in an HTML buffer, then use the convenient Org keyboard
commands to create a list, select it, and covert it to HTML with M-x
org-html-convert-region-to-html RET
.
Next: Working with source code, Previous: Exporting, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Org includes a publishing management system that allows you to configure automatic HTML conversion of projects composed of interlinked org files. You can also configure Org to automatically upload your exported HTML pages and related attachments, such as images and source code files, to a web server.
You can also use Org to convert files into PDF, or even combine HTML and PDF conversion so that files are available in both formats on the server.
Publishing has been contributed to Org by David O’Toole.
• Configuration: | Defining projects | |
• Uploading files: | How to get files up on the server | |
• Sample configuration: | Example projects | |
• Triggering publication: | Publication commands |
Next: Uploading files, Up: Publishing [Contents][Index]
Publishing needs significant configuration to specify files, destination and many other properties of a project.
• Project alist: | The central configuration variable | |
• Sources and destinations: | From here to there | |
• Selecting files: | What files are part of the project? | |
• Publishing action: | Setting the function doing the publishing | |
• Publishing options: | Tweaking HTML/LaTeX export | |
• Publishing links: | Which links keep working after publishing? | |
• Sitemap: | Generating a list of all pages | |
• Generating an index: | An index that reaches across pages |
Next: Sources and destinations, Up: Configuration [Contents][Index]
org-publish-project-alist
Publishing is configured almost entirely through setting the value of one
variable, called org-publish-project-alist
. Each element of the list
configures one project, and may be in one of the two following forms:
("project-name" :property value :property value ...) i.e., a well-formed property list with alternating keys and values or ("project-name" :components ("project-name" "project-name" ...))
In both cases, projects are configured by specifying property values. A
project defines the set of files that will be published, as well as the
publishing configuration to use when publishing those files. When a project
takes the second form listed above, the individual members of the
:components
property are taken to be sub-projects, which group
together files requiring different publishing options. When you publish such
a “meta-project”, all the components will also be published, in the
sequence given.
Next: Selecting files, Previous: Project alist, Up: Configuration [Contents][Index]
Most properties are optional, but some should always be set. In particular, Org needs to know where to look for source files, and where to put published files.
:base-directory | Directory containing publishing source files |
:publishing-directory | Directory where output files will be published. You can directly publish to a web server using a file name syntax appropriate for the Emacs tramp package. Or you can publish to a local directory and use external tools to upload your website (see Uploading files). |
:preparation-function | Function or list of functions to be called before starting the
publishing process, for example, to run make for updating files to be
published. Each preparation function is called with a single argument, the
project property list. |
:completion-function | Function or list of functions called after finishing the publishing process, for example, to change permissions of the resulting files. Each completion function is called with a single argument, the project property list. |
Next: Publishing action, Previous: Sources and destinations, Up: Configuration [Contents][Index]
By default, all files with extension .org in the base directory are considered part of the project. This can be modified by setting the properties
:base-extension | Extension (without the dot!) of source files. This actually is a
regular expression. Set this to the symbol any if you want to get all
files in :base-directory , even without extension. |
:exclude | Regular expression to match file names that should not be published, even though they have been selected on the basis of their extension. |
:include | List of files to be included regardless of :base-extension
and :exclude . |
:recursive | non-nil means, check base-directory recursively for files to publish. |
Next: Publishing options, Previous: Selecting files, Up: Configuration [Contents][Index]
Publishing means that a file is copied to the destination directory and
possibly transformed in the process. The default transformation is to export
Org files as HTML files, and this is done by the function
org-html-publish-to-html
, which calls the HTML exporter (see HTML export). But you also can publish your content as PDF files using
org-latex-publish-to-pdf
or as ascii
, Texinfo
, etc.,
using the corresponding functions.
If you want to publish the Org file as an .org
file but with the
archived, commented and tag-excluded trees removed, use the
function org-org-publish-to-org
. This will produce file.org
and put it in the publishing directory. If you want a htmlized version of
this file, set the parameter :htmlized-source
to t
, it will
produce file.org.html in the publishing directory141.
Other files like images only need to be copied to the publishing destination.
For this you can use org-publish-attachment
. For non-org files, you
always need to specify the publishing function:
:publishing-function | Function executing the publication of a file. This may also be a list of functions, which will all be called in turn. |
:htmlized-source | non-nil means, publish htmlized source. |
The function must accept three arguments: a property list containing at least
a :publishing-directory
property, the name of the file to be published
and the path to the publishing directory of the output file. It should take
the specified file, make the necessary transformation (if any) and place the
result into the destination folder.
Next: Publishing links, Previous: Publishing action, Up: Configuration [Contents][Index]
The property list can be used to set export options during the publishing process. In most cases, these properties correspond to user variables in Org. While some properties are available for all export back-ends, most of them are back-end specific. The following sections list properties along with the variable they belong to. See the documentation string of these options for details.
When a property is given a value in org-publish-project-alist
, its
setting overrides the value of the corresponding user variable (if any)
during publishing. Options set within a file (see Export settings),
however, override everything.
:archived-trees | org-export-with-archived-trees |
:exclude-tags | org-export-exclude-tags |
:headline-levels | org-export-headline-levels |
:language | org-export-default-language |
:preserve-breaks | org-export-preserve-breaks |
:section-numbers | org-export-with-section-numbers |
:select-tags | org-export-select-tags |
:with-author | org-export-with-author |
:with-broken-links | org-export-with-broken-links |
:with-clocks | org-export-with-clocks |
:with-creator | org-export-with-creator |
:with-date | org-export-with-date |
:with-drawers | org-export-with-drawers |
:with-email | org-export-with-email |
:with-emphasize | org-export-with-emphasize |
:with-fixed-width | org-export-with-fixed-width |
:with-footnotes | org-export-with-footnotes |
:with-latex | org-export-with-latex |
:with-planning | org-export-with-planning |
:with-priority | org-export-with-priority |
:with-properties | org-export-with-properties |
:with-special-strings | org-export-with-special-strings |
:with-sub-superscript | org-export-with-sub-superscripts |
:with-tables | org-export-with-tables |
:with-tags | org-export-with-tags |
:with-tasks | org-export-with-tasks |
:with-timestamps | org-export-with-timestamps |
:with-title | org-export-with-title |
:with-toc | org-export-with-toc |
:with-todo-keywords | org-export-with-todo-keywords |
:ascii-bullets | org-ascii-bullets |
:ascii-caption-above | org-ascii-caption-above |
:ascii-charset | org-ascii-charset |
:ascii-global-margin | org-ascii-global-margin |
:ascii-format-drawer-function | org-ascii-format-drawer-function |
:ascii-format-inlinetask-function | org-ascii-format-inlinetask-function |
:ascii-headline-spacing | org-ascii-headline-spacing |
:ascii-indented-line-width | org-ascii-indented-line-width |
:ascii-inlinetask-width | org-ascii-inlinetask-width |
:ascii-inner-margin | org-ascii-inner-margin |
:ascii-links-to-notes | org-ascii-links-to-notes |
:ascii-list-margin | org-ascii-list-margin |
:ascii-paragraph-spacing | org-ascii-paragraph-spacing |
:ascii-quote-margin | org-ascii-quote-margin |
:ascii-table-keep-all-vertical-lines | org-ascii-table-keep-all-vertical-lines |
:ascii-table-use-ascii-art | org-ascii-table-use-ascii-art |
:ascii-table-widen-columns | org-ascii-table-widen-columns |
:ascii-text-width | org-ascii-text-width |
:ascii-underline | org-ascii-underline |
:ascii-verbatim-format | org-ascii-verbatim-format |
:beamer-theme | org-beamer-theme |
:beamer-column-view-format | org-beamer-column-view-format |
:beamer-environments-extra | org-beamer-environments-extra |
:beamer-frame-default-options | org-beamer-frame-default-options |
:beamer-outline-frame-options | org-beamer-outline-frame-options |
:beamer-outline-frame-title | org-beamer-outline-frame-title |
:beamer-subtitle-format | org-beamer-subtitle-format |
:html-allow-name-attribute-in-anchors | org-html-allow-name-attribute-in-anchors |
:html-checkbox-type | org-html-checkbox-type |
:html-container | org-html-container-element |
:html-divs | org-html-divs |
:html-doctype | org-html-doctype |
:html-extension | org-html-extension |
:html-footnote-format | org-html-footnote-format |
:html-footnote-separator | org-html-footnote-separator |
:html-footnotes-section | org-html-footnotes-section |
:html-format-drawer-function | org-html-format-drawer-function |
:html-format-headline-function | org-html-format-headline-function |
:html-format-inlinetask-function | org-html-format-inlinetask-function |
:html-head-extra | org-html-head-extra |
:html-head-include-default-style | org-html-head-include-default-style |
:html-head-include-scripts | org-html-head-include-scripts |
:html-head | org-html-head |
:html-home/up-format | org-html-home/up-format |
:html-html5-fancy | org-html-html5-fancy |
:html-indent | org-html-indent |
:html-infojs-options | org-html-infojs-options |
:html-infojs-template | org-html-infojs-template |
:html-inline-image-rules | org-html-inline-image-rules |
:html-inline-images | org-html-inline-images |
:html-link-home | org-html-link-home |
:html-link-org-files-as-html | org-html-link-org-files-as-html |
:html-link-up | org-html-link-up |
:html-link-use-abs-url | org-html-link-use-abs-url |
:html-mathjax-options | org-html-mathjax-options |
:html-mathjax-template | org-html-mathjax-template |
:html-metadata-timestamp-format | org-html-metadata-timestamp-format |
:html-postamble-format | org-html-postamble-format |
:html-postamble | org-html-postamble |
:html-preamble-format | org-html-preamble-format |
:html-preamble | org-html-preamble |
:html-table-align-individual-fields | org-html-table-align-individual-fields |
:html-table-attributes | org-html-table-default-attributes |
:html-table-caption-above | org-html-table-caption-above |
:html-table-data-tags | org-html-table-data-tags |
:html-table-header-tags | org-html-table-header-tags |
:html-table-row-tags | org-html-table-row-tags |
:html-table-use-header-tags-for-first-column | org-html-table-use-header-tags-for-first-column |
:html-tag-class-prefix | org-html-tag-class-prefix |
:html-text-markup-alist | org-html-text-markup-alist |
:html-todo-kwd-class-prefix | org-html-todo-kwd-class-prefix |
:html-toplevel-hlevel | org-html-toplevel-hlevel |
:html-use-infojs | org-html-use-infojs |
:html-validation-link | org-html-validation-link |
:html-viewport | org-html-viewport |
:html-xml-declaration | org-html-xml-declaration |
:latex-active-timestamp-format | org-latex-active-timestamp-format |
:latex-caption-above | org-latex-caption-above |
:latex-classes | org-latex-classes |
:latex-class | org-latex-default-class |
:latex-compiler | org-latex-compiler |
:latex-default-figure-position | org-latex-default-figure-position |
:latex-default-table-environment | org-latex-default-table-environment |
:latex-default-table-mode | org-latex-default-table-mode |
:latex-diary-timestamp-format | org-latex-diary-timestamp-format |
:latex-footnote-defined-format | org-latex-footnote-defined-format |
:latex-footnote-separator | org-latex-footnote-separator |
:latex-format-drawer-function | org-latex-format-drawer-function |
:latex-format-headline-function | org-latex-format-headline-function |
:latex-format-inlinetask-function | org-latex-format-inlinetask-function |
:latex-hyperref-template | org-latex-hyperref-template |
:latex-image-default-height | org-latex-image-default-height |
:latex-image-default-option | org-latex-image-default-option |
:latex-image-default-width | org-latex-image-default-width |
:latex-images-centered | org-latex-images-centered |
:latex-inactive-timestamp-format | org-latex-inactive-timestamp-format |
:latex-inline-image-rules | org-latex-inline-image-rules |
:latex-link-with-unknown-path-format | org-latex-link-with-unknown-path-format |
:latex-listings-langs | org-latex-listings-langs |
:latex-listings-options | org-latex-listings-options |
:latex-listings | org-latex-listings |
:latex-minted-langs | org-latex-minted-langs |
:latex-minted-options | org-latex-minted-options |
:latex-prefer-user-labels | org-latex-prefer-user-labels |
:latex-subtitle-format | org-latex-subtitle-format |
:latex-subtitle-separate | org-latex-subtitle-separate |
:latex-table-scientific-notation | org-latex-table-scientific-notation |
:latex-tables-booktabs | org-latex-tables-booktabs |
:latex-tables-centered | org-latex-tables-centered |
:latex-text-markup-alist | org-latex-text-markup-alist |
:latex-title-command | org-latex-title-command |
:latex-toc-command | org-latex-toc-command |
:md-footnote-format | org-md-footnote-format |
:md-footnotes-section | org-md-footnotes-section |
:md-headline-style | org-md-headline-style |
:odt-content-template-file | org-odt-content-template-file |
:odt-display-outline-level | org-odt-display-outline-level |
:odt-fontify-srcblocks | org-odt-fontify-srcblocks |
:odt-format-drawer-function | org-odt-format-drawer-function |
:odt-format-headline-function | org-odt-format-headline-function |
:odt-format-inlinetask-function | org-odt-format-inlinetask-function |
:odt-inline-formula-rules | org-odt-inline-formula-rules |
:odt-inline-image-rules | org-odt-inline-image-rules |
:odt-pixels-per-inch | org-odt-pixels-per-inch |
:odt-styles-file | org-odt-styles-file |
:odt-table-styles | org-odt-table-styles |
:odt-use-date-fields | org-odt-use-date-fields |
:texinfo-active-timestamp-format | org-texinfo-active-timestamp-format |
:texinfo-classes | org-texinfo-classes |
:texinfo-class | org-texinfo-default-class |
:texinfo-table-default-markup | org-texinfo-table-default-markup |
:texinfo-diary-timestamp-format | org-texinfo-diary-timestamp-format |
:texinfo-filename | org-texinfo-filename |
:texinfo-format-drawer-function | org-texinfo-format-drawer-function |
:texinfo-format-headline-function | org-texinfo-format-headline-function |
:texinfo-format-inlinetask-function | org-texinfo-format-inlinetask-function |
:texinfo-inactive-timestamp-format | org-texinfo-inactive-timestamp-format |
:texinfo-link-with-unknown-path-format | org-texinfo-link-with-unknown-path-format |
:texinfo-node-description-column | org-texinfo-node-description-column |
:texinfo-table-scientific-notation | org-texinfo-table-scientific-notation |
:texinfo-tables-verbatim | org-texinfo-tables-verbatim |
:texinfo-text-markup-alist | org-texinfo-text-markup-alist |
Next: Sitemap, Previous: Publishing options, Up: Configuration [Contents][Index]
To create a link from one Org file to another, you would use something like
‘[[file:foo.org][The foo]]’ or simply ‘file:foo.org’
(see External links). When published, this link becomes a link to
foo.html. You can thus interlink the pages of your “org web”
project and the links will work as expected when you publish them to HTML.
If you also publish the Org source file and want to link to it, use an
http:
link instead of a file:
link, because file:
links
are converted to link to the corresponding html file.
You may also link to related files, such as images. Provided you are careful with relative file names, and provided you have also configured Org to upload the related files, these links will work too. See Complex example, for an example of this usage.
Eventually, links between published documents can contain some search options (see Search options), which will be resolved to the appropriate location in the linked file. For example, once published to HTML, the following links all point to a dedicated anchor in foo.html.
[[file:foo.org::*heading]] [[file:foo.org::#custom-id]] [[file:foo.org::target]]
Next: Generating an index, Previous: Publishing links, Up: Configuration [Contents][Index]
The following properties may be used to control publishing of a map of files for a given project.
:auto-sitemap | When non-nil , publish a sitemap during org-publish-current-project
or org-publish-all . |
:sitemap-filename | Filename for output of sitemap. Defaults to sitemap.org (which becomes sitemap.html). |
:sitemap-title | Title of sitemap page. Defaults to name of file. |
:sitemap-format-entry | With this option one can tell how a site-map entry is formatted in the
site-map. It is a function called with three arguments: the file or
directory name relative to base directory of the project, the site-map style
and the current project. It is expected to return a string. Default value
turns file names into links and use document titles as descriptions. For
specific formatting needs, one can use org-publish-find-date ,
org-publish-find-title and org-publish-find-property , to
retrieve additional information about published documents. |
:sitemap-function | Plug-in function to use for generation of the sitemap. It is called
with two arguments: the title of the site-map and a representation of the
files and directories involved in the project as a radio list (see Radio lists). The latter can further be transformed using
org-list-to-generic , org-list-to-subtree and alike. Default
value generates a plain list of links to all files in the project. |
:sitemap-sort-folders | Where folders should appear in the sitemap. Set this to first
(default) or last to display folders first or last, respectively.
When set to ignore , folders are ignored altogether. Any other value
will mix files and folders. This variable has no effect when site-map style
is tree . |
:sitemap-sort-files | How the files are sorted in the site map. Set this to
alphabetically (default), chronologically or
anti-chronologically . chronologically sorts the files with
older date first while anti-chronologically sorts the files with newer
date first. alphabetically sorts the files alphabetically. The date of
a file is retrieved with org-publish-find-date . |
:sitemap-ignore-case | Should sorting be case-sensitive? Default nil . |
:sitemap-date-format | Format string for the format-time-string function that tells how
a sitemap entry’s date is to be formatted. This property bypasses
org-publish-sitemap-date-format which defaults to %Y-%m-%d . |
Previous: Sitemap, Up: Configuration [Contents][Index]
Org mode can generate an index across the files of a publishing project.
:makeindex | When non-nil , generate in index in the file theindex.org and
publish it as theindex.html. |
The file will be created when first publishing a project with the
:makeindex
set. The file only contains a statement #+INCLUDE:
"theindex.inc"
. You can then build around this include statement by adding
a title, style information, etc.
Index entries are specified with #+INDEX
keyword. An entry that
contains an exclamation mark will create a sub item.
* Curriculum Vitae #+INDEX: CV #+INDEX: Application!CV
Next: Sample configuration, Previous: Configuration, Up: Publishing [Contents][Index]
For those people already utilizing third party sync tools such as
rsync
or unison
, it might be preferable not to use the built in
remote publishing facilities of Org mode which rely heavily on
Tramp. Tramp, while very useful and powerful, tends not to be
so efficient for multiple file transfer and has been known to cause problems
under heavy usage.
Specialized synchronization utilities offer several advantages. In addition to timestamp comparison, they also do content and permissions/attribute checks. For this reason you might prefer to publish your web to a local directory (possibly even in place with your Org files) and then use unison or rsync to do the synchronization with the remote host.
Since Unison (for example) can be configured as to which files to transfer to
a certain remote destination, it can greatly simplify the project publishing
definition. Simply keep all files in the correct location, process your Org
files with org-publish
and let the synchronization tool do the rest.
You do not need, in this scenario, to include attachments such as jpg,
css or gif files in the project definition since the 3rd party
tool syncs them.
Publishing to a local directory is also much faster than to a remote one, so
that you can afford more easily to republish entire projects. If you set
org-publish-use-timestamps-flag
to nil
, you gain the main
benefit of re-including any changed external files such as source example
files you might include with #+INCLUDE:
. The timestamp mechanism in
Org is not smart enough to detect if included files have been modified.
Next: Triggering publication, Previous: Uploading files, Up: Publishing [Contents][Index]
Below we provide two example configurations. The first one is a simple project publishing only a set of Org files. The second example is more complex, with a multi-component project.
• Simple example: | One-component publishing | |
• Complex example: | A multi-component publishing example |
Next: Complex example, Up: Sample configuration [Contents][Index]
This example publishes a set of Org files to the public_html directory on the local machine.
(setq org-publish-project-alist '(("org" :base-directory "~/org/" :publishing-directory "~/public_html" :publishing-function org-html-publish-to-html :section-numbers nil :with-toc nil :html-head "<link rel=\"stylesheet\" href=\"../other/mystyle.css\" type=\"text/css\"/>")))
Previous: Simple example, Up: Sample configuration [Contents][Index]
This more complicated example publishes an entire website, including Org files converted to HTML, image files, Emacs Lisp source code, and style sheets. The publishing directory is remote and private files are excluded.
To ensure that links are preserved, care should be taken to replicate your directory structure on the web server, and to use relative file paths. For example, if your Org files are kept in ~/org and your publishable images in ~/images, you would link to an image with
file:../images/myimage.png
On the web server, the relative path to the image should be the same. You can accomplish this by setting up an "images" folder in the right place on the web server, and publishing images to it.
(setq org-publish-project-alist '(("orgfiles" :base-directory "~/org/" :base-extension "org" :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/notebook/" :publishing-function org-html-publish-to-html :exclude "PrivatePage.org" ;; regexp :headline-levels 3 :section-numbers nil :with-toc nil :html-head "<link rel=\"stylesheet\" href=\"../other/mystyle.css\" type=\"text/css\"/>" :html-preamble t) ("images" :base-directory "~/images/" :base-extension "jpg\\|gif\\|png" :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/images/" :publishing-function org-publish-attachment) ("other" :base-directory "~/other/" :base-extension "css\\|el" :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@host:~/html/other/" :publishing-function org-publish-attachment) ("website" :components ("orgfiles" "images" "other"))))
Previous: Sample configuration, Up: Publishing [Contents][Index]
Once properly configured, Org can publish with the following commands:
org-publish
)Prompt for a specific project and publish all files that belong to it.
org-publish-current-project
)org-publish-current-file
)org-publish-all
)Publish every project.
Org uses timestamps to track when a file has changed. The above functions
normally only publish changed files. You can override this and force
publishing of all files by giving a prefix argument to any of the commands
above, or by customizing the variable org-publish-use-timestamps-flag
.
This may be necessary in particular if files include other files via
#+SETUPFILE:
or #+INCLUDE:
.
Next: Miscellaneous, Previous: Publishing, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Source code here refers to any code typed in Org mode documents. Org can manage source code in any Org file once such code is tagged with begin and end markers. Working with source code begins with tagging source code blocks. Tagged ‘src’ code blocks are not restricted to the preamble or the end of an Org document; they can go anywhere—with a few exceptions, such as not inside comments and fixed width areas. Here’s a sample ‘src’ code block in emacs-lisp:
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (defun org-xor (a b) "Exclusive or." (if a (not b) b)) #+END_SRC
Org can take the code in the block between the #+BEGIN_SRC
and
#+END_SRC
tags, and format, compile, execute, and show the results.
Org can simplify many housekeeping tasks essential to modern code
maintenance. That’s why these blocks in Org mode literature are sometimes
referred to as ‘live code’ blocks (as compared to the static text and
documentation around it). Users can control how ‘live’ they want each
block by tweaking the headers for compiling, execution, extraction.
Org’s ‘src’ code block type is one of many block types, such as quote,
export, verse, latex, example, and verbatim. This section pertains to
src
code blocks between #+BEGIN_SRC
and #+END_SRC
For editing ‘src’ code blocks, Org provides native Emacs major-modes. That leverages the latest Emacs features for that source code language mode.
For exporting, Org can then extract ‘src’ code blocks into compilable source files (in a conversion process known as tangling in literate programming terminology).
For publishing, Org’s back-ends can handle the ‘src’ code blocks and the text for output to a variety of formats with native syntax highlighting.
For executing the source code in the ‘src’ code blocks, Org provides facilities that glue the tasks of compiling, collecting the results of the execution, and inserting them back to the Org file. Besides text output, results may include links to other data types that Emacs can handle: audio, video, and graphics.
An important feature of Org’s execution of the ‘src’ code blocks is passing variables, functions, and results between ‘src’ blocks. Such interoperability uses a common syntax even if these ‘src’ blocks are in different source code languages. The integration extends to linking the debugger’s error messages to the line in the ‘src’ code block in the Org file. That should partly explain why this functionality by the original contributors, Eric Schulte and Dan Davison, was called ‘Org Babel’.
In literate programming, the main appeal is code and documentation co-existing in one file. Org mode takes this several steps further. First by enabling execution, and then by inserting results of that execution back into the Org file. Along the way, Org provides extensive formatting features, including handling tables. Org handles multiple source code languages in one file, and provides a common syntax for passing variables, functions, and results between ‘src’ code blocks.
Org mode fulfills the promise of easy verification and maintenance of publishing reproducible research by keeping all these in the same file: text, data, code, configuration settings of the execution environment, the results of the execution, and associated narratives, claims, references, and internal and external links.
Details of Org’s facilities for working with source code are shown next.
• Structure of code blocks: | Code block syntax described | |
• Editing source code: | Language major-mode editing | |
• Exporting code blocks: | Export contents and/or results | |
• Extracting source code: | Create pure source code files | |
• Evaluating code blocks: | Place results of evaluation in the Org mode buffer | |
• Library of Babel: | Use and contribute to a library of useful code blocks | |
• Languages: | List of supported code block languages | |
• Header arguments: | Configure code block functionality | |
• Results of evaluation: | How evaluation results are handled | |
• Noweb reference syntax: | Literate programming in Org mode | |
• Key bindings and useful functions: | Work quickly with code blocks | |
• Batch execution: | Call functions from the command line |
Next: Editing source code, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
Org offers two ways to structure source code in Org documents: in a ‘src’ block, and directly inline. Both specifications are shown below.
A ‘src’ block conforms to this structure:
#+NAME: <name> #+BEGIN_SRC <language> <switches> <header arguments> <body> #+END_SRC
Org mode’s templates system (see Easy templates) speeds up creating ‘src’ code blocks with just three keystrokes. Do not be put-off by having to remember the source block syntax. Org also works with other completion systems in Emacs, some of which predate Org and have custom domain-specific languages for defining templates. Regular use of templates reduces errors, increases accuracy, and maintains consistency.
An inline code block conforms to this structure:
src_<language>{<body>}
or
src_<language>[<header arguments>]{<body>}
#+NAME: <name>
Optional. Names the ‘src’ block so it can be called, like a function, from other ‘src’ blocks or inline blocks to evaluate or to capture the results. Code from other blocks, other files, and from table formulas (see The spreadsheet) can use the name to reference a ‘src’ block. This naming serves the same purpose as naming Org tables. Org mode requires unique names. For duplicate names, Org mode’s behavior is undefined.
#+BEGIN_SRC
#+END_SRC
Mandatory. They mark the start and end of a block that Org requires. The
#+BEGIN_SRC
line takes additional arguments, as described next.
<language>
Mandatory for live code blocks. It is the identifier of the source code language in the block. See Languages, for identifiers of supported languages.
<switches>
Optional. Switches provide finer control of the code execution, export, and format (see the discussion of switches in Literal examples)
<header arguments>
Optional. Heading arguments control many aspects of evaluation, export and tangling of code blocks (see Header arguments). Using Org’s properties feature, header arguments can be selectively applied to the entire buffer or specific sub-trees of the Org document.
source code, header arguments
<body>
Source code in the dialect of the specified language identifier.
Next: Exporting code blocks, Previous: Structure of code blocks, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
C-c ' for editing the current code block. It opens a new major-mode edit buffer containing the body of the ‘src’ code block, ready for any edits. C-c ' again to close the buffer and return to the Org buffer.
C-x C-s saves the buffer and updates the contents of the Org buffer.
Set org-edit-src-auto-save-idle-delay
to save the base buffer after
a certain idle delay time.
Set org-edit-src-turn-on-auto-save
to auto-save this buffer into a
separate file using auto-save-mode
.
C-c ' to close the major-mode buffer and return back to the Org buffer.
While editing the source code in the major-mode, the org-src-mode
minor mode remains active. It provides these customization variables as
described below. For even more variables, look in the customization
group org-edit-structure
.
org-src-lang-modes
If an Emacs major-mode named <lang>-mode
exists, where <lang>
is the language identifier from code block’s header line, then the edit
buffer uses that major-mode. Use this variable to arbitrarily map language
identifiers to major modes.
org-src-window-setup
For specifying Emacs window arrangement when the new edit buffer is created.
org-src-preserve-indentation
Default is nil
. Source code is indented. This indentation applies
during export or tangling, and depending on the context, may alter leading
spaces and tabs. When non-nil
, source code is aligned with the
leftmost column. No lines are modified during export or tangling, which is
very useful for white-space sensitive languages, such as Python.
org-src-ask-before-returning-to-edit-buffer
When nil
, Org returns to the edit buffer without further prompts. The
default prompts for a confirmation.
Set org-src-fontify-natively
to non-nil
to turn on native code
fontification in the Org buffer. Fontification of ‘src’ code
blocks can give visual separation of text and code on the display page. To
further customize the appearance of org-block
for specific languages,
customize org-src-block-faces
. The following example shades the
background of regular blocks, and colors source blocks only for Python and
Emacs-Lisp languages.
(require 'color) (set-face-attribute 'org-block nil :background (color-darken-name (face-attribute 'default :background) 3)) (setq org-src-block-faces '(("emacs-lisp" (:background "#EEE2FF")) ("python" (:background "#E5FFB8"))))
Next: Extracting source code, Previous: Editing source code, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
Org can flexibly export just the code from the code blocks, just the
results of evaluation of the code block, both the code and the
results of the code block evaluation, or none. Org defaults to
exporting code for most languages. For some languages, such as
ditaa
, Org defaults to results. To export just the body of
code blocks, see Literal examples. To selectively export sub-trees of
an Org document, see Exporting.
The :exports
header arguments control exporting code blocks only and
not inline code:
:exports code
This is the default for most languages where the body of the code block is exported. See Literal examples for more.
:exports results
On export, Org includes only the results and not the code block. After each evaluation, Org inserts the results after the end of code block in the Org buffer. By default, Org replaces any previous results. Org can also append results.
:exports both
Org exports both the code block and the results.
:exports none
Org does not export the code block nor the results.
To stop Org from evaluating code blocks to speed exports, use the header
argument :eval never-export
(see eval). To stop Org from
evaluating code blocks for greater security, set the
org-export-use-babel
variable to nil
, but understand that
header arguments will have no effect.
Turning off evaluation comes in handy when batch processing. For example,
markup languages for wikis, which have a high risk of untrusted code.
Stopping code block evaluation also stops evaluation of all header arguments
of the code block. This may not be desirable in some circumstances. So
during export, to allow evaluation of just the header arguments but not any
code evaluation in the source block, set :eval never-export
(see eval).
Org never evaluates code blocks in commented sub-trees when exporting (see Comment lines). On the other hand, Org does evaluate code blocks in sub-trees excluded from export (see Export settings).
Next: Evaluating code blocks, Previous: Exporting code blocks, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
Extracting source code from code blocks is a basic task in literate programming. Org has features to make this easy. In literate programming parlance, documents on creation are woven with code and documentation, and on export, the code is tangled for execution by a computer. Org facilitates weaving and tangling for producing, maintaining, sharing, and exporting literate programming documents. Org provides extensive customization options for extracting source code.
When Org tangles ‘src’ code blocks, it expands, merges, and transforms them. Then Org recomposes them into one or more separate files, as configured through the options. During this tangling process, Org expands variables in the source code, and resolves any Noweb style references (see Noweb reference syntax).
:tangle no
By default, Org does not tangle the ‘src’ code block on export.
:tangle yes
Org extracts the contents of the code block for the tangled output. By default, the output file name is the same as the Org file but with a file extension derived from the language identifier of the ‘src’ code block.
:tangle filename
Override the default file name with this one for the tangled output.
org-babel-tangle
Tangle the current file. Bound to C-c C-v t.
With prefix argument only tangle the current ‘src’ code block.
org-babel-tangle-file
Choose a file to tangle. Bound to C-c C-v f.
org-babel-post-tangle-hook
This hook runs from within code tangled by org-babel-tangle
, making it
suitable for post-processing, compilation, and evaluation of code in the
tangled files.
Debuggers normally link errors and messages back to the source code. But for
tangled files, we want to link back to the Org file, not to the tangled
source file. To make this extra jump, Org uses
org-babel-tangle-jump-to-org
function with two additional source code
block header arguments: One, set padline
(see padline) to true
(the default setting). Two, set comments
(see comments) to
link
, which makes Org insert links to the Org file.
Next: Library of Babel, Previous: Extracting source code, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
A note about security: With code evaluation comes the risk of harm. Org safeguards by prompting for user’s permission before executing any code in the source block. To customize this safeguard (or disable it) see Code evaluation security.
Org captures the results of the ‘src’ code block evaluation and inserts
them in the Org file, right after the ‘src’ code block. The insertion
point is after a newline and the #+RESULTS
label. Org creates the
#+RESULTS
label if one is not already there.
By default, Org enables only emacs-lisp
‘src’ code blocks for
execution. See Languages for identifiers to enable other languages.
Org provides many ways to execute ‘src’ code blocks. C-c C-c or
C-c C-v e with the point on a ‘src’ code block142 calls the
org-babel-execute-src-block
function, which executes the code in the
block, collects the results, and inserts them in the buffer.
By calling a named code block143
from an Org mode buffer or a table. Org can call the named ‘src’ code
blocks from the current Org mode buffer or from the “Library of Babel”
(see Library of Babel). Whether inline syntax or the #+CALL:
syntax is used, the result is wrapped based on the variable
org-babel-inline-result-wrap
, which by default is set to "=%s="
to produce verbatim text suitable for markup.
The syntax for #+CALL:
is
#+CALL: <name>(<arguments>) #+CALL: <name>[<inside header arguments>](<arguments>) <end header arguments>
The syntax for inline named code block is
... call_<name>(<arguments>) ... ... call_<name>[<inside header arguments>](<arguments>)[<end header arguments>] ...
<name>
This is the name of the code block to be evaluated (see Structure of code blocks).
<arguments>
Org passes arguments to the code block using standard function call syntax.
For example, a #+CALL:
line that passes ‘4’ to a code block named
double
, which declares the header argument :var n=2
, would be
written as #+CALL: double(n=4)
. Note how this function call syntax is
different from the header argument syntax.
<inside header arguments>
Org passes inside header arguments to the named ‘src’ code block using
the header argument syntax. Inside header arguments apply to code block
evaluation. For example, [:results output]
collects results printed
to STDOUT
during code execution of that block. Note how this header
argument syntax is different from the function call syntax.
<end header arguments>
End header arguments affect the results returned by the code block. For
example, :results html
wraps the results in a BEGIN_EXPORT html
block before inserting the results in the Org buffer.
For more examples of header arguments for #+CALL:
lines,
see Arguments in function calls.
Next: Languages, Previous: Evaluating code blocks, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
The “Library of Babel” is a collection of code blocks. Like a function library, these code blocks can be called from other Org files. A collection of useful code blocks is available on Worg. For remote code block evaluation syntax, see Evaluating code blocks.
For any user to add code to the library, first save the code in regular
‘src’ code blocks of an Org file, and then load the Org file with
org-babel-lob-ingest
, which is bound to C-c C-v i.
Next: Header arguments, Previous: Library of Babel, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
Org supports the following languages for the ‘src’ code blocks:
Language | Identifier | Language | Identifier |
---|---|---|---|
Asymptote | asymptote | Awk | awk |
C | C | C++ | C++ |
Clojure | clojure | CSS | css |
D | d | ditaa | ditaa |
Graphviz | dot | Emacs Calc | calc |
Emacs Lisp | emacs-lisp | Fortran | fortran |
gnuplot | gnuplot | Haskell | haskell |
Java | java | Javascript | js |
LaTeX | latex | Ledger | ledger |
Lisp | lisp | Lilypond | lilypond |
Lua | lua | MATLAB | matlab |
Mscgen | mscgen | Objective Caml | ocaml |
Octave | octave | Org mode | org |
Oz | oz | Perl | perl |
Plantuml | plantuml | Processing.js | processing |
Python | python | R | R |
Ruby | ruby | Sass | sass |
Scheme | scheme | GNU Screen | screen |
Sed | sed | shell | sh |
SQL | sql | SQLite | sqlite |
Vala | vala |
Additional documentation for some languages are at https://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/babel/languages.html.
By default, only emacs-lisp
is enabled for evaluation. To enable or
disable other languages, customize the org-babel-load-languages
variable either through the Emacs customization interface, or by adding code
to the init file as shown next:
In this example, evaluation is disabled for emacs-lisp
, and enabled
for R
.
(org-babel-do-load-languages 'org-babel-load-languages '((emacs-lisp . nil) (R . t)))
Note that this is not the only way to enable a language. Org also enables
languages when loaded with require
statement. For example, the
following enables execution of clojure
code blocks:
(require 'ob-clojure)
Next: Results of evaluation, Previous: Languages, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
Details of configuring header arguments are shown here.
• Using header arguments: | Different ways to set header arguments | |
• Specific header arguments: | List of header arguments |
Next: Specific header arguments, Up: Header arguments [Contents][Index]
Since header arguments can be set in several ways, Org prioritizes them in case of overlaps or conflicts by giving local settings a higher priority. Header values in function calls, for example, override header values from global defaults.
• System-wide header arguments: | Set globally, language-specific | |
• Language-specific header arguments: | Set in the Org file’s headers | |
• Header arguments in Org mode properties: | Set in the Org file | |
• Language-specific mode properties: | ||
• Code block specific header arguments: | The most commonly used method | |
• Arguments in function calls: | The most specific level, takes highest priority |
System-wide values of header arguments can be specified by adapting the
org-babel-default-header-args
variable:
:session => "none" :results => "replace" :exports => "code" :cache => "no" :noweb => "no"
This example sets :noweb
header arguments to yes
, which makes
Org expand :noweb
references by default.
(setq org-babel-default-header-args (cons '(:noweb . "yes") (assq-delete-all :noweb org-babel-default-header-args)))
Next: Header arguments in Org mode properties, Previous: System-wide header arguments, Up: Using header arguments [Contents][Index]
Each language can have separate default header arguments by customizing the
variable org-babel-default-header-args:<lang>
, where <lang>
is
the name of the language. For details, see the language-specific online
documentation at https://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/babel/.
Next: Language-specific mode properties, Previous: Language-specific header arguments, Up: Using header arguments [Contents][Index]
For header arguments applicable to the buffer, use #+PROPERTY:
lines
anywhere in the Org mode file (see Property syntax).
The following example sets only for ‘R’ code blocks to session
,
making all the ‘R’ code blocks execute in the same session. Setting
results
to silent
ignores the results of executions for all
blocks, not just ‘R’ code blocks; no results inserted for any block.
#+PROPERTY: header-args:R :session *R* #+PROPERTY: header-args :results silent
Header arguments set through Org’s property drawers (see Property syntax)
apply at the sub-tree level on down. Since these property drawers can appear
anywhere in the file hierarchy, Org uses outermost call or source block to
resolve the values. Org ignores org-use-property-inheritance
setting.
In this example, :cache
defaults to yes
for all code blocks in
the sub-tree starting with ‘sample header’.
* sample header :PROPERTIES: :header-args: :cache yes :END:
Properties defined through org-set-property
function, bound to
C-c C-x p, apply to all active languages. They override properties set
in org-babel-default-header-args
.
Next: Code block specific header arguments, Previous: Header arguments in Org mode properties, Up: Using header arguments [Contents][Index]
Language-specific header arguments are also read from properties
header-args:<lang>
where <lang>
is the language identifier.
For example,
* Heading :PROPERTIES: :header-args:clojure: :session *clojure-1* :header-args:R: :session *R* :END: ** Subheading :PROPERTIES: :header-args:clojure: :session *clojure-2* :END:
would force separate sessions for clojure blocks in Heading and Subheading, but use the same session for all ‘R’ blocks. Blocks in Subheading inherit settings from Heading.
Next: Arguments in function calls, Previous: Language-specific mode properties, Up: Using header arguments [Contents][Index]
Header arguments are most commonly set at the ‘src’ code block level, on
the #+BEGIN_SRC
line. Arguments set at this level take precedence
over those set in the org-babel-default-header-args
variable, and also
those set as header properties.
In the following example, setting results
to silent
makes it
ignore results of the code execution. Setting :exports
to code
exports only the body of the ‘src’ code block to HTML or LaTeX.:
#+NAME: factorial #+BEGIN_SRC haskell :results silent :exports code :var n=0 fac 0 = 1 fac n = n * fac (n-1) #+END_SRC
The same header arguments in an inline ‘src’ code block:
src_haskell[:exports both]{fac 5}
Code block header arguments can span multiple lines using #+HEADER:
on
each line. Note that Org currently accepts the plural spelling of
#+HEADER:
only as a convenience for backward-compatibility. It may be
removed at some point.
Multi-line header arguments on an unnamed ‘src’ code block:
#+HEADER: :var data1=1 #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data2=2 (message "data1:%S, data2:%S" data1 data2) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : data1:1, data2:2
Multi-line header arguments on a named ‘src’ code block:
#+NAME: named-block #+HEADER: :var data=2 #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp (message "data:%S" data) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: named-block : data:2
Previous: Code block specific header arguments, Up: Using header arguments [Contents][Index]
Header arguments in function calls are the most specific and override all
other settings in case of an overlap. They get the highest priority. Two
#+CALL:
examples are shown below. For the complete syntax of
#+CALL:
lines, see Evaluating code blocks.
In this example, :exports results
header argument is applied to the
evaluation of the #+CALL:
line.
#+CALL: factorial(n=5) :exports results
In this example, :session special
header argument is applied to the
evaluation of factorial
code block.
#+CALL: factorial[:session special](n=5)
Previous: Using header arguments, Up: Header arguments [Contents][Index]
Org comes with many header arguments common to all languages. New header arguments are added for specific languages as they become available for use in ‘src’ code blocks. A header argument is specified with an initial colon followed by the argument’s name in lowercase. Common header arguments are:
• var: | Pass arguments to ‘src’ code blocks | |
• results: | Specify results type; how to collect | |
• file: | Specify a path for output file | |
• file-desc: | Specify a description for file results | |
• file-ext: | Specify an extension for file output | |
• output-dir: | Specify a directory for output file | |
• dir: | Specify the default directory for code block execution | |
• exports: | Specify exporting code, results, both, none | |
• tangle: | Toggle tangling; or specify file name | |
• mkdirp: | Toggle for parent directory creation for target files during tangling | |
• comments: | Toggle insertion of comments in tangled code files | |
• padline: | Control insertion of padding lines in tangled code files | |
• no-expand: | Turn off variable assignment and noweb expansion during tangling | |
• session: | Preserve the state of code evaluation | |
• noweb: | Toggle expansion of noweb references | |
• noweb-ref: | Specify block’s noweb reference resolution target | |
• noweb-sep: | String to separate noweb references | |
• cache: | Avoid re-evaluating unchanged code blocks | |
• sep: | Delimiter for writing tabular results outside Org | |
• hlines: | Handle horizontal lines in tables | |
• colnames: | Handle column names in tables | |
• rownames: | Handle row names in tables | |
• shebang: | Make tangled files executable | |
• tangle-mode: | Set permission of tangled files | |
• eval: | Limit evaluation of specific code blocks | |
• wrap: | Mark source block evaluation results | |
• post: | Post processing of results of code block evaluation | |
• prologue: | Text to prepend to body of code block | |
• epilogue: | Text to append to body of code block |
For language-specific header arguments, see Languages.
Next: results, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:var
Use :var
for passing arguments to ‘src’ code blocks. The
specifics of variables in ‘src’ code blocks vary by the source language
and are covered in the language-specific documentation. The syntax for
:var
, however, is the same for all languages. This includes declaring
a variable, and assigning a default value.
Arguments can take values as literals, or as references, or even as Emacs
Lisp code (see Emacs Lisp evaluation of variables). References are
names from the Org file from the lines #+NAME:
or #+RESULTS:
.
References can also refer to tables, lists, #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE
blocks,
other types of ‘src’ code blocks, or the results of execution of
‘src’ code blocks.
For better performance, Org can cache results of evaluations. But caching comes with severe limitations (see cache).
Argument values are indexed like arrays (see Indexable variable values).
The following syntax is used to pass arguments to ‘src’ code blocks
using the :var
header argument.
:var name=assign
The assign
is a literal value, such as a string ‘"string"’, a
number ‘9’, a reference to a table, a list, a literal example, another
code block (with or without arguments), or the results from evaluating a code
block.
Here are examples of passing values by reference:
an Org mode table named with either a #+NAME:
line
#+NAME: example-table | 1 | | 2 | | 3 | | 4 | #+NAME: table-length #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var table=example-table (length table) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: table-length : 4
a simple list named with a #+NAME:
line. Note that only the top level
list items are passed along. Nested list items are ignored.
#+NAME: example-list - simple - not - nested - list #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=example-list (print x) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | simple | list |
a code block name (from the example above), as assigned by #+NAME:
,
optionally followed by parentheses
#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var length=table-length() (* 2 length) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : 8
a ‘src’ code block name, as assigned by #+NAME:
, followed by
parentheses and optional arguments passed within the parentheses following
the ‘src’ code block name using standard function call syntax
#+NAME: double #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var input=8 (* 2 input) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: double : 16 #+NAME: squared #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var input=double(input=2) (* input input) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: squared : 4
a literal example block named with a #+NAME:
line
#+NAME: literal-example #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE A literal example on two lines #+END_EXAMPLE #+NAME: read-literal-example #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=literal-example (concatenate 'string x " for you.") #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: read-literal-example : A literal example : on two lines for you.
Indexing variable values enables referencing portions of a variable. Indexes
are 0 based with negative values counting backwards from the end. If an
index is separated by ,
s then each subsequent section will index as
the next dimension. Note that this indexing occurs before other
table-related header arguments are applied, such as :hlines
,
:colnames
and :rownames
. The following example assigns the
last cell of the first row the table example-table
to the variable
data
:
#+NAME: example-table | 1 | a | | 2 | b | | 3 | c | | 4 | d | #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[0,-1] data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : a
Ranges of variable values can be referenced using two integers separated by a
:
, in which case the entire inclusive range is referenced. For
example the following assigns the middle three rows of example-table
to data
.
#+NAME: example-table | 1 | a | | 2 | b | | 3 | c | | 4 | d | | 5 | 3 | #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[1:3] data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | 2 | b | | 3 | c | | 4 | d |
To pick the entire range, use an empty index, or the single character
*
. 0:-1
does the same thing. Example below shows how to
reference the first column only.
#+NAME: example-table | 1 | a | | 2 | b | | 3 | c | | 4 | d | #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=example-table[,0] data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
Index referencing can be used for tables and code blocks. Index referencing can handle any number of dimensions. Commas delimit multiple dimensions, as shown below.
#+NAME: 3D #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp '(((1 2 3) (4 5 6) (7 8 9)) ((10 11 12) (13 14 15) (16 17 18)) ((19 20 21) (22 23 24) (25 26 27))) #+END_SRC #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var data=3D[1,,1] data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: | 11 | 14 | 17 |
Emacs lisp code can set the values for variables. To differentiate a value
from lisp code, Org interprets any value starting with (
, [
,
'
or `
as Emacs Lisp code. The result of evaluating that code
is then assigned to the value of that variable. The following example shows
how to reliably query and pass file name of the Org mode buffer to a code
block using headers. We need reliability here because the file’s name could
change once the code in the block starts executing.
#+BEGIN_SRC sh :var filename=(buffer-file-name) :exports both wc -w $filename #+END_SRC
Note that values read from tables and lists will not be mistakenly evaluated as Emacs Lisp code, as illustrated in the following example.
#+NAME: table | (a b c) | #+HEADER: :var data=table[0,0] #+BEGIN_SRC perl $data #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : (a b c)
Next: file, Previous: var, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:results
There are four classes of :results
header arguments. Each ‘src’
code block can take only one option per class.
Collection options specify the results. Choose one of the options; they are mutually exclusive.
value
Default. Functional mode. Result is the value returned by the last
statement in the ‘src’ code block. Languages like Python may require an
explicit return
statement in the ‘src’ code block. Usage
example: :results value
.
output
Scripting mode. Result is collected from STDOUT during execution of the code
in the ‘src’ code block. Usage example: :results output
.
Type tells what result types to expect from the execution of the code block. Choose one of the options; they are mutually exclusive. The default behavior is to automatically determine the result type.
table
, vector
Interpret the results as an Org table. If the result is a single value,
create a table with one row and one column. Usage example: :results
value table
.
list
Interpret the results as an Org list. If the result is a single value,
create a list of one element.
scalar
, verbatim
Interpret literally and insert as quoted text. Do not create a table. Usage
example: :results value verbatim
.
file
Interpret as path to a file. Inserts a link to the file. Usage example:
:results value file
.
Format pertains to the type of the result returned by the ‘src’ code block. Choose one of the options; they are mutually exclusive. The default follows from the type specified above.
raw
Interpreted as raw Org mode. Inserted directly into the buffer. Aligned if
it is a table. Usage example: :results value raw
.
org
Results enclosed in a BEGIN_SRC org
block. For comma-escape, either
TAB in the block, or export the file. Usage example: :results
value org
.
html
Results enclosed in a BEGIN_EXPORT html
block. Usage example:
:results value html
.
latex
Results enclosed in a BEGIN_EXPORT latex
block. Usage example:
:results value latex
.
code
Result enclosed in a ‘src’ code block. Useful for parsing. Usage
example: :results value code
.
pp
Result converted to pretty-print source code. Enclosed in a ‘src’ code
block. Languages supported: Emacs Lisp, Python, and Ruby. Usage example:
:results value pp
.
drawer
Result wrapped in a RESULTS drawer. Useful for containing raw
or
org
results for later scripting and automated processing. Usage
example: :results value drawer
.
Handling options after collecting the results.
silent
Do not insert results in the Org mode buffer, but echo them in the
minibuffer. Usage example: :results output silent
.
replace
Default. Insert results in the Org buffer. Remove previous results. Usage
example: :results output replace
.
append
Append results to the Org buffer. Latest results are at the bottom. Does
not remove previous results. Usage example: :results output append
.
prepend
Prepend results to the Org buffer. Latest results are at the top. Does not
remove previous results. Usage example: :results output prepend
.
Next: file-desc, Previous: results, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:file
An external :file
that saves the results of execution of the code
block. The :file
is either a file name or two strings, where the
first is the file name and the second is the description. A link to the file
is inserted. It uses an Org mode style [[file:]]
link (see Link format). Some languages, such as ‘R’, ‘dot’, ‘ditaa’, and
‘gnuplot’, automatically wrap the source code in additional boilerplate
code. Such code wrapping helps recreate the output, especially graphics
output, by executing just the :file
contents.
Next: file-ext, Previous: file, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:file-desc
A description of the results file. Org uses this description for the link
(see Link format) it inserts in the Org file. If the :file-desc
has no value, Org will use file name for both the “link” and the
“description” portion of the Org mode link.
Next: output-dir, Previous: file-desc, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:file-ext
File name extension for the output file. Org generates the file’s complete
name, and extension by combining :file-ext
, #+NAME:
of the
source block, and the output-dir header argument. To override this
auto generated file name, use the :file
header argument.
Next: dir, Previous: file-ext, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:output-dir
Specifies the :output-dir
for the results file. Org accepts an
absolute path (beginning with /
) or a relative directory (without
/
). The value can be combined with #+NAME:
of the source block
and file or file-ext header arguments.
Next: exports, Previous: output-dir, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:dir
and remote executionWhile the :file
header argument can be used to specify the path to the
output file, :dir
specifies the default directory during ‘src’
code block execution. If it is absent, then the directory associated with
the current buffer is used. In other words, supplying :dir path
temporarily has the same effect as changing the current directory with
M-x cd path RET, and then not supplying :dir
. Under the
surface, :dir
simply sets the value of the Emacs variable
default-directory
.
When using :dir
, relative paths (for example, :file myfile.jpg
or :file results/myfile.jpg
) become relative to the default directory.
For example, to save the plot file in the ‘Work’ folder of the home directory (notice tilde is expanded):
#+BEGIN_SRC R :file myplot.png :dir ~/Work matplot(matrix(rnorm(100), 10), type="l") #+END_SRC
To evaluate the ‘src’ code block on a remote machine, supply a remote s directory name using ‘Tramp’ syntax. For example:
#+BEGIN_SRC R :file plot.png :dir /scp:dand@yakuba.princeton.edu: plot(1:10, main=system("hostname", intern=TRUE)) #+END_SRC
Org first captures the text results as usual for insertion in the Org file.
Then Org also inserts a link to the remote file, thanks to Emacs
‘Tramp’. Org constructs the remote path to the file name from
:dir
and default-directory
, as illustrated here:
[[file:/scp:dand@yakuba.princeton.edu:/home/dand/plot.png][plot.png]]
:dir
is used with :session
, Org sets the starting
directory for a new session. But Org will not alter the directory of an
already existing session.
:dir
with :exports results
or with :exports
both
to avoid Org inserting incorrect links to remote files. That is because
Org does not expand default directory
to avoid some underlying
portability issues.
Next: tangle, Previous: dir, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:exports
The :exports
header argument is to specify if that part of the Org
file is exported to, say, HTML or LaTeX formats. Note that
:exports
affects only ‘src’ code blocks and not inline code.
code
The default. The body of code is included into the exported file. Example:
:exports code
.
results
The results of evaluation of the code is included in the exported file.
Example: :exports results
.
both
Both the code and results of evaluation are included in the exported file.
Example: :exports both
.
none
Neither the code nor the results of evaluation is included in the exported
file. Whether the code is evaluated at all depends on other
options. Example: :exports none
.
Next: mkdirp, Previous: exports, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:tangle
The :tangle
header argument specifies if the ‘src’ code block is
exported to source file(s).
tangle
Export the ‘src’ code block to source file. The file name for the
source file is derived from the name of the Org file, and the file extension
is derived from the source code language identifier. Example: :tangle
yes
.
no
The default. Do not extract the code a source code file. Example:
:tangle no
.
:tangle
header argument. Org derives
the file name as being relative to the directory of the Org file’s location.
Example: :tangle path
.
Next: comments, Previous: tangle, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:mkdirp
The :mkdirp
header argument creates parent directories for tangled
files if the directory does not exist. yes
enables directory creation
and no
inhibits directory creation.
Next: padline, Previous: mkdirp, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:comments
Controls inserting comments into tangled files. These are above and beyond whatever comments may already exist in the ‘src’ code block.
no
The default. Do not insert any extra comments during tangling.
link
Wrap the ‘src’ code block in comments. Include links pointing back to
the place in the Org file from where the code was tangled.
yes
Kept for backward compatibility; same as “link”.
org
Nearest headline text from Org file is inserted as comment. The exact text
that is inserted is picked from the leading context of the source block.
both
Includes both “link” and “org” comment options.
noweb
Includes “link” comment option, expands noweb references, and wraps them in
link comments inside the body of the ‘src’ code block.
Next: no-expand, Previous: comments, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:padline
Control insertion of newlines to pad ‘src’ code blocks in the tangled file.
yes
Default. Insert a newline before and after each ‘src’ code block in the
tangled file.
no
Do not insert newlines to pad the tangled ‘src’ code blocks.
Next: session, Previous: padline, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:no-expand
By default Org expands ‘src’ code blocks during tangling. The
:no-expand
header argument turns off such expansions. Note that one
side-effect of expansion by org-babel-expand-src-block
also assigns
values to :var
(see var) variables. Expansions also replace Noweb
references with their targets (see Noweb reference syntax). Some of
these expansions may cause premature assignment, hence this option. This
option makes a difference only for tangling. It has no effect when exporting
since ‘src’ code blocks for execution have to be expanded anyway.
Next: noweb, Previous: no-expand, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:session
The :session
header argument is for running multiple source code
blocks under one session. Org runs ‘src’ code blocks with the same
session name in the same interpreter process.
none
Default. Each ‘src’ code block gets a new interpreter process to
execute. The process terminates once the block is evaluated.
other
Any string besides none
turns that string into the name of that
session. For example, :session mysession
names it ‘mysession’.
If :session
has no argument, then the session name is derived from the
source language identifier. Subsequent blocks with the same source code
language use the same session. Depending on the language, state variables,
code from other blocks, and the overall interpreted environment may be
shared. Some interpreted languages support concurrent sessions when
subsequent source code language blocks change session names.
Next: noweb-ref, Previous: session, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:noweb
The :noweb
header argument controls expansion of Noweb syntax
references (see Noweb reference syntax). Expansions occur when source
code blocks are evaluated, tangled, or exported.
no
Default. No expansion of Noweb syntax references in the body of the code
when evaluating, tangling, or exporting.
yes
Expansion of Noweb syntax references in the body of the ‘src’ code block
when evaluating, tangling, or exporting.
tangle
Expansion of Noweb syntax references in the body of the ‘src’ code block
when tangling. No expansion when evaluating or exporting.
no-export
Expansion of Noweb syntax references in the body of the ‘src’ code block
when evaluating or tangling. No expansion when exporting.
strip-export
Expansion of Noweb syntax references in the body of the ‘src’ code block
when expanding prior to evaluating or tangling. Removes Noweb syntax
references when exporting.
eval
Expansion of Noweb syntax references in the body of the ‘src’ code block
only before evaluating.
Noweb insertions now honor prefix characters that appear before the Noweb syntax reference.
This behavior is illustrated in the following example. Because the
<<example>>
noweb reference appears behind the SQL comment syntax,
each line of the expanded noweb reference will be commented.
With:
#+NAME: example #+BEGIN_SRC text this is the multi-line body of example #+END_SRC
this ‘src’ code block:
#+BEGIN_SRC sql :noweb yes -- <<example>> #+END_SRC
expands to:
-- this is the -- multi-line body of example
Since this change will not affect noweb replacement text without newlines in them, inline noweb references are acceptable.
This feature can also be used for management of indentation in exported code snippets.
With:
#+NAME: if-true #+BEGIN_SRC python :exports none print('Do things when True') #+END_SRC #+NAME: if-false #+BEGIN_SRC python :exports none print('Do things when False') #+END_SRC
this ‘src’ code block:
#+BEGIN_SRC python :noweb yes :results output if True: <<if-true>> else: <<if-false>> #+END_SRC
expands to:
if True: print('Do things when True') else: print('Do things when False')
and evaluates to:
Do things when True
Next: noweb-sep, Previous: noweb, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:noweb-ref
When expanding Noweb style references, Org concatenates ‘src’ code
blocks by matching the reference name to either the code block name or the
:noweb-ref
header argument.
For simple concatenation, set this :noweb-ref
header argument at the
sub-tree or file level. In the example Org file shown next, the body of the
source code in each block is extracted for concatenation to a pure code file
when tangled.
#+BEGIN_SRC sh :tangle yes :noweb yes :shebang #!/bin/sh <<fullest-disk>> #+END_SRC * the mount point of the fullest disk :PROPERTIES: :header-args: :noweb-ref fullest-disk :END: ** query all mounted disks #+BEGIN_SRC sh df \ #+END_SRC ** strip the header row #+BEGIN_SRC sh |sed '1d' \ #+END_SRC ** output mount point of fullest disk #+BEGIN_SRC sh |awk '{if (u < +$5) {u = +$5; m = $6}} END {print m}' #+END_SRC
Next: cache, Previous: noweb-ref, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:noweb-sep
By default a newline separates each noweb reference concatenation. To change
this newline separator, edit the :noweb-sep
(see noweb-sep) header
argument.
Next: sep, Previous: noweb-sep, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:cache
The :cache
header argument is for caching results of evaluating code
blocks. Caching results can avoid re-evaluating ‘src’ code blocks that
have not changed since the previous run. To benefit from the cache and avoid
redundant evaluations, the source block must have a result already present in
the buffer, and neither the header arguments (including the value of
:var
references) nor the text of the block itself has changed since
the result was last computed. This feature greatly helps avoid long-running
calculations. For some edge cases, however, the cached results may not be
reliable.
The caching feature is best for when ‘src’ blocks are pure functions, that is functions that return the same value for the same input arguments (see var), and that do not have side effects, and do not rely on external variables other than the input arguments. Functions that depend on a timer, file system objects, and random number generators are clearly unsuitable for caching.
A note of warning: when :cache
is used for a :session
, caching
may cause unexpected results.
When the caching mechanism tests for any source code changes, it will not expand Noweb style references (see Noweb reference syntax). For reasons why, see http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.emacs.orgmode/79046.
The :cache
header argument can have one of two values: yes
or
no
.
no
Default. No caching of results; ‘src’ code block evaluated every time.
yes
Whether to run the code or return the cached results is determined by
comparing the SHA1 hash value of the combined ‘src’ code block and
arguments passed to it. This hash value is packed on the #+RESULTS:
line from previous evaluation. When hash values match, Org does not evaluate
the ‘src’ code block. When hash values mismatch, Org evaluates the
‘src’ code block, inserts the results, recalculates the hash value, and
updates #+RESULTS:
line.
In this example, both functions are cached. But caller
runs only if
the result from random
has changed since the last run.
#+NAME: random #+BEGIN_SRC R :cache yes runif(1) #+END_SRC #+RESULTS[a2a72cd647ad44515fab62e144796432793d68e1]: random 0.4659510825295 #+NAME: caller #+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp :var x=random :cache yes x #+END_SRC #+RESULTS[bec9c8724e397d5df3b696502df3ed7892fc4f5f]: caller 0.254227238707244
Next: hlines, Previous: cache, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:sep
The :sep
header argument is the delimiter for saving results as tables
to files (see file) external to Org mode. Org defaults to tab delimited
output. The function, org-open-at-point
, which is bound to C-c
C-o, also uses :sep
for opening tabular results.
Next: colnames, Previous: sep, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:hlines
In-between each table row or below the table headings, sometimes results have
horizontal lines, which are also known as hlines. The :hlines
argument with the value yes
accepts such lines. The default is
no
.
no
Strips horizontal lines from the input table. For most code, this is
desirable, or else those hline
symbols raise unbound variable errors.
The default is :hlines no
. The example shows hlines removed from the
input table.
#+NAME: many-cols | a | b | c | |---+---+---| | d | e | f | |---+---+---| | g | h | i | #+NAME: echo-table #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=many-cols return tab #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: echo-table | a | b | c | | d | e | f | | g | h | i |
yes
For :hlines yes
, the example shows hlines unchanged.
#+NAME: many-cols | a | b | c | |---+---+---| | d | e | f | |---+---+---| | g | h | i | #+NAME: echo-table #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=many-cols :hlines yes return tab #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: echo-table | a | b | c | |---+---+---| | d | e | f | |---+---+---| | g | h | i |
Next: rownames, Previous: hlines, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:colnames
The :colnames
header argument accepts yes
, no
, or
nil
values. The default value is nil
, which is unassigned.
But this header argument behaves differently depending on the source code
language.
nil
If an input table has column names (because the second row is an hline), then
Org removes the column names, processes the table, puts back the column
names, and then writes the table to the results block.
#+NAME: less-cols | a | |---| | b | | c | #+NAME: echo-table-again #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=less-cols return [[val + '*' for val in row] for row in tab] #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: echo-table-again | a | |----| | b* | | c* |
Note that column names have to accounted for when using variable indexing (see Indexable variable values) because column names are not removed for indexing.
no
Do not pre-process column names.
yes
For an input table that has no hlines, process it like the nil
value. That is, Org removes the column names, processes the table, puts back
the column names, and then writes the table to the results block.
Next: shebang, Previous: colnames, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:rownames
The :rownames
header argument can take on values yes
or
no
values. The default is no
. Note that emacs-lisp
code blocks ignore :rownames
header argument because of the ease of
table-handling in Emacs.
no
Org will not pre-process row names.
yes
If an input table has row names, then Org removes the row names, processes
the table, puts back the row names, and then writes the table to the results
block.
#+NAME: with-rownames | one | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | | two | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | #+NAME: echo-table-once-again #+BEGIN_SRC python :var tab=with-rownames :rownames yes return [[val + 10 for val in row] for row in tab] #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: echo-table-once-again | one | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | | two | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 |
Note that row names have to accounted for when using variable indexing (see Indexable variable values) because row names are not removed for indexing.
Next: tangle-mode, Previous: rownames, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:shebang
This header argument can turn results into executable script files. By
setting the :shebang
header argument to a string value (for example,
:shebang "#!/bin/bash"
), Org inserts that string as the first line of
the tangled file that the ‘src’ code block is extracted to. Org then
turns on the tangled file’s executable permission.
Next: eval, Previous: shebang, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:tangle-mode
The tangle-mode
header argument specifies what permissions to set for
tangled files by set-file-modes
. For example, to make read-only
tangled file, use :tangle-mode (identity #o444)
. To make it
executable, use :tangle-mode (identity #o755)
.
On ‘src’ code blocks with shebang
(see shebang) header
argument, Org will automatically set the tangled file to executable
permissions. But this can be overridden with custom permissions using
tangle-mode
header argument.
When multiple ‘src’ code blocks tangle to a single file with different
and conflicting tangle-mode
header arguments, Org’s behavior is
undefined.
Next: wrap, Previous: tangle-mode, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:eval
The :eval
header argument can limit evaluation of specific code
blocks. It is useful for protection against evaluating untrusted ‘src’
code blocks by prompting for a confirmation. This protection is independent
of the org-confirm-babel-evaluate
setting.
never or no
Org will never evaluate this ‘src’ code block.
query
Org prompts the user for permission to evaluate this ‘src’ code block.
never-export or no-export
Org will not evaluate this ‘src’ code block when exporting, yet the user can evaluate this source block interactively.
query-export
Org prompts the user for permission to export this ‘src’ code block.
If :eval
header argument is not set for a source block, then Org
determines whether to evaluate from the org-confirm-babel-evaluate
variable (see Code evaluation security).
Next: post, Previous: eval, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:wrap
The :wrap
header argument marks the results block by appending strings
to #+BEGIN_
and #+END_
. If no string is specified, Org wraps
the results in a #+BEGIN/END_RESULTS
block.
Next: prologue, Previous: wrap, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:post
The :post
header argument is for post-processing results from
‘src’ block evaluation. When :post
has any value, Org binds the
results to *this*
variable for easy passing to var header
argument specifications. That makes results available to other ‘src’
code blocks, or for even direct Emacs Lisp code execution.
The following two examples illustrate :post
header argument in action.
The first one shows how to attach #+ATTR_LATEX:
line using
:post
.
#+name: attr_wrap #+begin_src sh :var data="" :var width="\\textwidth" :results output echo "#+ATTR_LATEX: :width $width" echo "$data" #+end_src #+header: :file /tmp/it.png #+begin_src dot :post attr_wrap(width="5cm", data=*this*) :results drawer digraph{ a -> b; b -> c; c -> a; } #+end_src #+RESULTS: :RESULTS: #+ATTR_LATEX :width 5cm [[file:/tmp/it.png]] :END:
The second example shows use of :colnames
in :post
to pass
data between ‘src’ code blocks.
#+name: round-tbl #+begin_src emacs-lisp :var tbl="" fmt="%.3f" (mapcar (lambda (row) (mapcar (lambda (cell) (if (numberp cell) (format fmt cell) cell)) row)) tbl) #+end_src #+begin_src R :colnames yes :post round-tbl[:colnames yes](*this*) set.seed(42) data.frame(foo=rnorm(1)) #+end_src #+RESULTS: | foo | |-------| | 1.371 |
Next: epilogue, Previous: post, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:prologue
The prologue
header argument is for appending to the top of the code
block for execution. For example, a clear or reset code at the start of new
execution of a ‘src’ code block. A reset
for ‘gnuplot’:
:prologue "reset"
. See also epilogue.
(add-to-list 'org-babel-default-header-args:gnuplot '((:prologue . "reset")))
Previous: prologue, Up: Specific header arguments [Contents][Index]
:epilogue
The value of the epilogue
header argument is for appending to the end
of the code block for execution. See also prologue.
Next: Noweb reference syntax, Previous: Header arguments, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
How Org handles results of a code block execution depends on many header arguments working together. Here is only a summary of these. For an enumeration of all the header arguments that affect results, see results.
The primary determinant is the execution context. Is it in a :session
or not? Orthogonal to that is if the expected result is a :results
value
or :results output
, which is a concatenation of output from
start to finish of the ‘src’ code block’s evaluation.
Non-session | Session | |
:results value | value of last expression | value of last expression |
:results output | contents of STDOUT | concatenation of interpreter output |
For :session
and non-session, the :results value
turns the
results into an Org mode table format. Single values are wrapped in a one
dimensional vector. Rows and columns of a table are wrapped in a
two-dimensional vector.
:results value
Default. Org gets the value by wrapping the code in a function definition in
the language of the ‘src’ block. That is why when using :results
value
, code should execute like a function and return a value. For
languages like Python, an explicit return
statement is mandatory when
using :results value
.
This is one of four evaluation contexts where Org automatically wraps the code in a function definition.
:results output
For :results output
, the code is passed to an external process running
the interpreter. Org returns the contents of the standard output stream as
as text results.
:results value
For :results value
from a :session
, Org passes the code to an
interpreter running as an interactive Emacs inferior process. So only
languages that provide interactive evaluation can have session support. Not
all languages provide this support, such as ‘C’ and ‘ditaa’. Even
those that do support, such as ‘Python’ and ‘Haskell’, they impose
limitations on allowable language constructs that can run interactively. Org
inherits those limitations for those ‘src’ code blocks running in a
:session
.
Org gets the value from the source code interpreter’s last statement
output. Org has to use language-specific methods to obtain the value. For
example, from the variable _
in ‘Python’ and ‘Ruby’, and the
value of .Last.value
in ‘R’).
:results output
For :results output
, Org passes the code to the interpreter running as
an interactive Emacs inferior process. Org concatenates whatever text output
emitted by the interpreter to return the collection as a result. Note that
this collection is not the same as collected from STDOUT
of a
non-interactive interpreter running as an external process. Compare for
example these two blocks:
#+BEGIN_SRC python :results output print "hello" 2 print "bye" #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : hello : bye
In the above non-session mode, the “2” is not printed; so does not appear in results.
#+BEGIN_SRC python :results output :session print "hello" 2 print "bye" #+END_SRC #+RESULTS: : hello : 2 : bye
In the above :session
mode, the interactive interpreter receives and
prints “2”. Results show that.
Next: Key bindings and useful functions, Previous: Results of evaluation, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
Org supports named blocks in Noweb style syntax. For Noweb literate programming details, see http://www.cs.tufts.edu/~nr/noweb/).
<<code-block-name>>
For the header argument :noweb yes
, Org expands Noweb style references
in the ‘src’ code block before evaluation.
For the header argument :noweb no
, Org does not expand Noweb style
references in the ‘src’ code block before evaluation.
The default is :noweb no
. Org defaults to :noweb no
so as not
to cause errors in languages where Noweb syntax is ambiguous. Change Org’s
default to :noweb yes
for languages where there is no risk of
confusion.
Org offers a more flexible way to resolve Noweb style references (see noweb-ref).
Org can include the results of a code block rather than its body. To that effect, append parentheses, possibly including arguments, to the code block name, as show below.
<<code-block-name(optional arguments)>>
Note that when using the above approach to a code block’s results, the code
block name set by #+NAME
keyword is required; the reference set by
:noweb-ref
will not work.
Here is an example that demonstrates how the exported content changes when Noweb style references are used with parentheses versus without.
With:
#+NAME: some-code #+BEGIN_SRC python :var num=0 :results output :exports none print(num*10) #+END_SRC
this code block:
#+BEGIN_SRC text :noweb yes <<some-code>> #+END_SRC
expands to:
print(num*10)
Below, a similar Noweb style reference is used, but with parentheses, while
setting a variable num
to 10:
#+BEGIN_SRC text :noweb yes <<some-code(num=10)>> #+END_SRC
Note that now the expansion contains the results of the code block
some-code
, not the code block itself:
100
For faster tangling of large Org mode files, set
org-babel-use-quick-and-dirty-noweb-expansion
variable to t
.
The speedup comes at the expense of not correctly resolving inherited values
of the :noweb-ref
header argument.
Next: Batch execution, Previous: Noweb reference syntax, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
Many common Org mode key sequences are re-bound depending on the context.
Active key bindings in code blocks:
C-c C-c | org-babel-execute-src-block
|
C-c C-o | org-babel-open-src-block-result
|
M-UP | org-babel-load-in-session
|
M-DOWN | org-babel-switch-to-session |
Active key bindings in Org mode buffer:
Previous: Key bindings and useful functions, Up: Working with source code [Contents][Index]
Org mode features, including working with source code facilities can be invoked from the command line. This enables building shell scripts for batch processing, running automated system tasks, and expanding Org mode’s usefulness.
The sample script shows batch processing of multiple files using
org-babel-tangle
.
#!/bin/sh # tangle files with org-mode # emacs -Q --batch --eval " (progn (require 'ob-tangle) (dolist (file command-line-args-left) (with-current-buffer (find-file-noselect file) (org-babel-tangle)))) " "$@"
Next: Hacking, Previous: Working with source code, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
• Completion: | M-TAB guesses completions | |
• Easy templates: | Quick insertion of structural elements | |
• Speed keys: | Electric commands at the beginning of a headline | |
• Code evaluation security: | Org mode files evaluate inline code | |
• Customization: | Adapting Org to changing tastes | |
• In-buffer settings: | Overview of the #+KEYWORDS
| |
• The very busy C-c C-c key: | When in doubt, press C-c C-c | |
• Clean view: | Getting rid of leading stars in the outline | |
• TTY keys: | Using Org on a tty | |
• Interaction: | With other Emacs packages | |
• org-crypt: | Encrypting Org files |
Next: Easy templates, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
Org has in-buffer completions. Unlike minibuffer completions, which are useful for quick command interactions, Org’s in-buffer completions are more suitable for content creation in Org documents. Type one or more letters and invoke the hot key to complete the text in-place. Depending on the context and the keys, Org will offer different types of completions. No minibuffer is involved. Such mode-specific hot keys have become an integral part of Emacs and Org provides several shortcuts.
Complete word at point
org-tag-alist
(possibly set through the
#+TAGS
in-buffer option, see Setting tags), or it is created
dynamically from all tags used in the current buffer.
#+STARTUP:
, complete startup keywords.
If your desktop intercepts the combo M-TAB to switch windows, use C-M-i or ESC TAB as an alternative or customize your environment.
Next: Speed keys, Previous: Completion, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
With just a few keystrokes, Org’s easy templates inserts empty pairs of
structural elements, such as #+BEGIN_SRC
and #+END_SRC
. Easy
templates use an expansion mechanism, which is native to Org, in a process
similar to yasnippet and other Emacs template expansion packages.
< s TAB expands to a ‘src’ code block.
< l TAB expands to:
#+BEGIN_EXPORT latex
#+END_EXPORT
Org comes with these pre-defined easy templates:
s | #+BEGIN_SRC ... #+END_SRC |
e | #+BEGIN_EXAMPLE ... #+END_EXAMPLE |
q | #+BEGIN_QUOTE ... #+END_QUOTE |
v | #+BEGIN_VERSE ... #+END_VERSE |
c | #+BEGIN_CENTER ... #+END_CENTER |
C | #+BEGIN_COMMENT ... #+END_COMMENT |
l | #+BEGIN_EXPORT latex ... #+END_EXPORT |
L | #+LATEX: |
h | #+BEGIN_EXPORT html ... #+END_EXPORT |
H | #+HTML: |
a | #+BEGIN_EXPORT ascii ... #+END_EXPORT |
A | #+ASCII: |
i | #+INDEX: line |
I | #+INCLUDE: line |
More templates can added by customizing the variable
org-structure-template-alist
, whose docstring has additional details.
Next: Code evaluation security, Previous: Easy templates, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
Single keystrokes can execute custom commands in an Org file when the cursor is on a headline. Without the extra burden of a meta or modifier key, Speed Keys can speed navigation or execute custom commands. Besides faster navigation, Speed Keys may come in handy on small mobile devices that do not have full keyboards. Speed Keys may also work on TTY devices known for their problems when entering Emacs keychords.
By default, Org has Speed Keys disabled. To activate Speed Keys, set the
variable org-use-speed-commands
to a non-nil
value. To trigger
a Speed Key, the cursor must be at the beginning of an Org headline, before
any of the stars.
Org comes with a pre-defined list of Speed Keys. To add or modify Speed
Keys, customize the variable, org-speed-commands-user
. For more
details, see the variable’s docstring. With Speed Keys activated, M-x
org-speed-command-help, or ? when cursor is at the beginning of an Org
headline, shows currently active Speed Keys, including the user-defined ones.
Next: Customization, Previous: Speed keys, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
Unlike plain text, running code comes with risk. Each ‘src’ code block, in terms of risk, is equivalent to an executable file. Org therefore puts a few confirmation prompts by default. This is to alert the casual user from accidentally running untrusted code.
For users who do not run code blocks or write code regularly, Org’s default settings should suffice. However, some users may want to tweak the prompts for fewer interruptions. To weigh the risks of automatic execution of code blocks, here are some details about code evaluation.
Org evaluates code in the following circumstances:
Org evaluates ‘src’ code blocks in an Org file during export. Org also evaluates a ‘src’ code block with the C-c C-c key chord. Users exporting or running code blocks must load files only from trusted sources. Be wary of customizing variables that remove or alter default security measures.
When t
, Org prompts the user for confirmation before executing each
code block. When nil
, Org executes code blocks without prompting the
user for confirmation. When this option is set to a custom function, Org
invokes the function with these two arguments: the source code language and
the body of the code block. The custom function must return either a
t
or nil
, which determines if the user is prompted. Each
source code language can be handled separately through this function
argument.
For example, this function enables execution of ‘ditaa’ code +blocks without prompting:
(defun my-org-confirm-babel-evaluate (lang body) (not (string= lang "ditaa"))) ; don't ask for ditaa (setq org-confirm-babel-evaluate 'my-org-confirm-babel-evaluate)
shell
and elisp
linksOrg has two link types that can also directly evaluate code (see External links). Because such code is not visible, these links have a potential risk. Org therefore prompts the user when it encounters such links. The customization variables are:
Function that prompts the user before executing a shell link.
Function that prompts the user before executing an Emacs Lisp link.
Org executes formulas in tables (see The spreadsheet) either through the calc or the Emacs Lisp interpreters.
Next: In-buffer settings, Previous: Code evaluation security, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
Org has more than 500 variables for customization. They can be accessed
through the usual M-x org-customize RET command. Or through the
Org menu, Org->Customization->Browse Org Group
. Org also has per-file
settings for some variables (see In-buffer settings).
Next: The very busy C-c C-c key, Previous: Customization, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
In-buffer settings start with ‘#+’, followed by a keyword, a colon, and then a word for each setting. Org accepts multiple settings on the same line. Org also accepts multiple lines for a keyword. This manual describes these settings throughout. A summary follows here.
C-c C-c activates any changes to the in-buffer settings. Closing and reopening the Org file in Emacs also activates the changes.
Sets the archive location of the agenda file. This location applies to the
lines until the next #+ARCHIVE
line, if any, in the Org file. The
first archive location in the Org file also applies to any entries before it.
The corresponding variable is org-archive-location
.
Sets the category of the agenda file, which applies to the entire document.
Sets the default format for columns view. Org uses this format for column
views where there is no COLUMNS
property.
Set file-local values for constants that table formulas can use. This line
sets the local variable org-table-formula-constants-local
. The global
version of this variable is org-table-formula-constants
.
Set tags that all entries in the file will inherit from here, including the top-level entries.
Each line specifies one abbreviation for one link. Use multiple
#+LINK:
lines for more, see Link abbreviations. The corresponding
variable is org-link-abbrev-alist
.
This line sets the limits and the default for the priorities. All three must be either letters A–Z or numbers 0–9. The highest priority must have a lower ASCII number than the lowest priority.
This line sets a default inheritance value for entries in the current buffer, most useful for specifying the allowed values of a property.
The setup file or a URL pointing to such file is for additional in-buffer settings. Org loads this file and parses it for any settings in it only when Org opens the main file. If URL is specified, the contents are downloaded and stored in a temporary file cache. C-c C-c on the settings line will parse and load the file, and also reset the temporary file cache. Org also parses and loads the document during normal exporting process. Org parses the contents of this document as if it was included in the buffer. It can be another Org file. To visit the file (not a URL), C-c ' while the cursor is on the line with the file name.
Startup options Org uses when first visiting a file.
The first set of options deals with the initial visibility of the outline
tree. The corresponding variable for global default settings is
org-startup-folded
with a default value of t
, which is the same
as overview
.
overview top-level headlines only content all headlines showall no folding of any entries showeverything show even drawer contents
Dynamic virtual indentation is controlled by the variable
org-startup-indented
indent start withorg-indent-mode
turned on noindent start withorg-indent-mode
turned off
Aligns tables consistently upon visiting a file; useful for restoring
narrowed table columns. The corresponding variable is
org-startup-align-all-tables
with nil
as default value.
align align all tables noalign don’t align tables on startup
Whether Org should automatically display inline images. The corresponding
variable is org-startup-with-inline-images
, with a default value
nil
to avoid delays when visiting a file.
inlineimages show inline images noinlineimages don’t show inline images on startup
Whether Org should automatically convert LaTeX fragments to images. The
variable org-startup-with-latex-preview
, which controls this setting,
is set to nil
by default to avoid startup delays.
latexpreview preview LaTeX fragments nolatexpreview don’t preview LaTeX fragments
Logging the closing and reopening of TODO items and clock intervals can be
configured using these options (see variables org-log-done
,
org-log-note-clock-out
and org-log-repeat
)
logdone record a timestamp when an item is marked DONE lognotedone record timestamp and a note when DONE nologdone don’t record when items are marked DONE logrepeat record a time when reinstating a repeating item lognoterepeat record a note when reinstating a repeating item nologrepeat do not record when reinstating repeating item lognoteclock-out record a note when clocking out nolognoteclock-out don’t record a note when clocking out logreschedule record a timestamp when scheduling time changes lognotereschedule record a note when scheduling time changes nologreschedule do not record when a scheduling date changes logredeadline record a timestamp when deadline changes lognoteredeadline record a note when deadline changes nologredeadline do not record when a deadline date changes logrefile record a timestamp when refiling lognoterefile record a note when refiling nologrefile do not record when refiling logdrawer store log into drawer nologdrawer store log outside of drawer logstatesreversed reverse the order of states notes nologstatesreversed do not reverse the order of states notes
These options hide leading stars in outline headings, and indent outlines.
The corresponding variables are org-hide-leading-stars
and
org-odd-levels-only
, both with a default setting of nil
(meaning showstars
and oddeven
).
hidestars hide all stars on the headline except one. showstars show all stars on the headline indent virtual indents according to the outline level noindent no virtual indents odd show odd outline levels only (1,3,...) oddeven show all outline levels
To turn on custom format overlays over timestamps (variables
org-put-time-stamp-overlays
and
org-time-stamp-overlay-formats
), use
customtime overlay custom time format
The following options influence the table spreadsheet (variable
constants-unit-system
).
constcgs constants.el should use the c-g-s unit system constSI constants.el should use the SI unit system
For footnote settings, use the following keywords. The corresponding
variables are org-footnote-define-inline
,
org-footnote-auto-label
, and org-footnote-auto-adjust
.
fninline define footnotes inline fnnoinline define footnotes in separate section fnlocal define footnotes near first reference, but not inline fnprompt prompt for footnote labels fnauto create[fn:1]
-like labels automatically (default) fnconfirm offer automatic label for editing or confirmation fnplain create[1]
-like labels automatically fnadjust automatically renumber and sort footnotes nofnadjust do not renumber and sort automatically
To hide blocks on startup, use these keywords. The corresponding variable is
org-hide-block-startup
.
hideblocks Hide all begin/end blocks on startup nohideblocks Do not hide blocks on startup
The display of entities as UTF-8 characters is governed by the variable
org-pretty-entities
and the keywords
entitiespretty Show entities as UTF-8 characters where possible entitiesplain Leave entities plain
These lines specify valid tags for this file. Org accepts multiple tags
lines. Tags could correspond to the fast tag selection keys. The
corresponding variable is org-tag-alist
.
This line is for formulas for the table directly above. A table can have
multiple #+TBLFM:
lines. On table recalculation, Org applies only the
first #+TBLFM:
line. For details see Using multiple #+TBLFM lines in Editing and debugging formulas.
These lines provide settings for exporting files. For more details see Export settings.
These lines set the TODO keywords and their significance to the current file.
The corresponding variable is org-todo-keywords
.
Next: Clean view, Previous: In-buffer settings, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
The C-c C-c key in Org serves many purposes depending on the context. It is probably the most over-worked, multi-purpose key combination in Org. Its uses are well-documented through out this manual, but here is a consolidated list for easy reference.
#+KEYWORD
lines, scan the
buffer for these lines and update the information. Also reset the Org file
cache used to temporary store the contents of URLs used as values for
keywords like #+SETUPFILE
.
#+TBLFM
line, re-apply the formulas to
the entire table.
<<<target>>>
, update radio targets and
corresponding links in this buffer.
#+BEGIN
line of a dynamic block, the
block is updated.
Next: TTY keys, Previous: The very busy C-c C-c key, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
Org’s default outline with stars and no indents can become too cluttered for short documents. For book-like long documents, the effect is not as noticeable. Org provides an alternate stars and indentation scheme, as shown on the right in the following table. It uses only one star and indents text to line with the heading:
* Top level headline | * Top level headline ** Second level | * Second level *** 3rd level | * 3rd level some text | some text *** 3rd level | * 3rd level more text | more text * Another top level headline | * Another top level headline
To turn this mode on, use the minor mode, org-indent-mode
. Text lines
that are not headlines are prefixed with spaces to vertically align with the
headline text144.
To make more horizontal space, the headlines are shifted by two stars. This
can be configured by the org-indent-indentation-per-level
variable.
Only one star on each headline is visible, the rest are masked with the same
font color as the background. This font face can be configured with the
org-hide
variable.
Note that turning on org-indent-mode
sets
org-hide-leading-stars
to t
and org-adapt-indentation
to
nil
; ‘2.’ below shows how this works.
To globally turn on org-indent-mode
for all files, customize the
variable org-startup-indented
.
To turn on indenting for individual files, use #+STARTUP
option as
follows:
#+STARTUP: indent
Indent on startup makes Org use hard spaces to align text with headings as shown in examples below.
*** 3rd level more text, now indented
Org adapts indentations with paragraph filling, line wrapping, and structure editing145.
org-hide-leading-stars
. For
per-file preference, use these file #+STARTUP
options:
#+STARTUP: hidestars #+STARTUP: showstars
With stars hidden, the tree is shown as:
* Top level headline * Second level * 3rd level ...
Because Org makes the font color same as the background color to hide to
stars, sometimes org-hide
face may need tweaking to get the effect
right. For some black and white combinations, grey90
on a white
background might mask the stars better.
org-odd-levels-only
. To set this per-file, use either
one of the following lines:
#+STARTUP: odd #+STARTUP: oddeven
To switch between single and double stars layouts, use M-x org-convert-to-odd-levels RET and M-x org-convert-to-oddeven-levels RET.
Next: Interaction, Previous: Clean view, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
Org provides alternative key bindings for TTY and modern mobile devices that cannot handle cursor keys and complex modifier key chords. Some of these workarounds may be more cumbersome than necessary. Users should look into customizing these further based on their usage needs. For example, the normal S-cursor for editing timestamp might be better with C-c . chord.
Default | Alternative 1 | Speed key | Alternative 2 |
S-TAB | C-u TAB | C | |
M-LEFT | C-c C-x l | l | Esc LEFT |
M-S-LEFT | C-c C-x L | L | |
M-RIGHT | C-c C-x r | r | Esc RIGHT |
M-S-RIGHT | C-c C-x R | R | |
M-UP | C-c C-x u | Esc UP | |
M-S-UP | C-c C-x U | U | |
M-DOWN | C-c C-x d | Esc DOWN | |
M-S-DOWN | C-c C-x D | D | |
S-RET | C-c C-x c | ||
M-RET | C-c C-x m | Esc RET | |
M-S-RET | C-c C-x M | ||
S-LEFT | C-c LEFT | ||
S-RIGHT | C-c RIGHT | ||
S-UP | C-c UP | ||
S-DOWN | C-c DOWN | ||
C-S-LEFT | C-c C-x LEFT | ||
C-S-RIGHT | C-c C-x RIGHT |
Next: org-crypt, Previous: TTY keys, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
Org’s compatibility and the level of interaction with other Emacs packages are documented here.
• Cooperation: | Packages Org cooperates with | |
• Conflicts: | Packages that lead to conflicts |
Next: Conflicts, Up: Interaction [Contents][Index]
Org uses the Calc package for tables to implement spreadsheet functionality (see The spreadsheet). Org also uses Calc for embedded calculations. See Embedded Mode in GNU Emacs Calc Manual.
Org can use names for constants in formulas in tables. Org can also use
calculation suffixes for units, such as ‘M’ for ‘Mega’. For a
standard collection of such constants, install the constants package.
Install version 2.0 of this package, available at
https://staff.fnwi.uva.nl/c.dominik/Tools/. Org checks if the function
constants-get
has been autoloaded. Installation instructions are in
the file, constants.el.
Org mode can use CDLaTeX package to efficiently enter LaTeX fragments into Org files (see CDLaTeX mode).
Imenu creates dynamic menus based on an index of items in a file. Org mode supports Imenu menus. Enable it with a mode hook as follows:
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook (lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Imenu")))
By default the Imenu index is two levels deep. Change the index depth using
thes variable, org-imenu-depth
.
Speedbar package creates a special Emacs frame for displaying files and index items in files. Org mode supports Speedbar; users can drill into Org files directly from the Speedbar. The < in the Speedbar frame tweaks the agenda commands to that file or to a subtree.
Complex ASCII tables with automatic line wrapping, column- and row-spanning, and alignment can be created using the Emacs table package by Takaaki Ota. Org mode recognizes such tables and export them properly. C-c ' to edit these tables in a special buffer, much like Org’s ‘src’ code blocks. Because of interference with other Org mode functionality, Takaaki Ota tables cannot be edited directly in the Org buffer.
org-edit-special
)Edit a table.el table. Works when the cursor is in a table.el table.
org-table-create-with-table.el
)Insert a table.el table. If there is already a table at point, this
command converts it between the table.el format and the Org mode
format. See the documentation string of the command org-convert-table
for details.
Previous: Cooperation, Up: Interaction [Contents][Index]
In Emacs, shift-selection-mode
combines cursor motions with shift key
to enlarge regions. Emacs sets this mode by default. This conflicts with
Org’s use of S-cursor commands to change timestamps, TODO
keywords, priorities, and item bullet types, etc. Since S-cursor
commands outside of specific contexts don’t do anything, Org offers the
variable org-support-shift-select
for customization. Org mode
accommodates shift selection by (i) making it available outside of the
special contexts where special commands apply, and (ii) extending an
existing active region even if the cursor moves across a special context.
Org key bindings conflict with S-<cursor> keys used by CUA mode. For
Org to relinquish these bindings to CUA mode, configure the variable
org-replace-disputed-keys
. When set, Org moves the following key
bindings in Org files, and in the agenda buffer (but not during date
selection).
S-UP ⇒ M-p S-DOWN ⇒ M-n S-LEFT ⇒ M-- S-RIGHT ⇒ M-+ C-S-LEFT ⇒ M-S-- C-S-RIGHT ⇒ M-S-+
Yes, these are unfortunately more difficult to remember. To define a
different replacement keys, look at the variable org-disputed-keys
.
Ecomplete provides “electric” address completion in address header lines in message buffers. Sadly Orgtbl mode cuts ecompletes power supply: No completion happens when Orgtbl mode is enabled in message buffers while entering text in address header lines. If one wants to use ecomplete one should not follow the advice to automagically turn on Orgtbl mode in message buffers (see Orgtbl mode), but instead—after filling in the message headers—turn on Orgtbl mode manually when needed in the messages body.
Org mode tries to do the right thing when filling paragraphs, list items and other elements. Many users reported problems using both filladapt.el and Org mode, so a safe thing to do is to disable filladapt like this:
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-off-filladapt-mode)
The way Org mode binds the TAB key (binding to [tab]
instead of
"\t"
) overrules YASnippet’s access to this key. The following code
fixed this problem:
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook (lambda () (setq-local yas/trigger-key [tab]) (define-key yas/keymap [tab] 'yas/next-field-or-maybe-expand)))
The latest version of yasnippet doesn’t play well with Org mode. If the above code does not fix the conflict, first define the following function:
(defun yas/org-very-safe-expand () (let ((yas/fallback-behavior 'return-nil)) (yas/expand)))
Then tell Org mode to use that function:
(add-hook 'org-mode-hook (lambda () (make-variable-buffer-local 'yas/trigger-key) (setq yas/trigger-key [tab]) (add-to-list 'org-tab-first-hook 'yas/org-very-safe-expand) (define-key yas/keymap [tab] 'yas/next-field)))
This package also uses the S-<cursor> keys, so everything written in the paragraph above about CUA mode also applies here. If you want make the windmove function active in locations where Org mode does not have special functionality on S-cursor, add this to your configuration:
;; Make windmove work in org-mode: (add-hook 'org-shiftup-final-hook 'windmove-up) (add-hook 'org-shiftleft-final-hook 'windmove-left) (add-hook 'org-shiftdown-final-hook 'windmove-down) (add-hook 'org-shiftright-final-hook 'windmove-right)
Viper uses C-c / and therefore makes this key not access the
corresponding Org mode command org-sparse-tree
. You need to find
another key for this command, or override the key in
viper-vi-global-user-map
with
(define-key viper-vi-global-user-map "C-c /" 'org-sparse-tree)
Previous: Interaction, Up: Miscellaneous [Contents][Index]
Org crypt encrypts the text of an Org entry, but not the headline, or properties. Org crypt uses the Emacs EasyPG library to encrypt and decrypt.
Any text below a headline that has a ‘:crypt:’ tag will be automatically
be encrypted when the file is saved. To use a different tag, customize the
org-crypt-tag-matcher
variable.
Suggested Org crypt settings in Emacs init file:
(require 'org-crypt) (org-crypt-use-before-save-magic) (setq org-tags-exclude-from-inheritance (quote ("crypt"))) (setq org-crypt-key nil) ;; GPG key to use for encryption ;; Either the Key ID or set to nil to use symmetric encryption. (setq auto-save-default nil) ;; Auto-saving does not cooperate with org-crypt.el: so you need ;; to turn it off if you plan to use org-crypt.el quite often. ;; Otherwise, you'll get an (annoying) message each time you ;; start Org. ;; To turn it off only locally, you can insert this: ;; ;; # -*- buffer-auto-save-file-name: nil; -*-
Excluding the crypt tag from inheritance prevents encrypting previously encrypted text.
Next: MobileOrg, Previous: Miscellaneous, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This appendix covers some areas where users can extend the functionality of Org.
• Hooks: | How to reach into Org’s internals | |
• Add-on packages: | Available extensions | |
• Adding hyperlink types: | New custom link types | |
• Adding export back-ends: | How to write new export back-ends | |
• Context-sensitive commands: | How to add functionality to such commands | |
• Tables in arbitrary syntax: | Orgtbl for LaTeX and other programs | |
• Dynamic blocks: | Automatically filled blocks | |
• Special agenda views: | Customized views | |
• Speeding up your agendas: | Tips on how to speed up your agendas | |
• Extracting agenda information: | Post-processing of agenda information | |
• Using the property API: | Writing programs that use entry properties | |
• Using the mapping API: | Mapping over all or selected entries |
Next: Add-on packages, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Org has a large number of hook variables for adding functionality. This appendix illustrates using a few. A complete list of hooks with documentation is maintained by the Worg project at https://orgmode.org/worg/doc.html#hooks.
Next: Adding hyperlink types, Previous: Hooks, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Various authors wrote a large number of add-on packages for Org.
These packages are not part of Emacs, but they are distributed as contributed packages with the separate release available at https://orgmode.org. See the contrib/README file in the source code directory for a list of contributed files. Worg page with more information is at: https://orgmode.org/worg/org-contrib/.
Next: Adding export back-ends, Previous: Add-on packages, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Org has many built-in hyperlink types (see Hyperlinks), and an interface for adding new link types. The example file, org-man.el, shows the process of adding Org links to Unix man pages, which look like this: ‘[[man:printf][The printf manpage]]’:
;;; org-man.el - Support for links to manpages in Org (require 'org) (org-add-link-type "man" 'org-man-open) (add-hook 'org-store-link-functions 'org-man-store-link) (defcustom org-man-command 'man "The Emacs command to be used to display a man page." :group 'org-link :type '(choice (const man) (const woman))) (defun org-man-open (path) "Visit the manpage on PATH. PATH should be a topic that can be thrown at the man command." (funcall org-man-command path)) (defun org-man-store-link () "Store a link to a manpage." (when (memq major-mode '(Man-mode woman-mode)) ;; This is a man page, we do make this link (let* ((page (org-man-get-page-name)) (link (concat "man:" page)) (description (format "Manpage for %s" page))) (org-store-link-props :type "man" :link link :description description)))) (defun org-man-get-page-name () "Extract the page name from the buffer name." ;; This works for both `Man-mode' and `woman-mode'. (if (string-match " \\(\\S-+\\)\\*" (buffer-name)) (match-string 1 (buffer-name)) (error "Cannot create link to this man page"))) (provide 'org-man) ;;; org-man.el ends here
To activate links to man pages in Org, enter this in the init file:
(require 'org-man)
A review of org-man.el:
(require 'org)
ensures org.el is loaded.
org-add-link-type
defines a new link type with ‘man’ prefix.
The call contains the function to call that follows the link type.
org-store-link-functions
that records
a useful link with the command C-c l in a buffer displaying a man page.
The rest of the file defines necessary variables and functions. First is the
customization variable org-man-command
. It has two options,
man
and woman
. Next is a function whose argument is the link
path, which for man pages is the topic of the man command. To follow the
link, the function calls the org-man-command
to display the man page.
C-c l constructs and stores the link.
C-c l calls the function org-man-store-link
, which first checks
if the major-mode
is appropriate. If check fails, the function
returns nil
. Otherwise the function makes a link string by combining
the ‘man:’ prefix with the man topic. The function then calls
org-store-link-props
with :type
and :link
properties. A
:description
property is an optional string that is displayed when the
function inserts the link in the Org buffer.
C-c C-l inserts the stored link.
To define new link types, define a function that implements completion support with C-c C-l. This function should not accept any arguments but return the appropriate prefix and complete link string.
Next: Context-sensitive commands, Previous: Adding hyperlink types, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Org’s export engine makes it easy for writing new back-ends. The framework on which the engine was built makes it easy to derive new back-ends from existing ones.
The two main entry points to the export engine are:
org-export-define-backend
and
org-export-define-derived-backend
. To grok these functions, see
ox-latex.el for an example of defining a new back-end from scratch,
and ox-beamer.el for an example of deriving from an existing engine.
For creating a new back-end from scratch, first set its name as a symbol in
an alist consisting of elements and export functions. To make the back-end
visible to the export dispatcher, set :menu-entry
keyword. For export
options specific to this back-end, set the :options-alist
.
For creating a new back-end from an existing one, set :translate-alist
to an alist of export functions. This alist replaces the parent back-end
functions.
For complete documentation, see the Org Export Reference on Worg.
Next: Tables in arbitrary syntax, Previous: Adding export back-ends, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Org has facilities for building context sensitive commands. Authors of Org add-ons can tap into this functionality.
Some Org commands change depending on the context. The most important example of this behavior is the C-c C-c (see The very busy C-c C-c key). Other examples are M-cursor and M-S-cursor.
These context sensitive commands work by providing a function that detects special context for that add-on and executes functionality appropriate for that context.
Next: Dynamic blocks, Previous: Context-sensitive commands, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Because of Org’s success in handling tables with Orgtbl, a frequently asked feature is to Org’s usability functions to other table formats native to other modem’s, such as LaTeX. This would be hard to do in a general way without complicated customization nightmares. Moreover, that would take Org away from its simplicity roots that Orgtbl has proven. There is, however, an alternate approach to accomplishing the same.
This approach involves implementing a custom translate function that operates on a native Org source table to produce a table in another format. This strategy would keep the excellently working Orgtbl simple and isolate complications, if any, confined to the translate function. To add more alien table formats, we just add more translate functions. Also the burden of developing custom translate functions for new table formats will be in the hands of those who know those formats best.
For an example of how this strategy works, see Orgstruct mode. In that mode,
Bastien added the ability to use Org’s facilities to edit and re-structure
lists. He did by turning orgstruct-mode
on, and then exporting the
list locally to another format, such as HTML, LaTeX or Texinfo.
• Radio tables: | Sending and receiving radio tables | |
• A LaTeX example: | Step by step, almost a tutorial | |
• Translator functions: | Copy and modify | |
• Radio lists: | Sending and receiving lists |
Next: A LaTeX example, Up: Tables in arbitrary syntax [Contents][Index]
Radio tables are target locations for translated tables that are not near their source. Org finds the target location and inserts the translated table.
The key to finding the target location are the magic words BEGIN/END
RECEIVE ORGTBL
. They have to appear as comments in the current mode. If
the mode is C, then:
/* BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL table_name */ /* END RECEIVE ORGTBL table_name */
At the location of source, Org needs a special line to direct Orgtbl to translate and to find the target for inserting the translated table. For example:
#+ORGTBL: SEND table_name translation_function arguments...
table_name
is the table’s reference name, which is also used in the
receiver lines, and the translation_function
is the Lisp function that
translates. This line, in addition, may also contain alternating key and
value arguments at the end. The translation function gets these values as a
property list. A few standard parameters are already recognized and acted
upon before the translation function is called:
:skip N
Skip the first N lines of the table. Hlines do count; include them if they are to be skipped.
:skipcols (n1 n2 ...)
List of columns to be skipped. First Org automatically discards columns with calculation marks and then sends the table to the translator function, which then skips columns as specified in ‘skipcols’.
To keep the source table intact in the buffer without being disturbed when the source file is compiled or otherwise being worked on, use one of these strategies:
Next: Translator functions, Previous: Radio tables, Up: Tables in arbitrary syntax [Contents][Index]
To wrap a source table in LaTeX, use the comment
environment
provided by comment.sty. To activate it, put
\usepackage{comment}
in the document header. Orgtbl mode inserts a
radio table skeleton147 with the command M-x
orgtbl-insert-radio-table RET, which prompts for a table name. For
example, if ‘salesfigures’ is the name, the template inserts:
% BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures \begin{comment} #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex | | | \end{comment}
The line #+ORGTBL: SEND
tells Orgtbl mode to use the function
orgtbl-to-latex
to convert the table to LaTeX format, then insert
the table at the target (receive) location named salesfigures
. Now
the table is ready for data entry. It can even use spreadsheet
features148:
% BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures \begin{comment} #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex | Month | Days | Nr sold | per day | |-------+------+---------+---------| | Jan | 23 | 55 | 2.4 | | Feb | 21 | 16 | 0.8 | | March | 22 | 278 | 12.6 | #+TBLFM: $4=$3/$2;%.1f % $ (optional extra dollar to keep font-lock happy, see footnote) \end{comment}
After editing, C-c C-c inserts translated table at the target location, between the two marker lines.
For hand-made custom tables, note that the translator needs to skip the first two lines of the source table. Also the command has to splice out the target table without the header and footer.
\begin{tabular}{lrrr} Month & \multicolumn{1}{c}{Days} & Nr.\ sold & per day\\ % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures \end{tabular} % \begin{comment} #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex :splice t :skip 2 | Month | Days | Nr sold | per day | |-------+------+---------+---------| | Jan | 23 | 55 | 2.4 | | Feb | 21 | 16 | 0.8 | | March | 22 | 278 | 12.6 | #+TBLFM: $4=$3/$2;%.1f \end{comment}
The LaTeX translator function orgtbl-to-latex
is already part of
Orgtbl mode and uses tabular
environment by default to typeset the
table and mark the horizontal lines with \hline
. For additional
parameters to control output, see Translator functions:
:splice nil/t
When non-nil
, returns only table body lines; not wrapped in tabular
environment. Default is nil
.
:fmt fmt
Format to warp each field. It should contain %s
for the original
field value. For example, to wrap each field value in dollar symbol, you
could use :fmt "$%s$"
. Format can also wrap a property list with
column numbers and formats, for example :fmt (2 "$%s$" 4 "%s\\%%")
.
In place of a string, a function of one argument can be used; the function
must return a formatted string.
:efmt efmt
Format numbers as exponentials. The spec should have %s
twice for
inserting mantissa and exponent, for example "%s\\times10^{%s}"
.
This may also be a property list with column numbers and formats, for example
:efmt (2 "$%s\\times10^{%s}$" 4 "$%s\\cdot10^{%s}$")
. After
efmt
has been applied to a value, fmt
will also be applied.
Functions with two arguments can be supplied instead of strings. By default,
no special formatting is applied.
Next: Radio lists, Previous: A LaTeX example, Up: Tables in arbitrary syntax [Contents][Index]
Orgtbl mode has built-in translator functions: orgtbl-to-csv
(comma-separated values), orgtbl-to-tsv
(TAB-separated values),
orgtbl-to-latex
, orgtbl-to-html
, orgtbl-to-texinfo
,
orgtbl-to-unicode
and orgtbl-to-orgtbl
. They use the generic
translator, orgtbl-to-generic
, which delegates translations to various
export back-ends.
Properties passed to the function through the ‘ORGTBL SEND’ line take precedence over properties defined inside the function. For example, this overrides the default LaTeX line endings, ‘\\’, with ‘\\[2mm]’:
#+ORGTBL: SEND test orgtbl-to-latex :lend " \\\\[2mm]"
For a new language translator, define a converter function. It can be a generic function, such as shown in this example. It marks a beginning and ending of a table with ‘!BTBL!’ and ‘!ETBL!’; a beginning and ending of lines with ‘!BL!’ and ‘!EL!’; and uses a TAB for a field separator:
(defun orgtbl-to-language (table params) "Convert the orgtbl-mode TABLE to language." (orgtbl-to-generic table (org-combine-plists '(:tstart "!BTBL!" :tend "!ETBL!" :lstart "!BL!" :lend "!EL!" :sep "\t") params)))
The documentation for the orgtbl-to-generic
function shows a complete
list of parameters, each of which can be passed through to
orgtbl-to-latex
, orgtbl-to-texinfo
, and any other function
using that generic function.
For complicated translations the generic translator function could be
replaced by a custom translator function. Such a custom function must take
two arguments and return a single string containing the formatted table. The
first argument is the table whose lines are a list of fields or the symbol
hline
. The second argument is the property list consisting of
parameters specified in the ‘#+ORGTBL: SEND’ line. Please share your
translator functions by posting them to the Org users mailing list,
emacs-orgmode@gnu.org.
Previous: Translator functions, Up: Tables in arbitrary syntax [Contents][Index]
Call the org-list-insert-radio-list
function to insert a radio list
template in HTML, LaTeX, and Texinfo mode documents. Sending and
receiving radio lists works is the same as for radio tables (see Radio tables) except for these differences:
ORGLST
keyword instead of ORGTBL
.
Built-in translators functions are: org-list-to-latex
,
org-list-to-html
and org-list-to-texinfo
. They use the
org-list-to-generic
translator function. See its documentation for
parameters for accurate customizations of lists. Here is a LaTeX example:
% BEGIN RECEIVE ORGLST to-buy % END RECEIVE ORGLST to-buy \begin{comment} #+ORGLST: SEND to-buy org-list-to-latex - a new house - a new computer + a new keyboard + a new mouse - a new life \end{comment}
C-c C-c on ‘a new house’ inserts the translated LaTeX list in-between the BEGIN and END marker lines.
Next: Special agenda views, Previous: Tables in arbitrary syntax, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Org supports dynamic blocks in Org documents. They are inserted with begin and end markers like any other ‘src’ code block, but the contents are updated automatically by a user function. For example, C-c C-x C-r inserts a dynamic table that updates the work time (see Clocking work time).
Dynamic blocks can have names and function parameters. The syntax is similar to ‘src’ code block specifications:
#+BEGIN: myblock :parameter1 value1 :parameter2 value2 ... #+END:
These command update dynamic blocks:
org-dblock-update
)Update all dynamic blocks in the current file.
Before updating a dynamic block, Org removes content between the BEGIN and
END markers. Org then reads the parameters on the BEGIN line for passing to
the writer function. If the function expects to access the removed content,
then Org expects an extra parameter, :content
, on the BEGIN line.
To syntax for calling a writer function with a named block, myblock
is: org-dblock-write:myblock
. Parameters come from the BEGIN line.
The following is an example of a dynamic block and a block writer function that updates the time when the function was last run:
#+BEGIN: block-update-time :format "on %m/%d/%Y at %H:%M" #+END:
The dynamic block’s writer function:
(defun org-dblock-write:block-update-time (params) (let ((fmt (or (plist-get params :format) "%d. %m. %Y"))) (insert "Last block update at: " (format-time-string fmt))))
To keep dynamic blocks up-to-date in an Org file, use the function,
org-update-all-dblocks
in hook, such as before-save-hook
. The
org-update-all-dblocks
function does not run if the file is not in
Org mode.
Dynamic blocks, like any other block, can be narrowed with
org-narrow-to-block
.
Next: Speeding up your agendas, Previous: Dynamic blocks, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Org provides a special hook to further limit items in agenda views:
agenda
, agenda*
149, todo
, alltodo
, tags
,
tags-todo
, tags-tree
. Specify a custom function that tests
inclusion of every matched item in the view. This function can also
skip as much as is needed.
For a global condition applicable to agenda views, use the
org-agenda-skip-function-global
variable. Org uses a global condition
with org-agenda-skip-function
for custom searching.
This example defines a function for a custom view showing TODO items with WAITING status. Manually this is a multi step search process, but with a custom view, this can be automated as follows:
The custom function searches the subtree for the WAITING tag and returns
nil
on match. Otherwise it gives the location from where the search
continues.
(defun my-skip-unless-waiting () "Skip trees that are not waiting" (let ((subtree-end (save-excursion (org-end-of-subtree t)))) (if (re-search-forward ":waiting:" subtree-end t) nil ; tag found, do not skip subtree-end))) ; tag not found, continue after end of subtree
To use this custom function in a custom agenda command:
(org-add-agenda-custom-command '("b" todo "PROJECT" ((org-agenda-skip-function 'my-skip-unless-waiting) (org-agenda-overriding-header "Projects waiting for something: "))))
Note that this also binds org-agenda-overriding-header
to a more
meaningful string suitable for the agenda view.
Search for entries with a limit set on levels for the custom search. This is
a general approach to creating custom searches in Org. To include all
levels, use ‘LEVEL>0’150. Then to selectively pick the
matched entries, use org-agenda-skip-function
, which also accepts Lisp
forms, such as org-agenda-skip-entry-if
and
org-agenda-skip-subtree-if
. For example:
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'scheduled)
Skip current entry if it has been scheduled.
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'notscheduled)
Skip current entry if it has not been scheduled.
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'deadline)
Skip current entry if it has a deadline.
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'scheduled 'deadline)
Skip current entry if it has a deadline, or if it is scheduled.
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'todo '("TODO" "WAITING"))
Skip current entry if the TODO keyword is TODO or WAITING.
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'todo 'done)
Skip current entry if the TODO keyword marks a DONE state.
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'timestamp)
Skip current entry if it has any timestamp, may also be deadline or scheduled.
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'regexp "regular expression")
Skip current entry if the regular expression matches in the entry.
(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'notregexp "regular expression")
Skip current entry unless the regular expression matches.
(org-agenda-skip-subtree-if 'regexp "regular expression")
Same as above, but check and skip the entire subtree.
The following is an example of a search for ‘WAITING’ without the special function:
(org-add-agenda-custom-command '("b" todo "PROJECT" ((org-agenda-skip-function '(org-agenda-skip-subtree-if 'regexp ":waiting:")) (org-agenda-overriding-header "Projects waiting for something: "))))
Next: Extracting agenda information, Previous: Special agenda views, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Some agenda commands slow down when the Org files grow in size or number. Here are tips to speed up:
(setq org-agenda-dim-blocked-tasks nil)
(setq org-agenda-inhibit-startup nil)
(setq org-agenda-use-tag-inheritance nil)
These options can be applied to selected agenda views. For more details about generation of agenda views, see the docstrings for the relevant variables, and this dedicated Worg page for agenda optimization.
Next: Using the property API, Previous: Speeding up your agendas, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Org provides commands to access agendas through Emacs batch mode. Through this command-line interface, agendas are automated for further processing or printing.
org-batch-agenda
creates an agenda view in ASCII and outputs to
STDOUT. This command takes one string parameter. When string length=1, Org
uses it as a key to org-agenda-custom-commands
. These are the same
ones available through C-c a.
This example command line directly prints the TODO list to the printer:
emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs -eval '(org-batch-agenda "t")' | lpr
When the string parameter length is two or more characters, Org matches it with tags/TODO strings. For example, this example command line prints items tagged with ‘shop’, but excludes items tagged with ‘NewYork’:
emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs \ -eval '(org-batch-agenda "+shop-NewYork")' | lpr
An example showing on-the-fly parameter modifications:
emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs \ -eval '(org-batch-agenda "a" \ org-agenda-span (quote month) \ org-agenda-include-diary nil \ org-agenda-files (quote ("~/org/project.org")))' \ | lpr
which will produce an agenda for the next 30 days from just the ~/org/projects.org file.
For structured processing of agenda output, use org-batch-agenda-csv
with the following fields:
category The category of the item head The headline, without TODO keyword, TAGS and PRIORITY type The type of the agenda entry, can be todo selected in TODO match tagsmatch selected in tags match diary imported from diary deadline a deadline scheduled scheduled timestamp appointment, selected by timestamp closed entry was closed on date upcoming-deadline warning about nearing deadline past-scheduled forwarded scheduled item block entry has date block including date todo The TODO keyword, if any tags All tags including inherited ones, separated by colons date The relevant date, like 2007-2-14 time The time, like 15:00-16:50 extra String with extra planning info priority-l The priority letter if any was given priority-n The computed numerical priority
If the selection of the agenda item was based on a timestamp, including those
items with DEADLINE
and SCHEDULED
keywords, then Org includes
date and time in the output.
If the selection of the agenda item was based on a timestamp (or deadline/scheduled), then Org includes date and time in the output.
Here is an example of a post-processing script in Perl. It takes the CSV output from Emacs and prints with a checkbox:
#!/usr/bin/perl # define the Emacs command to run $cmd = "emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs -eval '(org-batch-agenda-csv \"t\")'"; # run it and capture the output $agenda = qx{$cmd 2>/dev/null}; # loop over all lines foreach $line (split(/\n/,$agenda)) { # get the individual values ($category,$head,$type,$todo,$tags,$date,$time,$extra, $priority_l,$priority_n) = split(/,/,$line); # process and print print "[ ] $head\n"; }
Next: Using the mapping API, Previous: Extracting agenda information, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Functions for working with properties.
Get all properties of the entry at point-or-marker POM.
This includes the TODO keyword, the tags, time strings for deadline,
scheduled, and clocking, and any additional properties defined in the
entry. The return value is an alist. Keys may occur multiple times
if the property key was used several times.
POM may also be nil
, in which case the current entry is used.
If WHICH is nil
or all
, get all properties. If WHICH is
special
or standard
, only get that subclass.
Get value of PROPERTY
for entry at point-or-marker POM
. By
default, this only looks at properties defined locally in the entry. If
INHERIT
is non-nil
and the entry does not have the property,
then also check higher levels of the hierarchy. If INHERIT
is the
symbol selective
, use inheritance if and only if the setting of
org-use-property-inheritance
selects PROPERTY
for inheritance.
Delete the property PROPERTY
from entry at point-or-marker POM.
Set PROPERTY
to VALUE
for entry at point-or-marker POM.
Get all property keys in the current buffer.
Insert a property drawer for the current entry.
Set PROPERTY
at point-or-marker POM
to VALUES
.
VALUES
should be a list of strings. They will be concatenated, with
spaces as separators.
Treat the value of the property PROPERTY
as a whitespace-separated
list of values and return the values as a list of strings.
Treat the value of the property PROPERTY
as a whitespace-separated
list of values and make sure that VALUE
is in this list.
Treat the value of the property PROPERTY
as a whitespace-separated
list of values and make sure that VALUE
is not in this list.
Treat the value of the property PROPERTY
as a whitespace-separated
list of values and check if VALUE
is in this list.
Hook for functions supplying allowed values for a specific property.
The functions must take a single argument, the name of the property, and
return a flat list of allowed values. If ‘:ETC’ is one of
the values, use the values as completion help, but allow also other values
to be entered. The functions must return nil
if they are not
responsible for this property.
Previous: Using the property API, Up: Hacking [Contents][Index]
Org has sophisticated mapping capabilities for finding entries. Org uses this functionality internally for generating agenda views. Org also exposes an API for executing arbitrary functions for each selected entry. The API’s main entry point is:
Call ‘FUNC’ at each headline selected by MATCH
in SCOPE
.
‘FUNC’ is a function or a Lisp form. With the cursor positioned at the beginning of the headline, call the function without arguments. Org returns an alist of return values of calls to the function.
To avoid preserving point, Org wraps the call to FUNC
in
save-excursion form. After evaluation, Org moves the cursor to the end of
the line that was just processed. Search continues from that point forward.
This may not always work as expected under some conditions, such as if the
current sub-tree was removed by a previous archiving operation. In such rare
circumstances, Org skips the next entry entirely when it should not. To stop
Org from such skips, make ‘FUNC’ set the variable
org-map-continue-from
to a specific buffer position.
‘MATCH’ is a tags/property/TODO match. Org iterates only matched
headlines. Org iterates over all headlines when MATCH
is nil
or t
.
‘SCOPE’ determines the scope of this command. It can be any of:
nil the current buffer, respecting the restriction if any tree the subtree started with the entry at point region The entries within the active region, if any file the current buffer, without restriction file-with-archives the current buffer, and any archives associated with it agenda all agenda files agenda-with-archives all agenda files with any archive files associated with them (file1 file2 ...) if this is a list, all files in the list will be scanned
The remaining args are treated as settings for the scanner’s skipping facilities. Valid args are:
archive skip trees with the archive tag
comment skip trees with the COMMENT keyword
function or Lisp form
will be used as value for org-agenda-skip-function
,
so whenever the function returns t, FUNC
will not be called for that entry and search will
continue from the point where the function leaves it
The mapping routine can call any arbitrary function, even functions that change meta data or query the property API (see Using the property API). Here are some handy functions:
Change the TODO state of the entry. See the docstring of the functions for
the many possible values for the argument ARG
.
Change the priority of the entry. See the docstring of this function for the
possible values for ACTION
.
Toggle the tag TAG
in the current entry. Setting ONOFF
to
either on
or off
will not toggle tag, but ensure that it is
either on or off.
Promote the current entry.
Demote the current entry.
This example turns all entries tagged with TOMORROW
into TODO entries
with keyword UPCOMING
. Org ignores entries in comment trees and
archive trees.
(org-map-entries '(org-todo "UPCOMING") "+TOMORROW" 'file 'archive 'comment)
The following example counts the number of entries with TODO keyword
WAITING
, in all agenda files.
(length (org-map-entries t "/+WAITING" 'agenda))
Next: History and acknowledgments, Previous: Hacking, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
MobileOrg is a companion mobile app that runs on iOS and Android devices. MobileOrg enables offline-views and capture support for an Org mode system that is rooted on a “real” computer. MobileOrg can record changes to existing entries.
The iOS implementation for the iPhone/iPod Touch/iPad series of devices, was started by Richard Moreland and is now in the hands Sean Escriva. Android users should check out MobileOrg Android by Matt Jones. Though the two implementations are not identical, they offer similar features.
This appendix describes Org’s support for agenda view formats compatible with MobileOrg. It also describes synchronizing changes, such as to notes, between MobileOrg and the computer.
To change tags and TODO states in MobileOrg, first customize the variables
org-todo-keywords
and org-tag-alist
. These should cover all
the important tags and TODO keywords, even if Org files use only some of
them. Though MobileOrg has in-buffer settings, it understands TODO states
sets (see Per-file keywords) and mutually exclusive tags
(see Setting tags) only for those set in these variables.
• Setting up the staging area: | For the mobile device | |
• Pushing to MobileOrg: | Uploading Org files and agendas | |
• Pulling from MobileOrg: | Integrating captured and flagged items |
Next: Pushing to MobileOrg, Up: MobileOrg [Contents][Index]
MobileOrg needs access to a file directory on a server to interact with
Emacs. With a public server, consider encrypting the files. MobileOrg
version 1.5 supports encryption for the iPhone. Org also requires
openssl installed on the local computer. To turn on encryption, set
the same password in MobileOrg and in Emacs. Set the password in the
variable org-mobile-use-encryption
151. Note that even after MobileOrg encrypts the file contents, the
file names will remain visible on the file systems of the local computer, the
server, and the mobile device.
For a server to host files, consider options like Dropbox.com account152. On first connection, MobileOrg creates a directory MobileOrg/ on Dropbox. Pass its location to Emacs through an init file variable as follows:
(setq org-mobile-directory "~/Dropbox/MobileOrg")
Org copies files to the above directory for MobileOrg. Org also uses the same directory for sharing notes between Org and MobileOrg.
Next: Pulling from MobileOrg, Previous: Setting up the staging area, Up: MobileOrg [Contents][Index]
Org pushes files listed in org-mobile-files
to
org-mobile-directory
. Files include agenda files (as listed in
org-agenda-files
). Customize org-mobile-files
to add other
files. File names will be staged with paths relative to
org-directory
, so all files should be inside this
directory153.
Push creates a special Org file agendas.org with custom agenda views defined by the user154.
Org writes the file index.org, containing links to other files. MobileOrg reads this file first from the server to determine what other files to download for agendas. For faster downloads, MobileOrg will read only those files whose checksums155 have changed.
Previous: Pushing to MobileOrg, Up: MobileOrg [Contents][Index]
When MobileOrg synchronizes with the server, it pulls the Org files for viewing. It then appends to the file mobileorg.org on the server the captured entries, pointers to flagged and changed entries. Org integrates its data in an inbox file format.
org-mobile-inbox-for-pull
. Each captured entry and each editing event
is a top-level entry in the inbox file.
:FLAGGED:
. Org marks entries with problems with an error
message in the inbox. They have to be resolved manually.
Pressing ? displays the entire flagged note in another window. Org
also pushes it to the kill ring. To store flagged note as a normal note, use
? z C-y C-c C-c. Pressing ? twice does these things: first it
removes the :FLAGGED:
tag; second, it removes the flagged note from
the property drawer; third, it signals that manual editing of the flagged
entry is now finished.
C-c a ? returns to the agenda view to finish processing flagged entries. Note that these entries may not be the most recent since MobileOrg searches files that were last pulled. To get an updated agenda view with changes since the last pull, pull again.
Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Previous: MobileOrg, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Org was born in 2003, out of frustration over the user interface of the Emacs Outline mode. I was trying to organize my notes and projects, and using Emacs seemed to be the natural way to go. However, having to remember eleven different commands with two or three keys per command, only to hide and show parts of the outline tree, that seemed entirely unacceptable. Also, when using outlines to take notes, I constantly wanted to restructure the tree, organizing it paralleling my thoughts and plans. Visibility cycling and structure editing were originally implemented in the package outline-magic.el, but quickly moved to the more general org.el. As this environment became comfortable for project planning, the next step was adding TODO entries, basic timestamps, and table support. These areas highlighted the two main goals that Org still has today: to be a new, outline-based, plain text mode with innovative and intuitive editing features, and to incorporate project planning functionality directly into a notes file.
Since the first release, literally thousands of emails to me or to emacs-orgmode@gnu.org have provided a constant stream of bug reports, feedback, new ideas, and sometimes patches and add-on code. Many thanks to everyone who has helped to improve this package. I am trying to keep here a list of the people who had significant influence in shaping one or more aspects of Org. The list may not be complete, if I have forgotten someone, please accept my apologies and let me know.
Before I get to this list, a few special mentions are in order:
Bastien has written a large number of extensions to Org (most of them integrated into the core by now), including the LaTeX exporter and the plain list parser. His support during the early days was central to the success of this project. Bastien also invented Worg, helped establishing the Web presence of Org, and sponsored hosting costs for the orgmode.org website. Bastien stepped in as maintainer of Org between 2011 and 2013, at a time when I desperately needed a break.
Eric and Dan are jointly responsible for the Org-babel system, which turns Org into a multi-language environment for evaluating code and doing literate programming and reproducible research. This has become one of Org’s killer features that define what Org is today.
John has contributed a number of great ideas and patches directly to Org, including the attachment system (org-attach.el), integration with Apple Mail (org-mac-message.el), hierarchical dependencies of TODO items, habit tracking (org-habits.el), and encryption (org-crypt.el). Also, the capture system is really an extended copy of his great remember.el.
Without Sebastian, the HTML/XHTML publishing of Org would be the pitiful work of an ignorant amateur. Sebastian has pushed this part of Org onto a much higher level. He also wrote org-info.js, a Java script for displaying web pages derived from Org using an Info-like or a folding interface with single-key navigation.
See below for the full list of contributions! Again, please let me know what I am missing here!
I (Bastien) have been maintaining Org between 2011 and 2013. This appendix would not be complete without adding a few more acknowledgments and thanks.
I am first grateful to Carsten for his trust while handing me over the maintainership of Org. His unremitting support is what really helped me getting more confident over time, with both the community and the code.
When I took over maintainership, I knew I would have to make Org more collaborative than ever, as I would have to rely on people that are more knowledgeable than I am on many parts of the code. Here is a list of the persons I could rely on, they should really be considered co-maintainers, either of the code or the community:
Eric is maintaining the Babel parts of Org. His reactivity here kept me away from worrying about possible bugs here and let me focus on other parts.
Nicolas is maintaining the consistency of the deepest parts of Org. His work on org-element.el and ox.el has been outstanding, and it opened the doors for many new ideas and features. He rewrote many of the old exporters to use the new export engine, and helped with documenting this major change. More importantly (if that’s possible), he has been more than reliable during all the work done for Org 8.0, and always very reactive on the mailing list.
Achim rewrote the building process of Org, turning some ad hoc tools into a flexible and conceptually clean process. He patiently coped with the many hiccups that such a change can create for users.
The Org mode mailing list would not be such a nice place without Nick, who patiently helped users so many times. It is impossible to overestimate such a great help, and the list would not be so active without him.
I received support from so many users that it is clearly impossible to be fair when shortlisting a few of them, but Org’s history would not be complete if the ones above were not mentioned in this manual.
makeinfo
.
keymapp nil
bug, a
conflict with allout.el.
orgstruct-mode
so that users can
enjoy folding in non-org buffers by using Org headlines in comments.
Next: Main Index, Previous: History and acknowledgments, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008, 2013, 2014, 2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://fsf.org/ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of the Document to the public.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
“Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
“CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco, California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published by that same organization.
“Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in part, as part of another Document.
An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License, and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (C) year your name. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with…Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being list their titles, with the Front-Cover Texts being list, and with the Back-Cover Texts being list.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
Next: Key Index, Previous: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | #
%
:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Y Z |
---|
Jump to: | #
%
:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Y Z |
---|
Next: Command and Function Index, Previous: Main Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | $
%
'
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
[
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
~
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z |
---|
Jump to: | $
%
'
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
[
]
^
_
`
{
|
}
~
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z |
---|
Next: Variable Index, Previous: Key Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Jump to: | L N O P W |
---|
Jump to: | L N O P W |
---|
Previous: Command and Function Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This is not a complete index of variables and faces, only the ones that are mentioned in the manual. For a complete list, use M-x org-customize RET.
Jump to: | C H L O P U |
---|
Jump to: | C H L O P U |
---|
If you don’t use font-lock globally, turn it on in Org buffer
with (add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock)
Please consider subscribing to the mailing list, in order to minimize the work the mailing list moderators have to do.
See the variables
org-special-ctrl-a/e
, org-special-ctrl-k
, and
org-ctrl-k-protect-subtree
to configure special behavior of C-a,
C-e, and C-k in headlines.
Clocking only works with headings indented less than 30 stars.
see, however,
the option org-cycle-emulate-tab
.
The indirect buffer (see Indirect Buffers in GNU Emacs Manual) will contain the entire buffer, but will be narrowed to the current tree. Editing the indirect buffer will also change the original buffer, but without affecting visibility in that buffer.
When
org-agenda-inhibit-startup
is non-nil
, Org will not honor the default
visibility state when first opening a file for the agenda (see Speeding up your agendas).
See also the
variable org-show-context-detail
to decide how much context is shown
around each match.
This depends on the option
org-remove-highlights-with-change
When using ‘*’ as a bullet, lines must be indented or they will be seen as top-level headlines. Also, when you are hiding leading stars to get a clean outline view, plain list items starting with a star may be hard to distinguish from true headlines. In short: even though ‘*’ is supported, it may be better to not use it for plain list items.
You can filter out any of them by configuring
org-plain-list-ordered-item-terminator
.
You can also get ‘a.’, ‘A.’, ‘a)’ and
‘A)’ by configuring org-list-allow-alphabetical
. To minimize
confusion with normal text, those are limited to one character only. Beyond
that limit, bullets will automatically fallback to numbers.
If there’s a checkbox in the item, the cookie
must be put before the checkbox. If you have activated alphabetical
lists, you can also use counters like [@b]
.
If you do not want the item to be split, customize the
variable org-M-RET-may-split-line
.
If you want to
cycle around items that way, you may customize
org-list-use-circular-motion
.
See
org-list-use-circular-motion
for a cyclic behavior.
Many desktops intercept M-TAB to switch windows. Use C-M-i or ESC TAB instead for completion (see Completion).
The corresponding in-buffer
setting is: #+STARTUP: fninline
or #+STARTUP: nofninline
the
corresponding in-buffer options are fnadjust
and nofnadjust
.
To insert a vertical bar into a table
field, use \vert
or, inside a word abc\vert{}def
.
Centering does not work inside Emacs, but it does have an effect when exporting to HTML.
Org will understand references typed by the
user as ‘B4’, but it will not use this syntax when offering a formula
for editing. You can customize this behavior using the option
org-table-use-standard-references
.
For backward compatibility
you can also use special names like $LR5
and $LR12
to refer in
a stable way to the 5th and 12th field in the last row of the table.
However, this syntax is deprecated, it should not be used for new documents.
Use @>$
instead.
The computation time scales as O(N^2) because the table
named FOO
is parsed for each field to be read.
constants.el can
supply the values of constants in two different unit systems, SI
and cgs
. Which one is used depends on the value of the variable
constants-unit-system
. You can use the #+STARTUP
options
constSI
and constcgs
to set this value for the current
buffer.
The ‘printf’ reformatting is limited in precision because the value passed to it is converted into an ‘integer’ or ‘double’. The ‘integer’ is limited in size by truncating the signed value to 32 bits. The ‘double’ is limited in precision to 64 bits overall which leaves approximately 16 significant decimal digits.
Many desktops intercept M-TAB to switch windows. Use C-M-i or ESC TAB instead for completion (see Completion).
Such names must start by an alphabetic character and use only alphanumeric/underscore characters.
To insert a link targeting a headline, in-buffer completion can be used. Just type a star followed by a few optional letters into the buffer and press M-TAB. All headlines in the current buffer will be offered as completions.
When targeting a #+NAME
keyword,
#+CAPTION
keyword is mandatory in order to get proper numbering
(see Images and tables).
The actual behavior of the search will depend on the value of
the option org-link-search-must-match-exact-headline
. If its value
is nil
, then a fuzzy text search will be done. If it is t
, then only
the exact headline will be matched, ignoring spaces and cookies. If the
value is query-to-create
, then an exact headline will be searched; if
it is not found, then the user will be queried to create it.
Headline searches always match the exact headline, ignoring
spaces and cookies. If the headline is not found and the value of the option
org-link-search-must-match-exact-headline
is query-to-create
,
then the user will be queried to create it.
If the headline contains a timestamp, it will be removed from the link and result in a wrong link—you should avoid putting timestamp in the headline.
The library
org-id.el must first be loaded, either through org-customize
by
enabling org-id
in org-modules
, or by adding (require
'org-id)
in your Emacs init file.
Note that you don’t have to use this command to insert a link. Links in Org are plain text, and you can type or paste them straight into the buffer. By using this command, the links are automatically enclosed in double brackets, and you will be asked for the optional descriptive text.
After insertion of a stored link, the link will be
removed from the list of stored links. To keep it in the list later use, use
a triple C-u prefix argument to C-c C-l, or configure the option
org-keep-stored-link-after-insertion
.
This works if
a completion function is defined in the ‘:complete’ property of a link
in org-link-parameters
.
See the
option org-display-internal-link-with-indirect-buffer
with corresponding
#+STARTUP
keywords inlineimages
and noinlineimages
For backward compatibility, line numbers can also follow a single colon.
Of course, you can make a document that contains only long lists of TODO items, but this is not required.
Changing this variable only becomes effective after restarting Org mode in a buffer.
This is also true for the t command in the agenda buffers.
All characters are allowed except
@^!
, which have a special meaning here.
Check also the option
org-fast-tag-selection-include-todo
, it allows you to change the TODO
state through the tags interface (see Setting tags), in case you like to
mingle the two concepts. Note that this means you need to come up with
unique keys across both sets of keywords.
Org mode parses these lines only when Org mode is activated after visiting a file. C-c C-c with the cursor in a line starting with ‘#+’ is simply restarting Org mode for the current buffer.
The corresponding
in-buffer setting is: #+STARTUP: logdone
The corresponding in-buffer setting is: #+STARTUP:
lognotedone
.
See the option
org-log-states-order-reversed
Note that the
LOGBOOK
drawer is unfolded when pressing SPC in the agenda to
show an entry—use C-u SPC to keep it folded here
It is possible that Org mode will record two timestamps
when you are using both org-log-done
and state change logging.
However, it will never prompt for two notes—if you have configured
both, the state change recording note will take precedence and cancel
the ‘Closing Note’.
See also the option
org-priority-start-cycle-with-default
.
To keep subtasks out of the
global TODO list, see the org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels
.
With the exception of description
lists. But you can allow it by modifying org-list-automatic-rules
accordingly.
Set the option
org-checkbox-hierarchical-statistics
if you want such cookies to
count all checkboxes below the cookie, not just those belonging to direct
children.
C-u C-c C-c before the first bullet in a list with no checkbox will add checkboxes to the rest of the list.
As with all these in-buffer settings, pressing C-c C-c activates any changes in the line.
This is only true if the search does not involve more complex tests including properties (see Property searches).
Keys will automatically be assigned to tags which have no configured keys.
If more than one summary type apply to the property, the parent values are computed according to the first of them.
A time can also be a duration, using effort
modifiers defined in org-effort-durations
, e.g.,
‘3d 1h’. If any value in the column is as such, the
summary will also be an effort duration.
An age is defined as a duration since a given time-stamp (see Timestamps). It can also be expressed as days, hours, minutes and seconds, identified by ‘d’, ‘h’, ‘m’ and ‘s’ suffixes, all mandatory, e.g., ‘0d 13h 0m 10s’.
Please note that the COLUMNS definition must be on a single line—it is wrapped here only because of formatting constraints.
Contributed packages are not part of Emacs, but are distributed with the main distribution of Org (visit https://orgmode.org).
In this simplest form, the day name is optional when you type the date yourself. However, any dates inserted or modified by Org will add that day name, for reading convenience.
This is inspired by the standard ISO 8601 date/time format. To use an alternative format, see Custom time format.
When working with the standard diary sexp functions, you
need to be very careful with the order of the arguments. That order depends
evilly on the variable calendar-date-style
(or, for older Emacs
versions, european-calendar-style
). For example, to specify a date
December 1, 2005, the call might look like (diary-date 12 1 2005)
or
(diary-date 1 12 2005)
or (diary-date 2005 12 1)
, depending on
the settings. This has been the source of much confusion. Org mode users
can resort to special versions of these functions like org-date
or
org-anniversary
. These work just like the corresponding diary-
functions, but with stable ISO order of arguments (year, month, day) wherever
applicable, independent of the value of calendar-date-style
.
See the
variable org-read-date-prefer-future
. You may set that variable to
the symbol time
to even make a time before now shift the date to
tomorrow.
If
you don’t need/want the calendar, configure the variable
org-popup-calendar-for-date-prompt
.
If you find this distracting, turn the display off with
org-read-date-display-live
.
It will still
be listed on that date after it has been marked DONE. If you don’t like
this, set the variable org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done
.
with corresponding #+STARTUP
keywords logredeadline
, lognoteredeadline
, and
nologredeadline
with corresponding #+STARTUP
keywords logreschedule
, lognotereschedule
, and
nologreschedule
In fact,
the target state is taken from, in this sequence, the REPEAT_TO_STATE
property or the variable org-todo-repeat-to-state
. If neither of
these is specified, the target state defaults to the first state of the TODO
state sequence.
You can change this using the option
org-log-repeat
, or the #+STARTUP
options logrepeat
,
lognoterepeat
, and nologrepeat
. With lognoterepeat
, you
will also be prompted for a note.
Clocking only works if all
headings are indented with less than 30 stars. This is a hardcoded
limitation of lmax
in org-clock-sum
.
To resume the clock under the assumption that you have worked
on this task while outside Emacs, use (setq org-clock-persist t)
.
To add an effort estimate “on the fly”,
hook a function doing this to org-clock-in-prepare-hook
.
as recorded by the LAST_REPEAT
property
See also the variable
org-clock-modeline-total
.
The corresponding in-buffer setting is:
#+STARTUP: lognoteclock-out
Language terms can be set through the variable org-clock-clocktable-language-setup
.
Note that all parameters must be specified in a single line—the line is broken here only to fit it into the manual.
On computers using macOS,
idleness is based on actual user idleness, not just Emacs’ idle time. For
X11, you can install a utility program x11idle.c, available in the
contrib/scripts
directory of the Org git distribution, or install the
xprintidle package and set it to the variable
org-clock-x11idle-program-name
if you are running Debian, to get the
same general treatment of idleness. On other systems, idle time refers to
Emacs idle time only.
Please note the pitfalls of summing hierarchical data in a flat list (see Agenda column view).
Please select your own key, C-c c is only a suggestion.
Org used to offer four different targets for date/week
tree capture. Now, Org automatically translates these to use
file+olp+datetree
, applying the :time-prompt
and
:tree-type
properties. Please rewrite your date/week-tree targets
using file+olp+datetree
since the older targets are now deprecated.
A date tree is an outline structure with years on the highest level, months or ISO-weeks as sublevels and then dates on the lowest level. Tags are allowed in the tree structure.
If you need one of these sequences literally, escape the % with a backslash.
As required in Emacs Lisp, it is necessary to escape any backslash character in a string with another backslash. So, in order to use ‘%\1’ placeholder, you need to write ‘%\\1’ in the template.
If you define your own link types (see Adding hyperlink types), any property you store with
org-store-link-props
can be accessed in capture templates in a
similar way.
This will always be the other, not the user. See the variable org-from-is-user-regexp
.
If you move entries or Org files from one
directory to another, you may want to configure org-attach-directory
to contain an absolute path.
with corresponding
#+STARTUP
keywords logrefile
, lognoterefile
,
and nologrefile
If the value of that variable is not a list, but a single file name, then the list of agenda files will be maintained in that external file.
When using the dispatcher, pressing
< before selecting a command will actually limit the command to
the current file, and ignore org-agenda-files
until the next
dispatcher command.
For backward compatibility, you can also press 1 to restrict to the current buffer.
For backward compatibility, you can also press 0 to restrict to the current region/subtree.
For backward compatibility, the universal prefix C-u causes all TODO entries to be listed before the agenda. This feature is deprecated, use the dedicated TODO list, or a block agenda instead (see Block agenda).
org-anniversary
is just like diary-anniversary
, but the argument order is always according to ISO and therefore independent of the value of calendar-date-style
.
See Tag searches.
You can, however,
disable this by setting org-agenda-search-headline-for-time
variable
to a nil
value.
Custom commands can preset a filter by
binding the variable org-agenda-tag-filter-preset
as an option. This
filter will then be applied to the view and persist as a basic filter through
refreshes and more secondary filtering. The filter is a global property of
the entire agenda view—in a block agenda, you should only set this in the
global options section, not in the section of an individual block.
Only tags filtering will be respected here, effort filtering is ignored.
Moving agenda lines does not persist after an agenda refresh and does not modify the contributing .org files
You can also create persistent custom functions
through org-agenda-bulk-custom-functions
.
This file is parsed for the agenda when
org-agenda-include-diary
is set.
You can provide a description for a prefix key by inserting a cons cell with the prefix and the description.
Planned means
here that these entries have some planning information attached to them, like
a time-stamp, a scheduled or a deadline string. See
org-agenda-entry-types
on how to set what planning information will be
taken into account.
You need to install htmlize.el from Hrvoje Niksic’s repository.
To create PDF output, the ghostscript ps2pdf utility must be installed on the system. Selecting a PDF file will also create the postscript file.
If you want to store standard views like the weekly agenda or the global TODO list as well, you need to define custom commands for them in order to be able to specify file names.
Quoting depends on the system you use, please check the FAQ for examples.
This works automatically for
the HTML back-end (it requires version 1.34 of the htmlize.el package,
which you need to install). Fontified code chunks in LaTeX can be
achieved using either the
listings
or the
minted package.
If you use minted or listing, you must load the packages manually, for
example by adding the desired package to
org-latex-packages-alist
. Refer to org-latex-listings
for details.
Code in ‘src’ blocks may also be evaluated either interactively or on export. See Working with source code, for more information on evaluating code blocks.
Adding -k
to -n -r
will keep the
labels in the source code while using line numbers for the links, which might
be useful to explain those in an Org mode example code.
Upon exit, lines starting with ‘*’, ‘,*’, ‘#+’ and ‘,#+’ will get a comma prepended, to keep them from being interpreted by Org as outline nodes or special syntax. These commas will be stripped for editing with C-c ', and also for export.
You may select
a different-mode with the variable org-edit-fixed-width-region-mode
.
You can turn this on by default by setting the
variable org-pretty-entities
, or on a per-file base with the
#+STARTUP
option entitiespretty
.
This behavior can be disabled with -
export setting
(see Export settings).
LaTeX is a macro system based on Donald E. Knuth’s TeX system. Many of the features described here as “LaTeX” are really from TeX, but for simplicity I am blurring this distinction.
When MathJax is used, only the environments recognized by MathJax will be processed. When dvipng program, dvisvgm program or imagemagick suite is used to create images, any LaTeX environment will be handled.
These are respectively available at
http://sourceforge.net/projects/dvipng/, http://dvisvgm.bplaced.net/
and from the imagemagick suite. Choose the converter by setting the
variable org-preview-latex-default-process
accordingly.
Org mode has a method to test if the cursor is
inside such a fragment, see the documentation of the function
org-inside-LaTeX-fragment-p
.
Many desktops intercept M-TAB to switch windows. Use C-M-i or ESC TAB instead.
The variable
org-export-date-timestamp-format
defines how this time-stamp will be
exported.
Note that
org-link-search-must-match-exact-headline
is locally bound to
non-nil
. Therefore, org-link-search
only matches headlines and
named elements.
Since commas separate the arguments, commas within arguments have to be escaped with the backslash character. So only those backslash characters before a comma need escaping with another backslash character.
For a less drastic behavior, consider using a select tag (see Export settings) instead.
If BEAMER_ENV
is set, Org export adds
:B_environment:
tag to make it visible. The tag serves as a visual
aid and has no semantic relevance.
By default Org loads MathJax from cdnjs.com as recommended by MathJax.
If the classes on
TODO keywords and tags lead to conflicts, use the variables
org-html-todo-kwd-class-prefix
and org-html-tag-class-prefix
to
make them unique.
This does not allow setting different bibliography compilers for different files. However, “smart” LaTeX compilation systems, such as ‘latexmk’, can select the correct bibliography compiler.
http://sourceforge.net/projects/pgf/
Open Document Format for Office Applications (OpenDocument) Version 1.2
See MathToWeb.
See http://dlmf.nist.gov/LaTeXML/.
OpenDocument-v1.2 Specification
See the <table:table-template>
element of the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification
See the attributes table:template-name
,
table:use-first-row-styles
, table:use-last-row-styles
,
table:use-first-column-styles
, table:use-last-column-styles
,
table:use-banding-rows-styles
, and
table:use-banding-column-styles
of the <table:table>
element in
the OpenDocument-v1.2 specification
If the publishing directory is the same than the source directory, file.org will be exported as file.org.org, so probably don’t want to do this.
The option
org-babel-no-eval-on-ctrl-c-ctrl-c
can be used to remove code
evaluation from the C-c C-c key binding.
Actually, the constructs call_<name>()
and src_<lang>{} are not evaluated when they appear in a keyword line
(i.e. lines starting with #+KEYWORD:
, see In-buffer settings).
The org-indent-mode
also sets the
wrap-prefix
correctly for indenting and wrapping long lines of
headlines or text. This minor mode handles visual-line-mode
and
directly applied settings through word-wrap
.
Also see the variable org-adapt-indentation
.
Because ‘LEVEL=2’ has 3 stars, ‘LEVEL=3’ has 4 stars, and so on
By default this works only for LaTeX, HTML,
and Texinfo. Configure the variable orgtbl-radio-table-templates
to
install templates for other export formats.
If the #+TBLFM
line contains an odd number of dollar
characters, this may cause problems with font-lock in LaTeX mode. As
shown in the example you can fix this by adding an extra line inside the
comment
environment that is used to balance the dollar expressions.
If you are using AUCTeX with the font-latex library, a much better
solution is to add the comment
environment to the variable
LaTeX-verbatim-environments
.
The agenda*
view is the same as
agenda
except that it only considers appointments, i.e.,
scheduled and deadline items that have a time specification ‘[h]h:mm’ in
their time-stamps.
Note that, for
org-odd-levels-only
, a level number corresponds to order in the
hierarchy, not to the number of stars.
If Emacs is configured for
safe storing of passwords, then configure the variable,
org-mobile-encryption-password
; please read the docstring of that
variable.
An alternative is to use webdav server. MobileOrg documentation has details of webdav server configuration. Additional help is at FAQ entry.
Symbolic links in org-directory
should have the
same name as their targets.
While creating the agendas, Org mode will force
ID properties on all referenced entries, so that these entries can be
uniquely identified if MobileOrg flags them for further action. To avoid
setting properties configure the variable
org-mobile-force-id-on-agenda-items
to nil
. Org mode will then
rely on outline paths, assuming they are unique.
Checksums are stored automatically in the file checksums.dat.
mobileorg.org will be empty after this operation.